Copyright: (c) 2002 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: (c) 2002 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


AVI

Audio video interleaved format is a Microsoft multi-media format where audio and video elements are stored in alternating segments.


BMP (OS/2)

This type of bitmap file is designed for the OS/2 operating system.


CAL

CALS Raster (CAL) is a bitmap format used mainly for document storage by high-end CAD programs. It supports a monochrome (1-bit) color depth and is used as a data graphics exchange format for computer aided design and manufacturing, technical graphics, and image processing applications.


CDX

The CDX file format is a compressed CorelDRAW file.


CGM

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) is a metafile format used for transferring vector graphics between drawing applications. It supports RGB color. CGM files can contain both vectors and bitmaps, but usually contain one graphic type or the other [image] rarely both.


CLK

The CLK file format is an animation file native to Corel R.A.V.E.


CPX

The CPX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow 5. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps.


DCS

The DCS file format, developed by QuarkXPress, is an extension of the standard encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format. Generally, the DCS file format consists of five files. Four of the five files contain information about high-resolution color. This information is expressed in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) format. The fifth file, considered the master file, contains a PICT preview of the DCS file.


EMF

Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) is the native internal file format of Windows 95 and Windows NT. It supports both bitmap and vector information and 24-bit RGB color. EMF is a metafile format used to import graphics from Windows applications.


FH

The FH format is the native vector file format for Macromedia Freehand. Corel graphics applications only support Macromedia FreeHand versions 7 and 8.


IMG

GEM Paint (IMG) is a bitmap format that is the native bitmapped file format of the GEM environment. IMG files support 1 and 4-bit paletted color. and are compressed using an RLE method. IMG was a common format in the early days of desktop publishing.


MAC

MacPaint (MAC) is a bitmap format that uses the file extensions MAC, PCT, PNT and PIX. It is the format used by the MacPaint program that was included with the Macintosh 128. It supports only 2 colors and a palette of patterns. It is used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black-and-white graphics and clipart. The maximum size for MAC images is 720x576.


MCW

The MCW file format is a native format of Microsoft Word for Macintosh.


MIF

Maker Interchange Format (MIF) is an ANSI format for exchanging files between Adobe FrameMaker and other applications. When you import or export MIF files to or from CorelDRAW, only the formatted text is transferred. Any graphic elements in the file are not transferred.


PBM

Portable bitmap format (PBM) supports only monochrome bitmaps. It is supported by the PNM format.


PLT

The PLT file format, developed by Hewlett-Packard is vector-based. It is used in programs, such as AutoCAD, for printing drawings on plotters. Other Corel applications can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. A scaling factor of 1016 plotter units = 1 inch is used.


PGM

Portable Grayscale image (PGM) is a bitmap format that supports grayscale.


PNM

Portable Anymap (PNM) format is a bitmap format that supports PGM, PGM, or PPM.


PP4

The PP4 file format is a native file format for Micrographx Picture Publisher 4.


PP5

The PP5 file format is a native file format for Micrographx Picture Publisher 5.


PPM

Portable Pixel bitmap (PPM) is a bitmap format that supports full-color images.


PPT

The PPT file format is native to Microsoft PowerPoint.


PRN

PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import .PS, .PRN, and .EPS PostScript files.


PS

PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import .PS, .PRN, and .EPS PostScript files.


RTF

Rich Text Format (RTF) is a text format that stores plain text plus text formatting such as bold. When you import an RTF file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in your file they will not be imported to or exported from CorelDRAW.


SAM

The SAM file format is a native format of Ami Professional, a word processing application. When you import a SAM file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file, they will not be imported or exported.


SCT

The SCT file format is used for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners. The bitmaps are then processed for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs.


SHW

The SHW file format is a native format for Corel Presentations.


SVG

Scaleable Vector Graphics format (SVG) is used for vector graphics based on Extensible Markup Language (XML).


TTF

The TrueType Font (TTF) file format was created jointly by Apple Computer and Microsoft Corporation. It is the most common format for fonts used in both Macintosh and Windows operating systems. The TTF file format prints a font as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. True Type fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


TXT

ANSI Text (TXT) is a vector format that stores ANSI characters. This format is able to store text information but not formatting information, such as the font type or size. When you import a TXT file to, or export it file from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file, they will not be imported or exported.


VSD

VSD is the Visio drawing format. It can contain bitmaps and vectors.


WK

The WK file format, developed by Lotus, is the native format for Lotus 1-2-3 files.


WMF

Windows Metafile Format (WMF), developed by Microsoft Corporation, stores both vector and bitmap information. It was developed as the internal file format for Microsoft Windows 3. It supports 24-bit RGB color and is supported by most Windows applications.


WPM

The WPM file format is a native format of Corel WordPerfect for Macintosh.


WQ

The WQ, WB file format is the native file format for Corel Quattro Pro.


WB

The WQ, WB file format is the native file format for Corel Quattro Pro.


WS*

The WS* file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar version 3.3 to 6.0. When you import a WS* file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


WSD

The WSD file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar 7. When you import a WSD file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


WSW

The WSW file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar 2000. When you export a WSW file from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be exported to the WSW file.


XLS

The XLS file format, developed by Microsoft Corporation, is the native file format for Microsoft Excel.


XY

The XY file format is a native format of the word processing application, XY Write. When you import an XY file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


PAT

The PAT file format is for a pattern file.


CDT

The CDT file format is for a CorelDRAW template file.


AIF

The AIF file format is a Macintosh AIFF sound file.


WAV

The WAV file format is for a Windows waveform file.


DRW

The DRW file format is for a Micrografx 2.x or 3.x file.


FMV

The FMV file format is for a Frame Vector Metafile.


GEM

The GEM file format is for a GEM file.


PIC

The PIC file format is for a Lotus PIC file.


MET

The MET file format is for a MET Metafile.


NAP

The NAP file format is for a NAP Metafile.


PFB

The PFB file format is for an Adobe Type 1 Font file.


XPM

The XPM file format is used with an XPixMap Image file.


XCF

The XCF file format is used with a Gimp Image file.


WI

The WI file format is used for low file degradation under high compression in grayscale and 24-bit images.


WPG

The WPG file format is used with a WordPefect Graphic file.


FPX

The FlashPIX file format stores images at different resolutions in a single file.


Text here for overall statement re Paint 10....


 All of the commands available in the application can be displayed in a single list in the Options dialog box, allowing you to customize the menus, toolbox, toolbars, and status bar all at once. You can also drag-and-drop menu items from the menu to a property bar or to another menu by holding down the ALT key.


The toolbox and all of the menus and  property bars have been revisited so that icons and tool placement match throughout the application.


You can export your customized workspace, or portions of it, and share it with others. Also included is a built-in option to export your customized workspace to email.


 You can control the transparency of certain CorelPHOTO-PAINT workspace items for Windows 2000. After enabling the feature, you can control transparency for command bars, Dockers, and more. You can also control the level of transparency; from 0 to 100 percent.


Display caching lets you pan and zoom in real time, even on large images.


Many of the interactive tools now come with presets that let you view and apply predefined settings for those tools quickly and easily.


You can now preview formatting options and effects before applying them to your image using RealTime Preview. You can scroll through and preview formatting options and effects, such as the Interactive Drop Shadow, and see how they affect the active object or image.


This new feature lets you hide objects and changes on differen layers using the list in the Object Docker window. You can edit objects within an image, trace the history of their changes, and create what-if scenarios using this feature.


 Extensive support for popular file formats have been added, including XPixMap (.xpm) and The GIMP (.xcf).


T


Red eye removal replaces the red eye in a photograph with your selected color.


Smart blur lets you create images with sharp edges and blurred contents, and gives you more control over the degree to which images are blurred.


The Interactive Drop shadow tool allows you to control the opacity and feathering of a drop shadow using sliders right on the drop shadow controls.


The shape properties of the masks have been adapted so that masks can be moved more freely within a document. This means masks will no longer automatically clip as soon as they are moved out of the document space. Masks can also be dragged and dropped between open documents.


The new Channel mixer lets you blend color channels by percentages to give you more color balance control.


The Anti-Aliasing tools have been expanded to give you better quality text, especially at small point sizes.


Top Hinted text is a new option that aid the clarity of text at small point sizes.


Text-On-A-Path tool lets you bind text to a path, leaving both the path and the original text editable.


You can edit text without losing transformations such as scaling, skewing and rotating.


Corel Image Optimizer helps you reduce the file size of an image, letting you save bandwidth for faster downloading of Web pages. Image Optimizer lets you see four separate, live previews of possible export modes or other image variations before sending an image to the Internet.


The new Web connector Docker window lets you browse the World Wide Web right from the application. This lets you connect to Corel's community Web site for graphic designers at http://www.designer.com/ on the Internet without leaving the application.


A completely redesigned UI makes color management more intuitive by combining all the essential color management options in one redesigned dialog box. You can now take advantage of the predefined color management styles or save your own color management profiles.


New color sliders have been added to the Color Docker window that work with all the standard color models as well as with Web-safe colors.


You can now embed an ICC color profile, author and keyword information, and any type of file into a PDF file. You can also publish several open documents to one multipage PDF file.


You can now specify the order of color separations and can align all printers' marks to the edge of a graphic or to the edge of a page.


You can streamline your workflow by specifying trapping and separations parameters in advance with a full range of In-RIP trapping options for PostScript 3 output devices.


 Bitstream Font Navigator 4.0 offers a quick and easy way to find and install fonts, organize fonts into manageable groups, and view and print font samples.


 Canto Cumulus Desktop LE 5.0 organizes media and graphics files into a catalog, which can be indexed so that you can find images, designs, clipart, stock photos, and Apple(R) QuickTime(R) movies quickly and easily.


CorelTRACE 10 is a bitmap-to-vector tracing utility that converts bitmap images to vector images.


Corel TEXTURE lets you simulate natural textures, such as clouds, marble, and wood, by combining up to seven user-defined material layers.


Corel CAPTURE 10 lets you capture on-screen computer images and record on-screen actions as animation files. You can capture images of an entire screen, individual windows, toolbars, flyouts, menus, or any rectangular, elliptical, or freehand area you define.


Color Correction Arrows
 Allows you to correct colors between devices, and control how colors are displayed. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off.


Uniform Fill button
 Opens the Uniform fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a uniform fill color.


Fill button
 Opens the Fill flyout. The Fill flyout provides preset fills, as well as various tools for setting uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern fills.


Advanced Import/Exporting Settings button
 Opens the Advanced import/export settings dialog box, which allows you to choose import and export options for profiles.


Advanced Settings button
 Opens the Advanced settings dialog box, which allows you to choose Rendering intent and color engine settings.


Advanced Display Settings button
 Opens the Advanced display settings dialog box, which allows you to choose settings for the out-of-gamut warning color and mapping colors into CMYK gamut.


Create New Custom Palette button
 Lets you create a new custom color palette.


Open Custom Palette button
 Lets you open a custom color palette.


Outline Color button
 Opens the Outline color dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a custom outline color. You can also create and select colors from a custom palette.


Advanced Printer Settings button
 Opens the Advanced printer settings dialog box, which allows you to link a color profile to a composite printer.


Save Custom Palette button
 Lets you save a custom color palette.


Save Custom Palette As button
 Lets you save a custom color palette.


Scanner/Digital Camera button
 Represents a scanner and digital camera.


Advanced Printer Settings button
 Opens the Advanced printer settings dialog box, which allows you to link a color profile to a separations printer.


Paint Color swatch
 Opens the Foreground color dialog box, which lets you choose or create a foreground color.


Paper Color swatch
 Opens the Background color dialog box, which lets you choose or create a background color.


Select Fill button
 Opens the Select fill dialog box, which lets you choose a fill color or texture.


Add Preset button
 Adds a preset color management style to the Color management dialog box.


Remove Preset button
 Removes a preset color management style from the Color management dialog box.


Eyedropper 3X3 button
 Samples and averages the colors of 9 pixels in a 3 x 3 pixel area.


Eyedropper 5X5 button
 Samples and averages the colors of 25 pixels in a 5 x 5 pixel area. This sample size is suitable for high-resolution images.


Eyedropper selection
 Samples and averages the colors of pixels in the selected area.


Color separations button
 Lets you preview color separations before printing.


Mini preview button
 Lets you view the Mini preview window in the Print dialog box.


Mini preview button
 Lets you view the Mini preview window in the Print dialog box.


double sided layout button
 Lets you print on both sides of the page.


imposition layout tool
 Lets you create and edit imposition layouts.


auto margins
 Sets the margins automatically.


auto gutter spacing
 Sets gutter spacing automatically.


cloned auto ordering
 Arranges the same page at each location on a signature.


cut location
 Positions where the document is cut.


equal margins
 Sets the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


equal gutters
 Applies equal horizontal and vertical gutter sizes.


fold location
 Positions where the document is folded.


intelligent auto ordering
 Arranges pages on a signature automatically.


Marks placement tool
 Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


sequential auto ordering
 Arranges pages in reading order, from left to right and top to bottom.


maintain document page size
 Crops the edge of the signature, instead of scaling down the document page.


Add preflight settings button
 Lets you save customized settings as a preset.


Add preflight settings button
 Lets you save customized settings as a preset.


Remove Preflight settings
 Deletes a customized preset.


Add PDF style
 Lets you save a customized PDF style as a preset.


Remove PDF style
 Deletes a customized PDF style preset.


# pgx_3d_zoom


# pgx_3d_slide


# pgx_3d_rotate


# pgx_add light


# pgx_imgprop_button$ Image Properties button


# pgx_imgprop_button_exp$ Image Properties button


# pgx_add_preset$ Add Preset button


Status bar arrow
Lets you change the type of information displayed on the status bar.


Dual window preview button
Lets you preview the original image and the changes to the image in the dialog box when the Preview button [image] is pressed.


Pick flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Pick flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Object pick and Mask transform tools. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Mask tools flyout
Click and hold the mouse on any of the tools to display the Mask flyout. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Zoom flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Zoom flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Zoom and Pan tools. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Touch-up flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Touch-up flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Red-eye removal tool and the Clone tool. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Shape flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Shape flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Line, and Path tools. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Fill flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Fill flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Fill and Interactive fill tools. The flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Interactive/Transparency flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Interactive/Transparency flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Interactive dropshadow tool, the Interactive object transparency tool, the Color transparency tool, and the Object transparency brush tool.


Effects flyout
Click and hold any of the tools to display the Effects flyout. This flyout gives you access to the Paint, Effect, Image sprayer, Undo brush, and Replace color tools. This flyout is accessed from the toolbox.


Color control area


Color control area
Lets you choose colors and fills.

Consists of three swatches: a Foreground color swatch, a Background color swatch, and a Fill color swatch. The arrow lets you swap the foreground and background colors, and the Reset color icon lets you return to the default settings.


Background color swatch
Displays the current background color, and lets you choose a new background color.


Foreground color swatch
Displays the current foreground color. You can also choose a new foreground color which is used for paint tools and the Text tool.


Reset color icon
Lets you reset the Foreground and Background color swatches to their default colors. The Foreground and Fill color swatches return to black, and the Background color swatch returns to white.


Color control arrows
Lets you switch foreground and background colors.


Tools


Object pick tool
Use to select, move, and transform an object.


Interactive object transparency tool
Lets you make the colors of an object fade gradually towards the image background color.


Object transparency brush tool
Lets you brush areas on an object to make them more transparent.


Rectangle mask tool
Lets you define rectangular editable areas.


Circle mask tool
Lets you define elliptical editable areas.


Freehand mask tool
Lets you define irregularly shaped or polygonal editable areas.


Lasso mask tool
Lets you define editable areas that are irregular in shape and surrounded by pixels of similar colors.


Scissors mask tool
Lets you detect edges of elements in your image, that is, the outline of areas that are in contrasting color to their surroundings, and place the mask marquee along that edge. It also can be used to combine freehand segments with segments that are created by auto-sensing the edge of colored areas.


Magic wand mask tool
Lets you define irregularly shaped editable areas that include all adjacent pixels that are similar in color to the pixel you first clicked. Use this tool when you want to apply an effect to an area that is irregular in shape but that includes many shades of the same color.


Mask brush tool
Lets you define an editable area by brushing an area as if you were painting. To use physically separate strokes of the brush to create the editable area, enable the Additive mask mode.


Mask transform tool
Lets you transform a mask marquee by moving the handles that appear when this tool is selected. You can size, scale, move, skew, rotate, distort, and apply perspective to a mask marquee.


Path tool
Lets you create and edit paths in your image. Paths can be used to create masks, apply brush strokes along a specific line, and create nonrectangular bitmaps for use in other applications.


Crop tool
Lets you define a cropping area on an open image by creating a rectangular bounding box.


Zoom tool
Lets you magnify areas of your picture.


Pan tool
Lets you drag areas of an image into view when the image is larger than its window.


Red-eye removal tool
Lets you remove the red-eye effect from the eyes of subjects in photos.


Eyedropper tool
Lets you select, or sample, colors from an open image.


Undo brush tool
Lets you restore image areas to how they looked before your last brush stroke.


Eraser tool
Lets you make object pixels transparent to reveal the object or image background underneath.


Replace color brush tool
Lets you replace the foreground color in your image with the background color.


Rectangle tool
Lets you draw square or rectangular shapes.


Ellipse tool
Lets you draw circular or elliptical shapes.


Polygon tool
Lets you draw hollow or filled polygons. The New object button on the property bar creates new polygons as objects that can be moved and transformed without affecting the underlying image.


Line tool
Lets you draw single or joined straight line segments using the foreground color. The New object button on the property bar creates new lines as objects that can be moved and transformed without affecting the underlying image.


Text tool
Lets you add text to your image.


Fill tool
Lets you fill areas with one of four fill types: uniform, fountain, bitmap, and texture.


Interactive fill tool
Lets you apply a gradient fill to the entire image, object, or selection. A gradient fill is a type of fountain fill that rather than progressing from one color to another, progresses from a color and transparency value to a different color and transparency value.


Image sprayer tool
Lets you load one or more images and spray them on your image. You can change the size, tiling, and order of the images, as well as create new image lists.


Dropshadow tool
Lets you create objects that look like shadows of other objects.


Paint tool
Lets you paint on an image using the foreground color.


Effect tool
Lets you perform local color and tonal corrections on the image.


Clone tool
Lets you duplicate part of an image and apply it to another part of the image or to another image. The property bar provides specialized cloning brushes that create a duplicate in the pointillist (dots) style and impressionist (lines) style.


Clone from saved tool
Lets you restore the image to how it looked when it was last saved.


Clone from fill tool
Lets you paint with the current fill in the same way you apply paint using a brush tool.


Impressionism clone
Lets you clone the colors in an image using an Impressionist brush style. The cloned colors are determined by the color of the pixel at the source point and the color variations that you specify.


Pointillism clone
Lets you clone the colors in an image using a Pointillist brush style. The cloned colors are determined by the color of the pixel at the source point.


Feather preview button
Displays the type and width of feathering on the edges of an object before you apply the feathering to the object.


Smear tool
Lets you spread colors around in an image by brushing over them to produce a similar effect as dragging across wet paint.


Smudge tool
Lets you blur colors or hard edges in an image by brushing over them to produce a similar effect as rubbing a pastel drawing.


Brighten tool
Lets you brighten or darken areas in an image by brushing over them.


Contrast tool
Lets you adjust the transition between colors or hard edges in an image by brushing over them to increase or decrease the contrast.


Hue tool
Lets you shift the hues in an image by brushing over them.


Hue replacer tool
Lets you replace the hues in an image by brushing over them. This effect is based on the foreground color.


Sponge tool
Lets you saturate or desaturate areas of an image by brushing over them.


Sharpen tool
Lets you increase the definition of soft edges by sharpening them.


Tint tool
Lets you tint areas of an image with the foreground color by brushing over them.


Blend tool
Lets you soften the transition between colors or hard edges in an image by brushing over them.


Undither tool
Lets you create a smooth transition between adjacent pixels of different colors or brightness levels. It works by adding intermediate pixels whose values are between those of the adjacent pixels.


Dodge/burn tool
Lets you lighten and darken areas of an image.


Preview
Lets you preview the transformations you make to an image before applying them permanently.


Image slicing tool
Lets you cut a large image into smaller sections that can be modified for the World Wide Web.


Property bar (general)


Open advanced options button
Lets you access the advanced options on the extended property bar.


Close advanced options button
Lets you hide the advanced options on the extended property bar.


Active tool help button
Lets you access Help for the active tool. A question mark displays on the button along with an icon that changes to match the active tool. The example shows the Help button for the Text tool.


Tabs and buttons for Fill tool and fill dialogs


Direct color path
Determines the intermediate colors of the fill by traveling in a straight line across the color wheel between the colors you specify as To and From colors.


Clockwise color path
Determines the intermediate colors of the fill by traveling clockwise around the color wheel between the colors you specify as To and From colors.


Counterclockwise color path
Determines the intermediate colors of the fill by traveling counterclockwise around the color wheel between the colors you specify as To and From colors.


Fountain fill
Selects fountain fill as the current fill type.


Uniform fill
Selects uniform fill as the current fill type.


Bitmap fill
Selects a full-color bitmap pattern as the current fill type.


Edit fill button
Lets you edit the current fill.


Texture fill
Selects texture fill as the current fill type.


Horizontal mirror
Mirrors the selected object or a selection along its horizontal axis.


Vertical mirror
Mirrors the selected object or a selection along its vertical axis.


Distort mode
Invokes the Distort mode for the Object pick tool and the Mask transform tool. It is used to stretch and bend the selected object or an editable area.


Perspective mode
Invokes the Perspective mode for the Object pick tool and the Mask transform tool. It is used to add a three-dimensional appearance to the selected object or an editable area.


Apply button
Lets you apply transformations defined by numerical values you specify.


Position and size mode
Lets you change the location and size of the selected object or an editable area.


Relative position button
Moves the selected object or mask marquee by the specified horizontal and vertical distance relative to its current location.


Size mode
Displays the controls used to change the dimensions of the selected object or an editable area.


Rotate mode
Lets you rotate the selected object or an editable area around its center.


Relative center button
Moves the center of rotation of the object or mask marquee relative to its current location, by the distance specified in the horizontal and vertical boxes.


Scale mode
Lets you change the size of the selected object or an editable area by choosing a percentage of its original dimensions. Can also be used to mirror or flip the selected object or an editable area.


Skew mode
Lets you slant the selected object or an editable area.


Objects button
Opens the Objects Docker window/palette.


Align button
Opens the Align and distribute dialog box, which lets you set alignment and distribution settings for the selected object.


Normal mode
Activates the Normal mask mode (default), which lets you create a single editable area in the image window.


Additive mode
Activates the Additive mask mode, which lets you select multiple editable areas in an image.


Subtractive mode
Activates the Subtractive mask mode, which lets you remove areas from an editable area.


XOR mode
Activates the Overlap mask mode, which lets you select multiple editable areas in an image. If areas overlap, the overlapping regions are excluded from the editable area and added to the protected area.


HSB mode
Determines the color tolerance based on the similarity of hue, saturation, and brightness levels between adjacent pixels.


Normal color mode
Determines the color tolerance based on color similarity.


Anti-alias button
Applies anti-aliasing when creating an editable area, a shape, or applying transformations to mask marquees and objects.


Create text mask
Automatically renders as an editable area the text you type in the image window. This results in a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply effects, image commands, and so on.


Stroke mask marquee
Applies a brush stroke or an effect along the mask marquee.


Width box
Lets you specify the fixed width, in pixels, of an editable area. When the Fixed size style is selected, every editable area is created as a rectangle with the dimensions specified in the width and height boxes.


Remove mask button
Removes the mask from the image window.


Paint on mask button
Displays a grayscale version of the mask and editable area in an image so that you can edit them.


Create mask button
Creates an editable area that is the size and shape of the selected object.


Mask overlay button
Superimposes a red semitransparent sheet over all the masked areas on the image.


Show mask marquee button
Shows or hides the mask marquee.


Invert mask button
Reverses the mask, changing protected areas to editable areas and vice versa.


Mask visible button
Selects areas outside the active object in addition to areas within the active object.


Float mask button
Separates the editable area and the pixels enclosed by its marquee from the background so that you can move the editable area without affecting the underlying image.


Color transparency tool
Makes pixels with a specific color value in an object transparent. You can keep selecting other pixels to make more of the object transparent.


Center text button
Centers lines of text in a text object.


Bold button
Bolds text character(s).


Italic button
Italicizes text character(s).


Underline button
Underlines text character(s).


Edit text line
Opens the Edit underline dialog box, which lets you adjust the properties of an underline, strike through, or overscore applied to text.


Format text
Opens the Format text dialog box, from which you can adjust font properties, text object alignment, and character shifting.


Top hinted
Applies anti-aliasing to small fonts to make text easier to read.


Text path other side
Places text on the opposite side of a path.


Vertical orientation
Changes the orientation of selected text to vertical.


Horizontal orientation
Changes the orientation of selected text to horizontal.


Shape tool button
Lets you edit the shape of the path displayed in the image window, such as by moving path segments, nodes, and control points. It is also used to select nodes and segments you want to convert to a different type.


Delete path button
Removes the path currently displayed in the image window and lets you delete the saved version of the path, if one exists.


New path button
Creates a new path. This button clears the existing paths from the image window. You can save the existing paths before clearing them.


Save path button
Saves the current path.


Open path button
Opens paths that have been saved.


Add node button
Adds a node at the selected location on the path. If you select a segment, the new node is placed in the middle of the selected path segment.


Delete nodes button
Deletes selected nodes from the path. The shape of the path may change when you delete nodes.


Join selected nodes button
Joins the two end nodes selected. The nodes merge into one node halfway between their current location.


Break selected nodes button
Breaks up the path at the selected node. Two end nodes are created but remain superimposed. Drag one of the nodes to another location.


To line button
Converts the selected curve segment on a path to a line.


To curve button
Converts the selected line segment on a path to a curve. The change may not be apparent on the segment. Select the segment’s nodes to see the control points that let you shape the curve.


Elastic mode button
Use to move several nodes on a path. The segments located between selected nodes stretch and shrink like a rubber band.


Sharp curve button
Converts the selected nodes to sharp nodes, used to make sharp changes in the direction of the path.


Symmetrical button
Converts the selected nodes to a symmetrical segment, which produces a curve that has the same angle on both sides of the node.


Smooth button
Converts the selected nodes to a smooth segment, which produces a curve that has the node and the associated control points on a straight line.


Path to mask button
Creates an editable area using the selected path as its shape. Use the Mask transform tool to move the editable area to see the path it was created from.


Mask to path button
Creates a path from the mask marquee displayed in the image window. The editable area remains after this operation has been performed.


Stroke to path button
Applies a brush stroke or an effect along the path outline.


Show/hide path button
Displays or hides the path on the image.


Rotate and skew nodes button
Displays controls that let you rotate and skew nodes on a path.


Stretch and scale nodes button
Displays controls that let you stretch and scale nodes on a path.


Bezier tool
Lets you create paths or add segments to a path.


Freehand path tool
Lets you draw a path by dragging the pointer like a pencil on paper.


Clipping path icon
Indicates that the path is a clipping path.


Repeat stroke along path button
Lets you repeat a brush stroke along a path.


Outline shape button
Lets you edit border properties, such as width and color.


Zoom to previous
Lets you toggle between the current and previous zoom levels.


Eye icon
Toggles the display of the associated object or channel on and off. An invisible object is automatically locked, that is, protected from editing changes made to the image.


Create object copy selection button
Copies the pixels of the current editable area to create an object. The color of the marquee changes to reflect the transformation.


Delete object button
Lets you delete the selected object(s).


New object button
Creates a new object with a shape or paint tool. If this command is not activated, the new object is created as a part of the last selected object.


New object button
Creates a new object with a shape or paint tool. If this command is not activated, the new object is created as a part of the last selected object.


Create objects from background button
Converts the background to an object.


Preview alignment and distribution
Previews the object alignment or distribution before applying it to the image.


New lens button
Opens the New lens dialog box, which lets you create a new lens on your image.


Paper clip icon
Indicates a clipping group.


Lock object button
Enable to maintain the current shape and transparency of an object when you edit it.


Copy shadow button
Lets you copy the drop shadow properties from one object to another.


Color channels buttons


Channel from mask button
Creates a channel from the mask currently displayed in the image window.


Apply mask from channel
Applies to the image the mask saved in the selected alpha channel.


Delete button
Deletes the selected alpha channel. Color channels are an inherent part of the image and cannot be deleted.


Save to current channel button
Applies the changes made to the current mask in its associated alpha channel.


Channel palette button
Opens the Channel properties dialog box, which lets you choose properties for the new alpha channel.


Shadow feather edge button
Lets you change the way drop shadow edges are feathered.


Shadow feather direction button
Lets you change the direction of drop shadow feathering.


Nib picker
Lets you choose a nib shape.


Color model icon
Displays a color model as your color selector.


Paint direction
Sets the direction in which a special effect is applied.


Page curl button
Specifies which corner of the image you want to curl.


Remove preset
Removes the selected preset.


Lock button
Enable to maintain aspect ratio.


New image button
Opens the Create a new image dialog box, from which you can create a new image.


Open button
Opens the Open an image dialog box, from which you can choose an image.


Maximize work area button
Enable to hide the title bar and menu bar while continuing to edit your image using keystrokes. For best results, maximize the image window within the application before maximizing the entire workspace.


Undo button
Lets you undo the last action.


Import button
Lets you bring an image in a non-native file format into the current image.


Export button
Lets you save an image in a different file format.


Redo button
Lets you redo the last action.


Show object marquee button
Shows or hides the object marquee.


Paste button
Pastes Clipboard contents into an image.


Print button
Lets you print the image.


Document info button
Lets you view image properties.


Save button
Saves an image.


Cut button
Removes an object or editable area from the image and places it in the Clipboard.


Copy button
Copies an object or editable area to the Clipboard.


Application launch button
Starts another Corel application.


Navigator popup
Lets you view portions of your image that fall outside the image window.


Flyout button
Opens a flyout menu.


Crop to border
Opens the Crop border color dialog box, which lets you crop the border color that surrounds an image.


Crop to mask
Crops the image around the mask marquee.


Crop overlay button
Shades the image area that is not defined as part of the cropping area.


Rotation handle
Indicates that the tool is in Rotate mode.


Up button
Moves the selected image up in the list of images you want to stitch.


Down button
Moves the selected image down in the list of images you want to stitch.


Select/Move button
Lets you select and move images in the image stitch window.


Rotate button
Lets you rotate one or more images. The center of rotation can be moved anywhere in the image stitch window.


Zoom in button
Zooms in by a factor of two for a close-up view of an image area.


Zoom out button
Zooms out of an image area by a factor of two.


Difference button
Helps you position images accurately by providing visual clues for image alignment [image] overlapping image areas are highlighted, and correctly aligned images areas turn black.


Pan tool
Lets you drag areas of an image into view when the image is larger than its window.


Play movie button
Plays a movie.


Stop movie button
Stops a currently playing movie.


Fast forward movie button
Fast forwards to the last frame of a movie.


Next frame button
Steps forward one frame.


Overlay frame button
Superimposes the current frame on an adjacent frame.


Insert frame button
Inserts new frames into a movie before or after the current frame.


Insert from file button
Inserts a file at a specific frame number.


Delete frame button
Deletes a single frame or a range of frames.


Repeat stroke button
Repeats the last stroke applied by the current brush.


Load image sprayer button
Loads an image sprayer list.


Orbits button
Enables or disables orbits.


Open orbit presets button
Opens the preset list of orbits.


Order button
Reverses the order of the images in the spraylist.


Include center button
Displays the point around which the orbits rotate.


Reverse stroke button
Reverses the direction of the stroke when the Stroke path or Stroke mask commands are applied.


Create spraylist button
Creates a spraylist.


Reset image sprayer button
Resets the Image sprayer tool to its default settings.


Repeat stroke on mask
Reapplies the brush stroke or effect along the mask marquee.


Horizontal symmetry button
Enables symmetrical painting in the horizontal mirror mode (to the right or left of the original brush stroke).


Vertical symmetry button
Enables symmetrical painting in the vertical mirror mode (above or below the original brush stroke).


No symmetry button
Disables painting with symmetry.


Radial symmetry button
Enables painting with symmetry in radial mode, which adds satellite points along the radius of the brush nib.


Mirror symmetry button
Enables painting with symmetry in mirror mode, which produces identical brush strokes on the horizontal and vertical plane of the image.


Set symmetry center button
Positions the symmetry center of the brush stroke.


Merged source button
Enable this button to clone the entire image; disable it to clone the active object only.


Cumulative button
Enable this button to apply your brush strokes cumulatively, that is, to successively increase the effect of each stroke.


Pen settings eraser
Opens the custom pen settings list.


Nib options button
Lets you set options to customize the current nib.


Save undo list button
Saves the current undo list.


Revert button
Returns your image to its last saved state.


Checkpoint button
Saves your image at a particular stage in its development.


Solid lines grid
Displays the grid as a series of solid horizontal and vertical lines.


Dashed lines grid
Displays the grid as a series of dashed horizontal and vertical lines.


Dotted lines grid
Displays the grid as a series of dotted horizontal and vertical lines.


Large icon
Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files as large icons.


Small icon
Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files as small icons.


List icon
Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result as listed files.


Details icon
Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result in a detailed list.


Forward button
 Displays the next page of search results.


Search button
 Allows you to edit the search criteria or start a new search.


Content on the Web button
 Allows you to browse or search for content on the Corel Web site.


Edit filter
Lets you specify export options for the selected Web-compatible file format.


Save settings
Saves the current settings of a preview area in the Web image optimizer dialog box, including the chosen file format and preset.


Vertical slice button
Lets you add a single vertical slice line to an image.


Horizontal slice button
Lets you add a single horizontal slice line to an image.


Auto slice button
Slices an image automatically based on the placement of objects.


Equal slice button
Divides an image into equal slices based on the number of rows and columns you specify.


Slice selector button
Lets you select image slices and move slice lines.


Preview button
Lets you preview a sliced image in a Web browser.


Erase slice button
Lets you erase a single slice line.


Erase all button
Erases the slice grid.


Edit rollover button
Lets you edit a rollover by adding, removing, or modifying objects.


Preview rollover button
Lets you preview a rollover in a Web browser.


Browse button
Lets you browse for a sound file that you want to add to a rollover state.


Create rollover button
Turns the selected object into a rollover object that you can edit.


Rollover object icon
Indicates that the object is part of a rollover.


Text rollover icon
Indicates that the text object is part of a rollover.


Finish editing button
Lets you exit the rollover editing mode.


Shadow eyedropper button
Lets you sample dark areas in an image to set input or output values.


Highlight eyedropper
Lets you sample light areas in an image to set input or output values.


Input value clipping arrows
Lets you specify the clipping range for the darkest and lightest pixels in the image. For example, if the histogram indicates that there are very few pixels between 0 and 15, you can move the arrow to set the input value clipping to 15 to increase the tonal range.


Output range compression arrows
Lets you specify the output brightness value of the darkest and lightest pixels in the image. You can fine-tune contrast by moving the output value range arrows.


Lighting effects DB


Light source selector
Lets you set the position and direction of the light by dragging in the preview window. The circle of nodes indicates the position of the light, and the single node at the end of the line indicates the direction of the light.


Add light button
Lets you add a light with the same properties as the last light applied.


Remove light button
Lets you delete the last light applied.


Hide/Reveal light source button
Lets you hide or reveal the Light source selector area in the preview window.


Cutout dialog box


Highlighter tool
Lets you define the edges of the image area you want to cut out.


Inside fill tool
Lets you define the inside of the image area you want to cut out.


Eraser tool
Lets you erase sections of the highlighted area.


Zoom in tool
Lets you magnify image areas.


Zoom out tool
Lets you zoom out to view larger portions of the image.


Hand tool
Lets you drag areas of an image into view.


Adobe Illustrator (AI) technical notes

Exporting an Adobe Illustrator file

•	To make export conversion easier, avoid combining objects in a file.

•	During export conversion, objects can become complex, making it difficult to edit them in other drawing applications or in CorelDRAW if you re-import them. To avoid this problem, keep a copy of the image in CorelDRAW (CDR) format , and use CorelDRAW for all editing.

•	If you create a file that will be printed in other applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, export it using the encapsulated PostScript filter (EPS), not the Adobe Illustrator (AI) filter . The encapsulated PostScript filter supports more drawing effects than the Adobe Illustrator filter and generally yields better results.

•	Fountain fills are exported as a series of filled bands, similar to the effect achieved by blending. You can set the number of bands by clicking (Windows) Tools [image] Options or (Mac OS) Application name [image] Preferences. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box. The maximum number of bands supported is 256.

•	To accurately reproduce calligraphic outlines, corner styles, and line caps, click Tools [image] Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and enable the Calligraphic text check box in the Clipboard area. The outlines will export as a group of polygons that match the appearance of the outlines in the application but add significantly to the size of the exported file.

Importing an Adobe Illustrator file

•	Adobe Illustrator 9 and 10 use Portable Document Format (PDF) files for their native format using the extension .ai These files can be imported using the PDF import filter. For instructions about how to import a PDF, see "Portable Document Format (PDF)."

•	Corel applications provide full support for all AI file formats up to and including Adobe Illustrator 10. Corel applications cannot import AI files containing bitmaps linked as EPS files.

•	Imported Adobe Illustrator graphics come into the application as a group of objects. Click Arrange [image] Ungroup to manipulate objects in the imported graphic.


Windows Bitmap (BMP) technical notes

Exporting a Windows Bitmap file

•	Raster images such as bitmaps are mapped pixel by pixel to the page, so if you enlarge a bitmap in an application, the resolution will not increase. You'll see an apparent loss of resolution and your bitmap will appear "jagged."

Importing a Windows Bitmap file

•	You can import Windows Bitmap files conforming to the Windows and OS/2 BMP specification.

•	Windows Bitmap files may be either black & white, 16 colors, grayscale, paletted, or RGB color (24-bit), and will print accordingly, depending on your printer.

•	Run-length encoding (RLE) compression may be used on all bitmaps, except RGB color (24-bit), and black and white bitmaps.

•	The resolution can range from 72 to 300 dpi and go higher if you choose custom settings

•	The maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.


CorelDRAW (CDR) technical notes

•	Imported CorelDRAW files appear as a group of objects. Click Arrange [image] Ungroup to manipulate individual objects in the imported graphic.

•	In CorelDRAW, you can edit images from CorelDRAW 5 and later. Images created in CorelDRAW 3 and 4 can be edited in CorelDRAW if there are no WFO fonts in the image.


Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) technical notes

Importing a Computer Graphics Metafile

•	The CGM filter accepts only markers supported by the CGM file format standard. Private-use markers are ignored.

•	Text is editable, provided the file is exported from the source application using the correct text options. The typeface you see may not correspond to the one used in the source application; however, you can easily change this in the Corel application.

Exporting a Computer Graphics Metafile

•	The CGM export filter supports radial and linear fountain fills but not square or conical ones.

•	PostScript textures are converted to solid gray fills.

•	You can set the number of bands used to represent fountain fills in the exported file by clicking Tools [image] Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box.


Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) technical notes

•	The following versions are available: 5. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10.

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, CorelTRACE, and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. They import Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) files as bitmaps.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) technical notes

•	This filter is available in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, Corel R.A.V.E, and CorelTRACE.

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT files may be either black & white, grayscale, paletted, CMYK color (32-bit), RGB color (24-bit), and LAB.


Corel DESIGNER (DSF) technical notes

•	Guidelines and grid settings are not converted.

•	Snap points are not converted.

•	Objects on some pages may be grouped together. You may want to select the group and then ungroup it before editing.

•	Properties are not converted, except URLs.

•	Object names are not converted.

•	OLE data is not converted.

•	Curvygons are converted to curves.

•	Dimension and callout objects are converted to curves, their labels are converted to text objects, and the objects are grouped.

•	Any part of a graphic that is outside the extents that CorelDRAW can support cannot be accessed. You should resize the graphic before converting.

•	Sticky lines are converted to curves. They no longer stay attached to objects.

•	Enhanced line styles are converted to the default line style shown in the CorelDRAW Export Setup dialog box.

•	Gradient transparency may be offset in some cases.

•	Hatch fills are rendered but are actually part of the object fill. They are separate objects but are grouped.

•	Bitmap fills may not be scaled properly.

•	Unclosed, filled lines are converted to two objects: one for the line and one for the fill.

•	Block text in Corel DESIGNER comes in as paragraph text in CorelDRAW. Freeform text comes in as Artistic text.

•	Warped text is converted to curves.

•	Repelled text (block text that wraps around an object) is converted to multiple text objects.

•	Each character in text on a path is converted to a separate text object.

•	Each line of a non-rectangular text object (text that was placed within an object) is converted to a separate text object.

•	Tab stops may stretch or shrink if there is a lot of transformations to block text.

•	Block text that was scaled by dragging the bounding box will use the smaller of the two scaling dimensions (vertical or horizontal).

•	Text flowing between containers is not preserved; each container is converted to a separate object.

•	Small caps text won't always come in with the exact same dimensions.

•	Superscipt and subscript characters won't come in with the identical place and size.


Encapsulated PostScript technical notes

Exporting an Encapsulated PostScript file

•	On a PostScript printer, graphics exported to the encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format print from other applications exactly as they do from a Corel graphics application.

•	You can save a header to the Tagged Image File format (TIFF) or Windows Metafile format (WMF) in black and white, 4-bit grayscale or color, or 8-bit grayscale or color. You can set the header resolution between 1 and 300 dots per inch (dpi); the default header resolution is 72 dpi. If the application importing the EPS file has a limitation on the image header size, you might receive an error message stating that the file is too large. To reduce file size, in the EPS export dialog box, choose Black and White from the Type box, and lower the header resolution before exporting the file. The setting determines only the resolution of the header and has no impact on the print quality of a drawing. Color headers are useful when viewing placed EPS files. If the application in which you are going to use the file does not support color headers, try exporting with a mono header instead. You can also export without a header.

•	Along with the graphic, exported EPS files contain a filename, program name, and date.

•	To save font information in an EPS file, enable the Include fonts check box in the Export text as area.

•	No fonts are saved if you export text as curves.

•	If a font used in the file is not resident on the printer or has not been saved in the file, either the text will print in Courier font or the drawing will not print.

Importing an Encapsulated PostScript file

•	The encapsulated PostScript file is imported in a placeable format by default. The applications display a thumbnail, or preview, in the active file.

•	If the encapsulated PostScript file contains a placeable header (that is, a small bitmap representation of the image), the placeable header is imported and displayed. The EPS information remains attached to the header and is used when the image is printed to a PostScript printer.

•	The PostScript Interpreted filter converts the objects in the encapsulated PostScript file to native CorelDRAW objects on import.

•	When you import a file with large or complex gradient fills, you may generate a large number of objects.


GIF technical notes

•	You can save movies you create in Corel R.A.V.E. and Corel PHOTO-PAINT as animated GIF files. You can also open and edit animated GIF files in Corel R.A.V.E. and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

•	Corel applications import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export only to version 89A. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all features found in 87A plus the ability to use transparent colors and to include comments and other data of the image file.

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when importing animated GIF files: black and white (1-bit), 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), and 256 color paletted (8-bit).

•	The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 pixels by 64,535 pixels and uses LZW compression.

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


HTML technical notes

Importing an HTML file

•	The HTML import filter can be installed during a custom installation (Import/Export File Types - Internet File Types). It extracts editable information from a Web document and brings objects into CorelDRAW in a manner similar to the original layout.

•	Imported HTML files that exceed the boundaries of the drawing page continue down the workspace without a page break.

Exporting an HTML file

•	All objects that are not within the boundaries of the drawing page are ignored on export.

•	Overlapping HTML text frames cause difficulties during export. As a solution, try exporting the file to the GIF or JPEG file format.


JPEG technical notes

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


JPEG 2000 (JP2 or JPC) technical notes
JPEG 2000 (JP2) technical notes

•	JPEG 2000 standard files offer better image compression and storage of metadata such as dimensions, tone scale, color space, and intellectual property rights.

•	A region of interest in a JP2 image is an area where the compression ratio in a transmitted image is lower, which results in higher fidelity for that part of the image.

•	JPEG 2000 codestream files are optimized for network transmissions, resisting bit errors and, therefore, data loss on low bandwidth channels.

•	Not all Web browsers support JPEG 2000 formats. You might require a plugin to view these files.

•	CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT support exporting JPEG 2000 files in 24-bit RGB, 8-bit grayscale, and 16-bit grayscale colors.

•	CMYK, 48-bit RGB, and black-and-white images are not supported for export.


QuickTime (MOV) technical notes

•	QuickTime Movie (MOV) files are animation files that support 24-bit and 8-bit color. Multiple tracks are not supported.

•	You can export to the QuickTime format from Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel R.A.V.E.


PICT (PCT) technical notes

•	Corel graphics applications can import vector drawings and bitmaps contained in PICT (PCT) files.

•	Objects that contain a fill and an outline will open as a group of two objects. One object will be the outline and the other the fill.

•	PICT fills are often bitmap patterns, and the Corel application tries to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns.

•	Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color.

•	Text in PICT files opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it is converted to the font that it most closely resembles.

Text alignment may not quite agree with the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected.


PaintBrush (PCX) technical notes

Exporting a PaintBrush (PCX) file

•	Bitmaps may be either black and white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit).

•	Run-length encoding (RLE) compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.

•	These files may contain one, two, or four color planes.

•	This file format is supported in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, and Corel CAPTURE.

Importing a PaintBrush (PCX) file

•	PCX files can be imported if they conform to the following PCX specifications: 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0.

•	Bitmaps may be either black and white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit).

•	RLE compression is supported and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535.

•	These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. Files containing three color planes or more than four color planes cannot be imported.

•	This file format is supported in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, Corel CAPTURE, and Corel R.A.V.E.


Portable Document Format (PDF) technical notes

Publishing a Portable Document Format file

•	The Portable Document Format engine is available by clicking File [image] Publish to PDF in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Importing a Portable Document Format file

•	Imports Portable Document Format and Adobe Illustrator 9 and 10 files..


Portable Network Graphics (PNG) technical notes

•	You can import Portable Networks Graphics (PNG) files from 1-bit black and white to 24-bit color; 48-bit color is not supported.

•	Masks and indexed-color, grayscale, and true color images are supported. Masks, however, are not saved in 1-bit black and white or 8-bit paletted files.

•	LZ77 compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 30,000 x 30,000 pixels. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits.

•	The PNG file format is also robust, checking full-file integrity and detecting common transmission errors. The PNG file format can store gamma and chromatic data for improved color matching on different platforms.

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


Adobe Photoshop (PSD) technical notes

Exporting an Adobe Photoshop file

•	This format supports 1-bit black and white up to 32-bit CMYK color images.

•	Layers are supported.

Importing an Adobe Photoshop file

•	Adobe Photoshop files with mono, grayscale, and color up to 32-bit CMYK are supported. Duotone and multi-tone Adobe Photoshop images are converted to grayscale when loaded into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.


Macromedia Flash (SWF) technical notes

•	Macromedia Flash (SWF) files cannot be imported into CorelDRAW. You can, however, link, embed, export, and publish Macromedia Flash files to the Web.


Targa (TGA) technical notes

•	The following features are supported: uncompressed color-mapped images, uncompressed RGB images, run-length encoding (RLE) compressed color-mapped images, RLE-compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9, and 10 as defined by the AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center), and masks.

•	The type of file produced depends on the number of colors exported. For example, 24-bit color Targa (TGA) files are exported as RLE-compressed RGB bitmaps.

•	You can import TGA files from 8-bit grayscale to 24-bit RGB.

•	Masks are not saved in 1-bit black and white or 8-bit paletted files.

•	RLE compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.


TIFF technical notes

Exporting a TIFF file

•	Masks are not saved in 1-bit black and white, 16-bit grayscale, and 48-bit RGB files.

Importing a TIFF file

•	Black and white, color, and grayscale TIFF files up to and including the 6.0 specification can be imported and exported.

•	TIFF files compressed using CCITT, Packbits 32773, or LZW compression can also be imported. However, you may notice additional loading time with these files since the application decodes the file compression.


WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) technical notes

•	This filter imports graphics created in WordPerfect applications.

•	Graphics Text Type 2 is not supported.

•	This file format is only available in CorelDRAW, Corel R.A.V.E., and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel PHOTO-PAINT imports WordPerfect Graphic files as bitmaps.


General notes on importing text files

•	When you import a text file into a Corel application, it appears almost the same as in the source application. However, some formatting attributes and page layout features may not be supported. In such cases, the application tries to simulate the results of a feature when a reasonable substitution can be made.

•	The following word processing features are not supported: headers, footers, footnotes and endnotes, embedded graphics, columns, tables, and macros.

•	Font matching support is included. You can modify font matching settings in coreldrw.ini. Fonts are converted by size and by family, provided the source file format includes font family information that the application can access.

•	Rich Text Format (.rtf) files are automatically converted to the Microsoft Windows ANSI (American National Standards Institute) character set. The Macintosh Character Set and Standard IBM PC Code Page 437 are also supported.

•	You can convert PC fonts so that they are readable on a Macintosh platform by using a third-party software tool.

•	Corel graphics applications attempt to make the closest match possible of characters. Font matching is used if the imported text font is not on the user's system. However, if a match cannot be made, the font characters will appear in the application as unrecognizable text.

•	Conversion of font sizes is supported. The following table shows font family conversion capabilities.

Word processing application	From .rtf to Corel graphics
WordPerfect	All fonts supported
Microsoft .rtf	All fonts supported
Microsoft Word PC	All fonts supported
Ami Professional	All fonts supported
Microsoft Word Macintosh	Limited font support
Word for Windows	All fonts supported
"All fonts supported" means that Corel graphics applications support all font families supported by that application.

"Limited font support" means that CorelDRAW supports only selected fonts from the fonts supported by that application. This typically includes Standard PostScript fonts and the Standard HP PCL fonts.

•	When converting Macintosh files, font support is limited by the supported font families of the PC formats.

•	Fonts converted to formats other than those listed in the table above will map to fonts that Corel graphics applications find as the best fit.

•	You may encounter alignment problems when converting from and to a proportional and nonproportional font. Therefore, if you import a document created in a nonproportional font to a proportional font, some pages that have more text on a page than the original document.

•	Source documents that contain a table of contents and indexing convert into the appropriate functions in an .rtf file.

•	Data that is automatically outlined converts to regular text.

•	Style sheet properties are converted to RTF. The file will appear as in the source application; however, the style sheet from the original application is not imported.

•	Text contained within a frame or a positioned object is retained.


AutoCAD Data Interchange Format (DXF) technical notes

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, Corel R.A.V.E., and Corel PHOTO-PAINT, which imports AutoCAD files as bitmaps.

•	The Data Exchange File (DXF) filter is supported in AutoCAD 2.5, 2.6, R9, R10, R11, R13, R14, and R2000 (R15).

•	AutoCAD 2000/2002 is supported.

•	Layers are retained on import and export.

Exporting a AutoCAD Data Interchange Format file

•	CorelDRAW saves drawings in a vector format accepted by computer-aided design/computer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM) programs and devices, such as AutoCAD and certain computer-driven sign and glass cutters.

•	Only the outlines of objects are exported.

•	All line weights are converted to solid lines 0.003 inches thick.

•	Texture fills are replaced with a solid gray fill. All other fills are ignored.

•	Filled objects with no outlines have an outline appended to them on export.

•	The following features are not supported: calligraphic pen effects, dashed and dotted lines, and arrowheads.

Importing a AutoCAD Data Interchange Format file

•	The DXF filter imports vector graphics created in AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002.

•	If a DXF file is too complex to import into CorelDRAW, configure your AutoCAD output device as an HP7475 plotter and perform a plot-to-file of the drawing. Then you should be able to import this plot file using the HPGL import filter. Newer versions of AutoCAD allow you to create EPS files.

•	Corel graphics applications try to center the imported image. The image is scaled down if the coordinates are larger than the maximum page size available in CorelDRAW [image] 150' x 150'.

•	Solid and trace entities are filled.

•	A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size.

•	Files exported as "Entities only" may come into the Corel application incorrectly due to a lack of header information.

•	Various justifications on text entries may not be preserved. Normal text placement (no justification) works best.

•	If the DWG file contains a font that is not on the user's computer, PANOSE font matching dialog box will let the user replace the font with an available one.


AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) technical notes

•	The AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) filter is supported in AutoCAD 2.5, 2.6, R9, R10, R11, R13, R14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002.

•	CorelDRAW 11 supports only AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002 DWG files.

•	If the DWG file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one.


Windows Metafile (WMF) technical notes

Importing a Windows Metafile

•	CorelDRAW substitutes fonts that are missing from a Windows Metafile Format file from similar fonts available on your computer.

•	The following features are not supported: PANOSE font matching and rotated and skewed bitmaps.

•	There is no preview available for WMF files.

Exporting a Windows Metafile

•	The Windows Metafile Format is used to export graphics to Windows applications.

•	A header contains additional information, such as sizing. Therefore, a WMF file can successfully be exported from CorelDRAW if the header is included.

•	Text is maintained as text when exported, and WMF files can be very large. This can cause problems in applications which limit the size of imported files.

•	The Windows Metafile Format is 16 bits, while CorelDRAW is 32 bits. When you export a WMF file, the 32-bit numbers are converted to 16 bits. For example, lines that are 0.01388 inches and thinner appear as hairlines because there isn't enough precision in the WMF filter to specify these widths accurately.


HPGL Plotter (PLT) technical notes

Importing a PLT file

•	Corel applications support versions 1 and 2 of PLT file formats although some features of version 2 are not supported.

•	You can import images larger than the Corel application's maximum page size by enabling the Scale option in the HPGL options dialog box, which lets you resize the imported image.

•	The curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inches. The value can be very precise; up to eight decimal places are accepted. A setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution, but it also greatly increases file size. A curve resolution of 0.004 inches is recommended.

•	The PLT file format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in a PLT file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into a Corel application, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen, so that you can match the original colors of the graphic.

•	The Pen selection list contains 256 pens although not all of the pens may be assigned. You can change the color assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new color for that pen from the Pen color list box. Choosing Custom colors brings up a color definition dialog box that allows you to define a custom color using RGB values.

•	You can change the pen width assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new width for that pen from the Pen width list box.

•	You can change the pen velocity by choosing the pen and then choosing a new velocity for that pen from the Pen velocity list box. This is only useful for exporting PLT files.

•	You can set a defined pen to the Unused option. You can also reset the current Pen Library pen settings back to the previously saved settings.

•	Corel applications support numerous dotted, dashed, and solid line types of the PLT file format. The pattern number of a line in a PLT file is translated to a line type pattern.

•	Text in PLT files imports into a Corel application as editable text. Text strings are assigned the default font, but they can subsequently be assigned any typeface and size. Imported text has no fill color, only an outline color.

Exporting a PLT file

•	Only the outlines of objects are exported to the PLT file format.

•	Dotted lines, dashed lines, and arrowheads are mapped to standard line types of the PLT file format.

•	Bézier curves are converted to line segments.

•	Outline thickness and calligraphic settings are lost.

•	Outline colors are limited to eight: black, blue, red, green, magenta, yellow, cyan, and brown.


PostScript (PS) technical notes

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PostScript (PS), Printer (PRN), and encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files.

•	The PostScript information is converted to objects.

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter lets you import multiple pages. In contrast, the EPS filter is used only to import EPS files and displays the EPS bitmap header or, if there is no header, a gray box.

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter converts RGB bitmaps to CMYK.

•	Font information is maintained only if the font was embedded in the original file prior to import.

•	Files that are too large may not import into some applications due to memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in a graphic.

•	EPS file formats (EPS placeable, PostScript Interpreted) may not import properly if you choose All files from the Files of type list box. To import PostScript Interpreted files successfully, choose the PostScript Interpreted import filter.


Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) technical notes

Exporting an SVG file

•	Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) allows three types of graphic objects: vector graphic shapes (for example, paths consisting of straight lines and curves), images, and text.

•	Object, layer, and group names are also supported. Where the names are the same, the SVG file will append unique numbers to the object ids.

•	Drop shadows are rasterized in SVG files.

•	Text fitted to a path is exported as individual characters and can increase file size as a result.

•	Non-RGB colors are converted to the RGB color space using ICC (International Color Consortium) profiles.

•	All CorelDRAW symbols are supported on export as SVG symbols.

•	Graphical objects can be grouped, styled, transformed, and combined into previously rendered objects.

•	You can export text as editable characters, so that after you publish an SVG graphic to the Web, text continues to be recognized as text. Text strings can be restyled, copied and pasted, or indexed by search engines. Text can also be edited by SVG-capable editing programs, eliminating the need for maintaining multiple versions of graphic images for editing.

•	The SVG standard allows the use of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to define font, text, and color properties of objects on a page.

Importing an SVG file

•	Clipped and masked objects are imported into CorelDRAW as PowerClip objects.


True Type Fonts (TTF) technical notes

•	TrueType fonts (TTF) print as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.

•	TrueType fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted.

•	Each exported character must comprise a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange [image] Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects.

•	Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported.

•	Avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the examples below:


Adobe Type 1 Fonts technical notes

•	Most Type 1 fonts are single master fonts that permit only style editing; for example, Roman, italic, bold. A single master Type 1 font contains two files: a Printer Font Metrics (PFM) file and a Printer Font Binary (PFB) file.

Some Type 1 fonts are also available in multiple master format. You can customize design elements of multiple master fonts such as weight, width, style, and optical size. A multiple master base font is the multiple master font itself, from which you create variations called multiple master instances. A multiple master base font is composed of a PFM file, a PFB file, and a Multiple Master Metrics (MMM) file. A multiple master instance is composed of a PFM file and a PostScript Printer Stub (PSS) file.

•	Adobe Type 1 fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted.

•	Each exported character must comprise a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange [image] Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects.

•	Avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the examples below:

•	Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported.

•	Adobe Type 1 fonts you create are compatible with Adobe TypeManager version 2.0, but not with earlier versions.


OS/2 Bitmap technical notes

•	Corel applications support Standard Version 1.3 and Enhanced Version 2.0 or later versions of the OS/2 Bitmap file format.

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when importing and exporting BMP files: 1-bit black and white, 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale, 16-color (4-bit) and 256-color (8-bit) paletted, and 24-bit RGB.

•	The OS/2 Bitmap file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. OS/2 uses Run-length encoding (RLE) compression.


Kodak Photo CD image technical notes

•	PCD images are derived from 35mm film negatives or slides that have been converted to digital format and stored on a CD.

•	Kodak Photo CD (PCD) images may be subject to copyright. The Corel application will not display a warning message about this.

•	Other Kodak-compatible applications may install Kodak's pcdlib.dll file in the Windows folder instead of the Windows\System folder. This will produce an error message.

•	When you import Photo CD files, a dialog box will display prompting you to choose the desired file resolution and color. The resolution is limited to 72 dpi and the maximum image size is 2048 x 3072 pixels.

•	You can import the following color modes: RGB (24 bit), paletted (8 bit), and grayscale (8 bit).

•	Click on the Enhancement tab if you want to color-correct the image before importing it.

•	The Image size indicator will update to reflect the choices you have made regarding resolution and color.

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, and Corel R.A.V.E.

GamutCD color correction

This color correction method uses gamut mapping to enhance the color fidelity and tonal ranges of the CD image.

Set active area	Use the mouse to specify an active area within the image in the view field. This ensures GamutCD will base its color correction on the area of the photo that you are going to use and removes any black borders left from the original scan.
Set neutral colors	Define neutral colors by clicking on pure whites, blacks, and grays within the active area.
White in image	Choose this option if an image has pure white elements. If you do not have any white elements, disable this option. Otherwise, the gamut mapping will over-brighten your image as it maps the lightest elements of your image to white. This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of an image and removing color cast. If the white element in an image is not pure white, you may want to lower the setting from 255 in the number box to the right.
Black in Image	Choose this option if you have pure black elements in an image. If the image does not have any black elements, disable this option. Otherwise, the gamut mapping will darken your image since it maps the darkest elements of your image to black. This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of an image and removing color cast. If the black element in an image is not pure black, you may want to raise the setting from 0 in the number box to the right.
Kodak color correction

This color correction method allows you to alter color tints, adjust brightness and color saturation, as well as make adjustments to the level of contrast.

Remove scene	Turns off the Scene balance adjustment.
Balance adjustment	The photo finisher applied at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk.
Color metric	Allows you to adjust contrast by preset amounts.
Show out-of-gamut	If the changes you've made are too extreme, the preview colors will display out-of-gamut pixels as pure red or pure blue.


DOC technical notes
Microsoft Word (DOC) technical notes

•	The following Microsoft Word (DOC) versions are available: Microsoft Word 97/2000, Microsoft Word for Windows 6/7, Microsoft Word for Windows 2.x, Microsoft Word 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 5.5.

•	The embedded-field method for building indexes in Microsoft Word is supported, while the style-implied method for building indexes is not.

•	The Corel application tries to match the fonts in the file you are importing with the same or similar fonts, depending on the fonts installed on your computer. However, Microsoft Word's Normal text style is converted to the default text style. To set the default text style, click Tools [image] Customization. In the list of categories, double-click Document, double-click Styles, and choose a text style.

•	Whenever possible, the application automatically converts characters available in the sets "Symbol" or "MS Linedraw" to the corresponding Windows character set entries.

•	Most fonts are proportionally spaced and text is reflowed when imported. As a result, soft line and page breaks often appear in new locations if you are converting to a fixed-pitch or nonscalable font.

•	When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size, and this may affect the placement of text.

•	Footnotes or endnotes created in Microsoft Word 3.x, 4.x, 5.0, or 5.5 are not supported.

•	For more information, see "General notes on importing text files"


WPD technical notes
 WordPerfect Document (WPD) technical notes

•	The WPD filter imports text files created in WordPerfect 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, Corel WordPerfect 6, 7, 8, and WordPerfect 9 and 10.

•	The following features are not supported: index functions, text in table of contents, and style sheets.

•	Equations and formulas created in WordPerfect's equation language are converted to regular text.

•	Graphic features like HLine and VLine are not converted.

•	When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size which may affect the placement of text.

•	CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 11 applications substitute fonts missing from an Enhanced Metafile (.emf) file to similar fonts available on your computer. Multiple pages are not supported.

•	For more information, see "General notes on importing text files"


Corel PHOTO-PAINT® 11 What's New


Feature Overview


New Look


Photo editing


Web features


Creative effects


SCREEN 2 - New look


Streamlined interface

The streamlined interface helps you focus on common tasks, such as image editing. New icons create a consistent look throughout the application and integrate with both Windows XP and Mac OS X environments.


Color control area

Quickly view and choose background, foreground and fill colors using the new color control area of the toolbox.


Property bar

The simplified property bar now features basic and advanced modes for each tool. You can access the most frequently used options on the basic property bar and extend the property bar to display advanced options. The least-used options are now accessible in menus.


SCREEN 3 - Photo editing


Red eye removal tool

This new tool lets you quickly and effectively remove red-eye from photos. Simply set the tolerance level and brush the affected eye areas. The red hue is removed, but the grayscale value is retained to keep realistic shading.


Improved dust and scratch removal

Remove small dust and scratch marks by applying this filter to an entire image or remove large scratches by applying the filter to an editable area.


Cutting out image areas

An easy-to-use and impressive tool for removing image areas from their backgrounds: use a Highlighter tool to trace the outside of an object, fill the inside of the object, and process the image. Works well with even detailed images, such as hair or smoke.


Improved image stitching

Now you can stitch multiple images to create a large or panoramic image. Rotate and drag images into position, pan and zoom to position them precisely. Overlapping areas are highlighted to give you instant feedback on image alignment. You can save the stitched image as a single image or as objects so you can later adjust the component images.


EXIF

View data embedded in digital camera photos (Exchangeable Image File format) such as the time and date when a photo is taken, exposure and flash settings.


SCREEN 4 - Web features


Rollovers

Create interactive Web buttons that change appearance when you click or point to them. Rollovers are made from objects , such as shapes and text. You can also attach sounds and preview rollovers.


Image slicing

The new Image slicing tool cuts images into several smaller files letting you load a large image on a Web page one piece at a time. Slices can be rollovers, text, or images, and you can assign properties to slices and optimize them individually.


Improved image optimization

By optimizing images you adjust display quality and file size. The improved Web image optimizer lets you save time by saving your settings for each preview window for later use. You can also optimize sliced images.


JPEG 2000

An improved version of the JPEG file format, JPEG 2000 lets you create high quality images with smaller file size. JPEG 2000 images can be saved using either lossy or lossless compression. You can also use a different compression level for an image area, such as a face in a portrait.


SCREEN 5 - Creative effects


Bevel effect

This new 3D effect lets you create the appearance of a raised surface by applying a sloped edge along an editable area. For example, you can use bevel effects to add depth to text or to create 3D buttons for the Web.


Spot filter effect

This new Camera effect lets you simulate photographic filters by controlling the focus area in an image. You can also de-emphasize the surrounding area by apply a Gaussian blur to imitate a photographer's use of depth of field.


Lens flare effect

An enhanced Camera effect, Lens flare produces rings of light on an image, simulating the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed towards a direct, bright light. You can use this effect to create the appearance of sunlight reflecting off a surface.


Improved drop shadows

Now, it is easier to control the type of interactive drop shadow you create [image] drag from the center of an object to create a flat drop shadow or drag from the outer edge of an object to create a perspective drop shadow. The new Gaussian blur feathering preset lets you create realistic-looking drop shadows.


Whats_new_in_Corel_PHOTOMac
What's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11

New look

•	Streamlined interface [image] The streamlined interface helps you focus on common tasks, such as image editing. New icons create a consistent look throughout the application and integrate with both Windows XP and Mac OS X environments.

•	Color control area [image] Quickly view and choose background, foreground and fill colors using the new color control area of the toolbox.

•	Property bar [image] The simplified property bar now features basic and advanced modes for each tool. You can access the most frequently used options on the basic property bar and extend the property bar to display advanced options. The least-used options are now accessible in menus.

Photo editing

•	Red eye removal tool [image] This new tool lets you quickly and effectively remove red-eye from photos. Simply set the tolerance level and brush the affected eye areas. The red hue is removed, but the grayscale value is retained to keep realistic shading.

•	Improved dust and scratch removal [image] Remove small dust and scratch marks by applying this filter to an entire image or remove large scratches by applying the filter to an editable area.

•	Cutting out image areas [image] An easy-to-use and impressive tool for removing image areas from their backgrounds: use a Highlighter tool to trace the outside of an object, fill the inside of the object, and process the image. Works well with even detailed images, such as hair or smoke.

•	Improved image stitching [image] Now you can stitch multiple images to create a large or panoramic image. Rotate and drag images into position, pan and zoom to position them precisely. Overlapping areas are highlighted to give you instant feedback on image alignment. You can save the stitched image as a single image or as objects so you can later adjust the component images.

•	EXIF [image] View data embedded in digital camera photos (Exchangeable Image File format) such as the time and date when a photo is taken, exposure and flash settings.

Web features

•	Rollovers [image] Create interactive Web buttons that change appearance when you click or point to them. Rollovers are made from objects , such as shapes and text. You can also attach sounds and preview rollovers.

•	Image slicing [image] The new Image slicing tool cuts images into several smaller files letting you load a large image on a Web page one piece at a time. Slices can be rollovers, text, or images, and you can assign properties to slices and optimize them individually.

•	Improved image optimization [image] By optimizing images you adjust display quality and file size. The improved Web image optimizer lets you save time by saving your settings for each preview window for later use. You can also optimize sliced images.

•	JPEG 2000 [image] An improved version of the JPEG file format, JPEG 2000 lets you create high quality images with smaller file size. JPEG 2000 images can be saved using either lossy or lossless compression. You can also use a different compression level for an image area, such as a face in a portrait.

Creative effects

•	Bevel effect [image] This new 3D effect lets you create the appearance of a raised surface by applying a sloped edge along an editable area. For example, you can use bevel effects to add depth to text or to create 3D buttons for the Web.

•	Spot filter effect [image] This new Camera effect lets you simulate photographic filters by controlling the focus area in an image. You can also de-emphasize the surrounding area by apply a Gaussian blur to imitate a photographer's use of depth of field.

•	Lens flare effect [image] An enhanced Camera effect, Lens flare produces rings of light on an image, simulating the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed towards a direct, bright light. You can use this effect to create the appearance of sunlight reflecting off a surface.

•	Improved drop shadows [image] Now, it is easier to control the type of interactive drop shadow you create [image] drag from the center of an object to create a flat drop shadow or drag from the outer edge of an object to create a perspective drop shadow. The new Gaussian blur feathering preset lets you create realistic-looking drop shadows.

Related Topics

What's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11


Customizing your application

You can customize your application by arranging command bars and commands to suit your needs. Command bars include menus, toolbars, the property bar, and the status bar. You can also customize filters and file associations (Windows).

Help topics are based on the application's default settings. When you customize command bars, commands, and buttons, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using multiple workspaces

•	customizing keyboard shortcuts

•	customizing menus

•	customizing toolbars

•	customizing the property bar

•	customizing the status bar

•	customizing filters

•	customizing file associations


Using multiple workspaces

A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create, choose, and delete workspaces. You can also reset the current workspace to the default settings. This lets you undo changes you make to a workspace.

You can also export and import workspaces to and from other computers that use the same application. For example, you can customize a workspace and share it with a group of users.

Related Topics

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To create a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click New.

4	Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box.

5	From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace.

If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the Description of new workspace box.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To choose a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Enable the check box beside a workspace in the Workspace list.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To delete a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Choose a workspace from the Workspace list.

4	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default workspace.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To reset the current workspace

•	Hold down F8 (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and start the application.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To import a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click Import.

4	In the Import workspace dialog box, click Browse.

5	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the file.

7	Follow the instructions on screen.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To export a workspace


To export a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click Export.

4	Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export.

5	Click Save.

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

7	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Save.

9	Click Close.

 Note

•	The workspace items available for export are Docker windows (Windows), palettes (Mac OS), toolbars (including the property bar and toolbox), menus, status bar, and shortcut keys.

 Tip

•	(Windows) You can email a workspace as an attachment by clicking Email in the Export workspace dialog box.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace


Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Although your application already has preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change these or add your own shortcuts to suit your working style. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to the commands that you use most, and you can delete keyboard shortcuts.

You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts. You can also export a list of keyboard shortcuts to the CSV file format [image] a comma delimited format that is easily opened by word processors and spreadsheet applications.

When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an accelerator table. Your application comes with two accelerator tables, which can be customized to suit your work habits:

•	Main table [image] contains all non-text-related shortcut keys

•	Text Editing table [image] contains all text-related shortcut keys

Related Topics

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.

5	Choose a command category from the top list box.

6	Click a command in the Commands list.

The shortcut keys currently assigned to the selected command are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box.

7	Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination.

If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box.

8	Click Assign.

 Note

•	If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut.

 Tips

•	You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all.

•	You can view all of the existing keyboard shortcuts by clicking View all.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To delete a keyboard shortcut

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.

5	Choose a command category from the top list box.

6	Click a command in the Commands list.

7	Click a shortcut key in the Current shortcut keys box.

8	Click Delete.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To print keyboard shortcuts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Click View all.

5	Click Print.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To export a list of keyboard shortcuts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Click View all.

5	Click Export to CSV.

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

7	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Save.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts


Customizing menus

Corel customization features let you modify the menu bar and the menus it contains. You can change the order of menus and menu commands; add, remove, and rename menus and menu commands; and add and remove menu command separators. You can also reset menus to the default setting.

The customization options apply to the menu bar menus as well as to context menus that you access by right-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac OS).

Help topics are based on the application's default settings. When you customize menus and menu commands, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

Related Topics

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To change the order of menus and menu commands

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

3	In the application window, drag a menu on the menu bar to the left or right.

If you want to change the order of a menu command, click a menu on the menu bar, click a menu command, and drag it up or down.

If you want to change the order of context menu commands, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) in the application window to display the context menu, and drag a menu command to a new position.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To rename a menu or menu command

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Click a menu or command in the list.

A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu.

5	Click the Appearance tab.

6	Type a name in the Caption box.

 Note

•	(Windows) An ampersand (&) before a letter in the Caption box indicates a shortcut. Menus are displayed by pressing Alt + the letter. Commands are invoked by pressing the letter when the menu is displayed.

 Tip

•	You can reset the name to the default by clicking Restore defaults.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove an item on the menu bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove an item, drag it off the menu bar.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag an item to the menu bar.

A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. All other items in the list are commands.

 Notes

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

•	(Mac OS) Only menus, and not menu commands, can be added to the menu bar.

•	(Mac OS) You cannot remove the Help menu from the menu bar.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove a command on a menu

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove a command from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command off the menu.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a command to a menu in the application window.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove a command separator on a menu

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove a command separator from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command separator off the menu.

3	Choose User menus from the top list box.

4	Click Separator and drag it onto a menu in the application window.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Choose Menu bar from the list.

4	Click Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu


Customizing toolbars

You can customize toolbar position and display. For example, you can move or resize a toolbar, and you can choose to hide or display a toolbar.

Toolbars can be either docked or floating. Docking a toolbar attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a toolbar pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around.

You can create, delete, and rename custom toolbars. You can customize toolbars by adding, removing, and arranging toolbar items. You can adjust toolbar appearance by resizing buttons; adjusting the toolbar border; and displaying images, captions, or both. You can also edit toolbar button images.

When moving, docking, and undocking toolbars, you use the grab area of the toolbar.

For a	The grab area is
Docked toolbar (Windows)	identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar
Docked toolbar (Mac OS)	identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar
Floating toolbar (Windows)	the title bar. If the title is not displayed, the grab area is identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar.
Floating toolbar (Mac OS)	the area below, or to the right of, the Close button
Related Topics

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To customize toolbar position and display

To	Do the following
Move a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar to a new position.
Dock a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar to any edge of the application window.
Undock a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar away from the edge of the application window.
Resize a floating toolbar (Windows)	Point to the edge of the toolbar and, using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the toolbar.
Resize a floating toolbar (Mac OS)	Drag the resize handle at the bottom-right corner of the toolbar.
Hide or display a toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name.
Hide or display a toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name.
Reset a toolbar to its default setting (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset.
Reset a toolbar to its default setting (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset.
Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To	Do the following
Add a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name.
Add a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name.
Delete a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete.
Delete a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete.
Rename a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name twice, and type a new name.
Rename a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name, and type a new name.
Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To add or remove an item on a toolbar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to a toolbar in the application window.

If you want to remove an item from a toolbar, drag the toolbar item off the toolbar.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To arrange toolbar items

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	On the toolbar in the application window, drag the toolbar item to a new position.

If you want to move a toolbar item to another toolbar, drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to the other.

 Tip

•	You can copy a toolbar item to another toolbar by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) while dragging a toolbar item.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To modify toolbar appearance

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click a toolbar name in the list.

If you want to choose multiple toolbars, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and click the other toolbar names.

4	Choose a size from the Button list box.

5	In the Border box, click an arrow to specify a value from 1 to 10 pixels for the toolbar border.

6	From the Default button appearance list box, choose one of the following:

•	Caption below image

•	Caption only

•	Caption to right of image

•	Image only

(Windows) If you want to hide the title when the toolbar is floating, disable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box.

 Tip

•	You can reset a built-in toolbar to its default settings by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To edit a toolbar button image


To edit a toolbar button image

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Click a toolbar command.

5	Click the Appearance tab.

6	Edit the button image using the options in the Image area.

 Note

•	When you choose either Small or Medium in the Size list box, you edit the small or medium versions of a particular button image. You cannot edit the large version of a button image. For information about how to display all buttons as small, medium, or large, see "To modify toolbar appearance."

 Tip

•	You can reset toolbar button images to the default settings by clicking Restore defaults.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance


Customizing the property bar

You have control over the placement and content of the property bar. You can move the property bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the application window creates a floating property bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the application window docks it, making it part of the window border.

When moving, docking, or undocking the property bar, you use the grab area of the property bar, which is the same as the grab area of a toolbar. For more information about the grab area, see "Customizing toolbars."

You can also set up a custom property bar by adding, removing, and rearranging toolbar items. This lets you customize what appears on the property bar when you choose various tools. For example, when the Text tool is active, you can have the property bar display additional commands for text-related tasks such as increasing or decreasing font size, or changing case.

Related Topics

To position the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To position the property bar

To	Do the following
Move the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar to a new position.
Undock the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar away from the edge of the application window.
Dock the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar to any edge of the application window.
Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to the property bar.

If you want to remove an item from the property bar, drag the toolbar item icon off the property bar.

 Note

•	The new item is displayed on the property bar for the active tool or task. When the property bar content changes, the item is not displayed. The new item is displayed again when the related tool or task is activated.

Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To position the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position on the property bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To position the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar


Customizing the status bar

The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as color, fill type, and outline. The status bar also shows the current mouse position and relevant commands. You can customize the status bar by resizing it. If you want to see more of the application window, you can hide the status bar. You can also customize the status bar by adding, removing, and resizing toolbar items.

Related Topics

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To resize the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click Status bar, and enable the check box.

4	Type a value from 12 in the Number of lines when docked box (Windows) or Number of lines box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To hide the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Disable the check box beside Status bar.

 Tip

•	You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by clicking Window [image] Toolbars [image] Status bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to the status bar.

If you want to remove a toolbar item from the status bar, drag the item off the status bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To resize toolbar items on the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click Status bar, and enable the check box.

4	Choose one of the following options from the Button list box:

•	Small

•	Medium

•	Large

 Note

•	Only toolbar items you have added to the status bar are affected by resizing. The size of the default icons remains unchanged.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar


Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

Your application supports sounds through the Windows operating system. These sounds, which provide feedback through audio cues, are associated with certain user interface events. Though your application registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply any sounds. You can assign feedback sounds to specific events. Once assigned, feedback sounds are enabled by default, but you can disable them.

Related Topics

To assign feedback sounds (Windows)

To disable feedback sounds (Windows)


To assign feedback sounds (Windows)

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar.

2	Click Settings [image] Control panel.

3	Double-click Sounds.

4 From the Sound events list, choose an event below the application name.

6	Choose a sound from the Name list box.

 Note

•	For more information about feedback sounds, consult your operating system's Help file.

Related Topics

Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

To disable feedback sounds (Windows)


To disable feedback sounds (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, click General.

3	Disable the Enable sounds check box.

 Note

•	You must restart the application for the disable command to take effect.

Related Topics

Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

To assign feedback sounds (Windows)


Customizing filters

Filters are used to convert files from one format to another. They are organized into four types: raster, vector, animation, and text. You can customize filter settings by adding or removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded. You can also change the order of the list of filters and reset filters to the default setting.

Related Topics

To add a filter

To remove a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To add a filter

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Double-click a type of filter in the Available file types list.

4	Click a filter.

5	Click Add.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To remove a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To remove a filter

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click a filter in the List of active filters.

4	Click Remove.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To add a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To change the order of the list of filters

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click a filter in the List of active filters.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Move up [image] moves the filter up the list

•	Move down [image] moves the filter down the list

 Tip

•	You can reset the List of active filters to the default setting by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To add a filter

To remove a filter


Customizing file associations (Windows)

You can associate a number of different file types with Corel applications. When you double-click a file you have associated with an application, the application starts and the file opens. When you no longer need a file type association, you can break it.

Related Topics

To associate a file type with Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To break a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file type association (Windows)


To associate a file type with Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click Associate.

4	In the Associated file extensions with Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 list, enable the check box of the file type you want to associate.

 Note

•	You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing file associations (Windows)

To break a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file type association (Windows)


To break a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file type association (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click Associate.

4	In the Associated file extensions with Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 list, disable the check box of the file type association you want break.

 Note

•	You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing file associations (Windows)

To associate a file type with Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)


Glossary
A

Accelerator table

Active object

Alpha channel

Ambient lighting

Animation file

Anti-aliasing

Aspect ratio

B

Bit depth

Bitmap

Bitmap fill

Black and white

Bleed

Brightness

C

CERN

Channel

Child object

Choke

Client-server

Client side image maps

Clip mask

Clipart

Clipboard

Clipping range

CMY

CMYK

Color channel

Color gamut

Color mode

Color model

Color palette

Color profile

Color separation

Color space

Color swatch

Color tolerance

Contrast

Control points

Crop

Cubist

D

Distortion handles

Dithering

Dpi

Duotone

E

Editable area

EXIF

F

Feathering

Filter

Flattened image

Floating editable area

Floating object

Fractal

G

Gaussian

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

Grab area

Gradient node

Grayscale

Grayscale image

Group

H

Halftone

Handles

Highlighting box

HSB

HTML

Hue

Hyperlink

I

Image map

Imagesetter

Intensity

Interlaced video image

Interlacing

J

Javascript

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

JPEG 2000

L

Lab

Lens

Lossless

Lossy

Low-frequency areas

LZW

M

Marquee

Marquee-select

Mask

Mask modes

Merge mode

Micro nudge

Moire pattern

Mosaic

Multichannel

N

NCSA

Nodes

Noise

NTSC

Nudge

O

Object

Opacity

Overlay

P

Paletted color mode

Pan

Parent object

Path

PAL

PANTONE process colors palette

Perspective handles

Pixel

Pixelation

PNG

Pressure sensitive pen

Process color

Progressive

Protected area

R

Radius

Range sensitivity

Rasterized image

Render

Resample

Resolution

RGB

Rollover

Rotation handles

S

Saturation

Scanner

Scratch disk

Seed color

Segment path

Selection

Server-side

Shape cursor

Skewing handle

Spot color

Spread

Stacking order

Stylus

Subpath

Subtractive color model

Super nudge

Swap disk

Swatch

T

Target

Threshold

Threshold path

Thumbnail

Tightness path

Tint

Transparency

True color

TWAIN

U

URL

V

Vector graphic

W

Watermark

White point

WIA

Z

ZIP

Zoom


Accelerator table (definition)
accelerator table

A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the task that you are performing.


active object

An object that has a red border around its thumbnail in the Objects Docker window/palette.


alpha channel

A temporary storage area for masks. When you save a mask to an alpha channel, you can access and reuse it in the image as many times as you want. You can save an alpha channel to a file or load a previously saved channel in the active image.


Ambient lighting (definition)
ambient lighting

The lighting in a room, including natural and artificial light sources.


Animation file (definition)
animation file

A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime (MOV).


Anti-aliasing (definition)
anti-aliasing

A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area.


Aspect ratio (definition)
aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3.


Bit depth (definition)
bit depth

The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal to 2 to the power of the bit depth.


Bitmap (definition)
bitmap

An image composed of grids of pixels or dots.

See also vector graphic.


Bitmap fill (definition)
bitmap fill

A fill created from any bitmap.


Black and white (definition)
black-and-white color mode

A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors [image] black and white [image] with no gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.


Bleed (definition)
bleed

The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and trimming.


Brightness (definition)
brightness

The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a brightness value of 0 produces black, and a brightness value of 255 produces white.


CERN (definition)
CERN

CERN (Conseil Europeén pour la Recherche Nucléaire) is the scientific laboratory in which the World Wide Web was developed. CERN is also one of the World Wide Web server systems. Contact your server administrator to find out which system your server uses.


Channel (definition)
channel

An 8-bit grayscale image that stores color or mask information for another image. There are two types of channels: color and mask. Images have one color channel for each component of the color model on which they are based. Each channel contains the color information for that component. Mask (alpha) channels store masks that you create for your images and can be saved with images in formats that support mask information, for example, Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT).


Child object (definition)
child object

An object whose image elements are inserted into the shape of another object, called a parent object. The child object and parent object are called a clipping group. The child object must be on a layer above the parent object.


Choke (definition)
choke

In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object into the foreground object.


Client-server (definition)
client/server image maps

A rarely used image map type that includes code for both client-side and server-side image maps. This type of image map automatically defaults to the user's Web browser for image map processing. If the browser does not support image maps, the server uses the external map file to process information. Currently, most Web browsers support image maps, so client-side image maps are more common.


Client side image maps(definition)
client-side image maps

This common image map type does not depend on the server to process the map information.


Clipart (definition)
clipart

Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is stored until new information is cut or copied to the Clipboard, replacing the old.


Clip mask (definition)
clip mask

A mask that lets you edit an object's transparency levels without affecting the pixels in the object. You can change the transparency levels directly on the object and then add the clip mask, or add the clip mask before making the changes.


Clipping range (definition)
clipping range

The percentage of the range of values that is not displayed in the upper part of the histogram's vertical axis.


CMY (definition)
CMY

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). This mode is used in the three-color printing process.


CMYK (definition)
CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the ink is applied at full saturation.


Color channel (definition)
color channel

An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image.

See also RGB and CMYK.


Color gamut (definition)
color gamut

The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage colors from original images to final output.


Color mode (definition)
color mode

A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Black-and-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes.


Color model (definition)
color model

A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models.


Color palette (definition)
color palette

A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines.


Color profile (definition)
color profile

A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device.


Color separation (definition)
color separation

In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image. In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) must be made.


Color space (definition)
color space

In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by color management software.

See also Color gamut.


Color swatch (definition)
color swatch

A solid-colored patch in a color palette.


Color tolerance (definition)
color tolerance

The value that determines the color range or sensitivity of the Lasso mask tool, Magic wand mask tool, and Fill tool. Tolerance is also used in the Color mask dialog box to determine which pixels are protected when you create a color mask. A pixel is included in the specified color range if its grayscale value falls within the defined tolerance.


Contrast (definition)
contrast

The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light.


Control points (definition)
control points

The points that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.


Crop (definition)
crop

To cut unwanted areas of an image without affecting the resolution of the part that remains.


Cubist (definition)
cubist

An abstract style of art that stresses several aspects of the same object simultaneously, generally in the form of squares or cubes.


distortion handles

The outward-facing, double-headed arrows located at each corner of the highlighting box.


dithering

A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of colors is available.


dpi (definition)
dpi (dots per inch)

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 600 dpi. Image setters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.


Duotone (definition)
duotone

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using 256 shades of up to four tones. An image in the duotone color mode is simply a grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors.


Editable area (definition)
editable area

An editable area (selection) allows paint and effects to be applied to the underlying pixels.

See also protected area and mask.


EXIF (definition)
Exchangeable Image File (EXIF)

A file format that embeds digital camera information, such as the time and date a photo is taken, shutter speed, focus, and flash conditions, into TIFF and JPEG images.


Feathering (definition)
feathering

The level of sharpness along a drop shadow's edges.


Filter (definition)
filter

An application that translates digital information from one form to another.


Flattened image (definition)
flattened image

An image in which objects and masks are combined with the background and can no longer be edited.


Floating editable area (definition)
floating editable area

An editable area that hovers or floats above an image and can be moved and modified without affecting the underlying pixels.


Floating object (definition)
floating object

A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or cutout images.


Fractal (definition)
fractal

An irregular shape generated by a repeating pattern. Fractals can be used to mathematically generate an irregular and complex image by following a pattern, without having to define all of the individual components in the image.


Gaussian (definition)
Gaussian

A type of pixel distribution that spreads the pixel information outward using bell-shaped curves rather than straight lines.


GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) (definition)
GIF

A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer colors to the Internet.


Grab area (definition)
grab area

The area of a command bar that can be dragged. Dragging the grab area moves the bar, while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether the bar is docked or undocked. Command bars with grab areas include toolbars, the toolbox, and the property bar.


Gradient node (definition)
gradient node

A square point that represents each color on the gradient arrow of a gradient fill, which is used to change the fill's start and end points, colors, and transparency values.


Grayscale (definition)
grayscale

A color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white).


Grayscale image (definition)
grayscale image

An image that uses the grayscale color mode, which can display up to 256 shades of gray ranging from white to black. Grayscale images, especially photographs, are commonly referred to as "black and white."


Group (definition)
group

A set of objects that behaves as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its objects.


Halftone (definition)
halftone

An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones.


Handles (definition)
handles

A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize or mirror the object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that you can rotate and skew the object.


Highlighting box (definition)
highlighting box

A rectangle with eight handles that encloses a selection in an image.


HSB (definition)
HSB (hue, saturation, brightness)

A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense).


HTML (definition)
HTML

The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page.


Hue (definition)
hue

The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue, green, and red are all hues.


Hyperlink (definition)
hyperlink

An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another place in that document or to another document.


Image map (definition)
image map

A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics.


Imagesetter (definition)
imagesetter

A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the production of plates for printing presses.


Intensity (definition)
intensity

Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap compared with the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of whites while maintaining true darks.


interlaced video image

Interlaced video images take two passes to fill a screen, painting every other line in each pass. This can produce a flicker.


Interlacing (definition)
interlacing

In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves.


Javascript (definition)
JavaScript

A scripting language used on the World Wide Web to add interactive functions to HTML pages.


JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) (definition)
JPEG

A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images are widely used in Internet publishing.


JPEG 2000 (definition)
JPEG 2000

An improved version of the JPEG file format that features better compression and allows you to attach image information and assign a different compression rate to an image area.


Lab (definition)
Lab

A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: "a" (green to red) and "b" (blue to yellow).


Lens (definition)
lens

An object that protects part or all of an image when you perform color and tonal corrections. You can view the effect of a correction through a lens without affecting the underlying pixels. If you move a lens, the correction is applied to the pixels at the new location.


Lossless (definition)
lossless

A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been compressed and decompressed.


Lossy (definition)
lossy

A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality.


Low-frequency areas (definition)
low-frequency areas

Smooth areas in an image where gradual changes take place. That is, areas where there are no edges or noise.


LZW (definition)
LZW

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files.


Marquee (definition)
marquee

A dashed outline that surrounds an editable area or an object in an image. By default, object marquees are blue and mask marquees are black.


Marquee-select (definition)
marquee select

To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline.


Mask (definition)
mask

A mask is applied to an image during image editing to define protected areas and editable areas.


Mask modes (definition)
mask modes

Mask tool operation modes that you must choose before you create or fine-tune a mask and its editable area. There are four mask modes: Normal, Additive, Subtractive, and XOR. The Normal mode (default) lets you select an area in an image. The Additive mode lets you expand the editable regions by selecting multiple areas in an image. The Subtractive mode lets you reduce the editable regions by removing areas from a selection. The XOR mode lets you select multiple areas in an image. If areas overlap, the overlapping regions are excluded from the editable area and added to the protected area.


Merge mode (definition)
merge mode

An editing state that determines how the selected paint, object, or fill color combines with other colors in the image.


Micro nudge (definition)
micro nudge

To move an object in small increments.

See also nudge and super nudge.


Moire pattern (definition)
moiré pattern

The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns.  For example, a moiré pattern can result by overlapping two halftone screens of  different angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moiré patterns are the undesirable result of rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen on an angle different from the original.


Mosaic (definition)
mosaic

The decorative artwork made by arranging small pieces of variously colored material to form pictures or patterns.


Multichannel (definition)
multichannel

A color mode that displays images using multiple color channels, each comprised of 256 shades of gray. When you convert an RGB color image to the multichannel color mode, the individual color channels (red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) are converted to grayscale information that reflects the color values of the pixels in each channel.


NCSA (definition)
NCSA (National Center for Supercomputing Applications)

NCSA is a server system. If you are creating an image map to be displayed on the World Wide Web, you need to know the system your server uses, because different codes are used in the map files. Contact your server administrator to find out which system your server uses.


Nodes (definition)
nodes

The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.


Noise (definition)
noise

In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen.


NTSC (definition)
NTSC (National Television Standards Committee)

A video color filter that is commonly used to define the gamut of colors supported by television monitors in North America.


Nudge (definition)
nudge

To move an object in increments.

See also micro nudge and super nudge.


Object (definition)
object

An independent bitmap that is layered above the background image. Changes applied to objects do not affect the underlying image.


Opacity (definition)
opacity

The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100% opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100% increase the ability to see through objects.

See also transparency.


Overlay (definition)
overlay

A red-tinted, transparent sheet that you can superimpose on the protected areas in an image. The mask overlay makes it easy to distinguish between the editable and the masked (protected) regions in an image. When the overlay is applied, the masked areas are displayed in varying degrees of red (according to their transparency). The deeper the saturation of the red tint, the greater the degree of protection.

See also editable area and protected area.


PAL (definition)
PAL

A video color filter that is commonly used to define the gamut of colors supported by television monitors in Europe and Asia.


Paletted color mode (definition)
paletted color mode

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to control the colors used throughout the conversion process more precisely.


Pan (definition)
pan

To move the image around in the image window, usually when the image is larger than its window. Panning changes the image view in the same way that scrolling moves the image up, down, to the left, or to the right in the image window. When working at high magnification levels where not all of the image is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the image that were previously hidden.


PANTONE process colors palette(definition)
PANTONE process colors

The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is based on the CMYK color model.


Parent object (definition)
parent object

An object whose shape is combined with the image elements of another object, called a child object. The child object and parent object are called a clipping group. The parent object must be on an object layer below the child object.


Path (definition)
path

A series of line or curve segments connected by square endpoints called nodes.


Perspective handles (definition)
perspective handles

The hollow circles in the corners of the highlighting box.


Pixel (definition)
pixel

A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap.

See also resolution.


Pixelation (definition)
pixelation

A type of image distortion in which individual pixels are discernible to the naked eye, or groups of pixels display as blocks of colors. Pixelation is caused by incorrect resolution, by incorrect image dimensions, or it can be created intentionally for a special effect.


PNG (definition)
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit color graphics.


Pressure sensitive pen (definition)
pressure-sensitive pen

A stylus that you can use to access commands and draw your images. To use with Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you must install the pressure-sensitive pen, along with a pressure-sensitive tablet and its corresponding drivers.


Process color (definition)
process color

In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color).


Progressive (definition)
progressive

In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves.


Protected area (definition)
protected area

An area that prevents paint and effects from being applied to the underlying pixels.

See also mask and editable area.


Radius (definition)
radius

As applied to orbits, sets the distance between the center of the brush stroke and the nibs that travel around the center of the brush stroke when you paint with orbits. Increasing this value increases the size of the brush stroke.

As applied to the Dust & Scratch filter, sets the number of pixels surrounding the damaged area that are used to apply the filter.


Range sensitivity (definition)
range sensitivity

A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its importance to guide converting.


Rasterized image (definition)
rasterized image

An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images.


Render (definition)
render

To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model.


Resample (definition)
resample

To change the resolution and dimensions of a bitmap. Upsampling increases the size of the image; downsampling decreases the size of the image. Resampling with fixed resolution lets you maintain the resolution of the image by adding or subtracting pixels while varying the image size. Resampling with variable resolution keeps the number of pixels unchanged while changing the image size, resulting in lower or higher resolution than that of the original image.


Resolution (definition)
resolution

The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi (pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can produce higher quality images but result in larger file sizes.


RGB (definition)
RGB

A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


Rollover (definition)
rollover

An interactive object or group of objects that changes its appearance when you click or point to it.


rotation handles

The curved, double arrows in the corners of the highlighting box.


Saturation (definition)
saturation

The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100% saturation contains no white. A color with 0% saturation is a shade of gray.


Scanner (definition)
scanner

A device that converts images on paper, transparency, or film to digital form. Scanners produce bitmaps or rasterized images.


Scratch disk (definition)
scratch disk

(Mac OS)  Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer.


Seed color (definition)
seed color

The color of the first pixel that you click when you define an editable area and mask using the Lasso and Magic wand mask tools. This color is used by the tolerance value to set the sensitivity of the color detection in color masks.


Segment path (definition)
segment (path)

The section of a path located between two consecutive nodes. A path is a series of segments.


Selection (definition)
selection

An area of an image, also called editable area, that is not protected by a mask and that is, therefore, available for editing. The selection can be modified by painting and editing tools, special effects, and image commands.


Server-side (definition)
server-side image maps

A rarely used image map type that relies on a server to process image map information. It requires a separate map (*.map) file for the Web server. Currently, most Web browsers can process image maps, so client-side image maps are more common.


Shape cursor (definition)
shape cursor

Uses the shape and size of the nib of the current tool as a cursor.


Skewing handle (definition)
skewing handles

The straight, double-headed arrows located in the center of each side of the highlighting box.


Spot color (definition)
spot color

In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot color.


Spread (definition)
spread

In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground object into the background object.


Stacking order (definition)
stacking order

The sequence in which objects are created in the image window. This order determines the relationship between objects and, therefore, the appearance of your image. The first object you create appears on the bottom; the last object appears on the top.


Stylus (definition)
stylus

A pen device, used in conjunction with a pen tablet, that allows you to draw paint strokes. A pressure-sensitive stylus allows you to vary your strokes with subtle changes in pressure.


Subpath (definition)
subpath

A segment which is not joined to the main path.


Subtractive color model (definition)
subtractive color model

A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors except blue.


Super nudge (definition)
super nudge

To move an object in large increments. The super nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object is moved.

See also nudge and micro nudge.


Swap disk (definition)
swap disk

(Windows)  Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer.


Swatch (definition)
swatch

One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the color palette.


Target (definition)
target

The frame or Web browser window in which a new Web page displays.


Threshold (definition)
threshold

A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap.


Threshold path(definition)
threshold (path)

A control available when you create a path from a mask. Threshold values range from 1 to 10 and determine the size of the angle required between two sections of a mask for a node to be created there. A low value produces more cusps, and therefore more nodes on the resulting path.


Thumbnail (definition)
thumbnail

A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration.


Tightness path (definition)
tightness (path)

A control available when you create a path from a mask marquee. Tightness values range from 1 to 10 and determine how close the path's shape will be to that of the marquee. The higher the value, the more the new path resembles the marquee; it will have more nodes than a path with a lower tightness value.


Tint (definition)
tint

A semitransparent color applied over an image. Also called a color cast.


Transparency (definition)
transparency

The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or image.

See also opacity.


True color (definition)
true color

A term that refers to digital RGB color that is composed of 24-bits, or 16.7 million colors.


TWAIN (definition)
TWAIN

By using the TWAIN driver supplied by the manufacturer of the imaging hardware, Corel graphics applications can acquire images directly from a digital camera or scanner.


URL (definition)
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet.


Vector graphic (definition)
vector graphic

An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels.

See also bitmap.


Watermark (definition)
watermark

A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing, printing, and scanning.


White point (definition)
white point

The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and contrast display.


WIA (definition)
Microsoft Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

A standard interface and driver for loading images from peripheral devices, such as scanners and digital cameras.


Zoom (definition)
zoom

To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out for a broader view.


ZIP (definition)
ZIP

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time.


Managing multiple masks with alpha channels

You can use alpha channels to work with multiple masks in a single image. Since only one mask can be applied to an image at a time, storing masks in alpha channels lets you edit an image with one mask and then load another mask to edit the image further.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and editing alpha channels

•	saving masks and alpha channels

•	loading masks and alpha channels

•	managing alpha channels


Creating and editing alpha channels

When you create a mask in the Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 application, it appears in a new channel as the current mask. Each new mask you create replaces the current mask. However, you can create alpha channels to store multiple masks in an image. You can create an alpha channel from the current mask to copy the current mask's editable and protected areas, or you can create a blank alpha channel. A blank alpha channel is uniformly opaque and, therefore, contains no editable areas.

You can edit the mask stored in an alpha channel by adding the current mask to an alpha channel. This adds the editable areas of the current mask to that alpha channel, thereby expanding the editable area in the alpha channel.

You can also edit the mask stored in an alpha channel in many of the same ways you edit a mask in the Paint on mask mode. For information about editing a mask in the Paint on mask mode, see "Adjusting the transparency of masks."

Related Topics

To create an alpha channel from the current mask

To create a blank alpha channel

To add the current mask to an alpha channel


To create an alpha channel from the current mask

•	Click Mask [image] Save [image] Save as channel.

 Tip

•	You can use this procedure to save the current mask to an alpha channel in the image.

Related Topics

Creating and editing alpha channels

To create a blank alpha channel

To add the current mask to an alpha channel


To create a blank alpha channel

1	Click the New channel button in the Channels Docker window/palette.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	In the Channel properties dialog box, type a name for the channel in the Name box.

3	Click a color for the mask overlay.

4	Type a value in the Opacity box to set the opacity of the overlay color.

If you want to invert the mask overlay, enable the Invert overlay check box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Fill black [image] lets you create an alpha channel that contains no editable areas

•	Fill white [image] lets you create an alpha channel that contains no protected areas

Related Topics

Creating and editing alpha channels

To create an alpha channel from the current mask

To add the current mask to an alpha channel


To add the current mask to an alpha channel

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click an alpha channel.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Click the Save to current channel button.

Related Topics

Creating and editing alpha channels

To create an alpha channel from the current mask

To create a blank alpha channel


Saving masks and alpha channels

Since only one mask can be active in an image, each new mask you create replaces the current mask. However, before you create a mask, you can save the current mask to an alpha channel in the image so that it can be reused. When you save an image to a file format that supports mask information, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) or TIFF, the current mask and all alpha channels are saved with the image.

You can also save the current mask or an alpha channel to disk as a separate file. Saving a mask or an alpha channel lets you use masks in other images. This is especially useful if you want to save an image to a file format that doesn't support mask information but you want to keep copies of the masks used to edit that image. A color mask can also be saved to disk as a separate file. For more information about color masks, see "Defining editable areas using color information."

Related Topics

To save the current mask to an alpha channel in an image

To save a mask to disk

To save an alpha channel to disk

To save a color mask to disk


To save the current mask to an alpha channel in an image

1	Click Mask [image] Save [image] Save as channel.

2	Type the name of the new or existing alpha channel in the As box.

Related Topics

Saving masks and alpha channels

To save a mask to disk

To save an alpha channel to disk

To save a color mask to disk


To save a mask to disk

1	Click Mask [image] Save [image] Save mask to disk.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the mask.

3	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Choose a file type from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

Related Topics

Saving masks and alpha channels

To save the current mask to an alpha channel in an image

To save an alpha channel to disk

To save a color mask to disk


To save an alpha channel to disk

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click an alpha channel.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Click the Flyout button, and click Save as.

3	In the Save an alpha channel to disk dialog box, choose the folder where you want to save the alpha channel.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Choose a file type from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

6	Click Save.

Related Topics

Saving masks and alpha channels

To save the current mask to an alpha channel in an image

To save a mask to disk

To save a color mask to disk


To save a color mask to disk

1	Click Mask [image] Color mask.

2	Create a color mask.

3	Click the flyout button, and click Save color mask.

4	Choose the folder where you want to save the color mask.

5	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

6	Click Save.

Related Topics

Saving masks and alpha channels

To save the current mask to an alpha channel in an image

To save a mask to disk

To save an alpha channel to disk


Loading masks and alpha channels

You can modify the current mask in an image by loading a mask saved to an alpha channel.

When you load a mask saved to an alpha channel in the image, you can choose the mask mode that is used to apply the mask. Depending on the mask mode you choose, the saved mask either replaces the current mask or is combined with it.

You can also load a mask or a color mask from disk and replace the current mask. You can apply the mask over a specific image area or over the entire image.

When you load an alpha channel from disk, you can apply the mask saved in the alpha channel to the current image.

Related Topics

To load a mask from an alpha channel

To load a mask from disk

To load a color mask from disk

To load an alpha channel from disk


To load a mask from an alpha channel

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click a mask tool.

2	In the Channels Docker window/palette, choose an alpha channel from the Channels list.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

3	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Normal

•	Additive

•	Subtractive

•	Overlap [image] available on the extended property bar

4	Click Mask [image] Create [image] Channel to mask.

Related Topics

Loading masks and alpha channels

To load a mask from disk

To load a color mask from disk

To load an alpha channel from disk


To load a mask from disk

1	Click Mask [image] Load [image] Load mask from disk.

2	Click a filename.

You can view a thumbnail of the mask.

3	Click Open.

4	Drag in the image window to define the area to which you want to apply the mask.

 Tip

•	You can apply the mask to the entire image by clicking in the image window. If the dimensions of the image in which the mask was created are different from the dimensions of the active image, the mask stretches or compresses to fit the active image.

Related Topics

Loading masks and alpha channels

To load a mask from an alpha channel

To load a color mask from disk

To load an alpha channel from disk


To load a color mask from disk

1	Click Mask [image] Color mask.

2	Click the flyout button, and click Open color mask.

3	In the Open dialog box, choose the folder where the color mask is stored.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Note

•	If you load a color mask before you save the current color mask, the current color mask is lost.

Related Topics

Loading masks and alpha channels

To load a mask from an alpha channel

To load a mask from disk

To load an alpha channel from disk


To load an alpha channel from disk

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click the flyout button, and click Open.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	In the Load an alpha channel from disk dialog box, choose the folder where the alpha channel is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

 Note

•	If you load a mask that was created in an image with different dimensions than those of the active image, the mask stretches or compresses to fit the entire active image; however, the mask's aspect ratio may change.

Related Topics

Loading masks and alpha channels

To load a mask from an alpha channel

To load a mask from disk

To load a color mask from disk


Managing alpha channels

You can specify which alpha channels display and how they display. For example, you can display an alpha channel alone in the image window, or in combination with other alpha or color channels. If you display one alpha channel, it is represented as a grayscale image. If you display an alpha channel with one or more color channels, the protected areas in the alpha channel are covered by a tinted mask overlay with varying degrees of opacity. You can see the mask overlay only when you display the alpha channel with a color channel.

You can also delete alpha channels you no longer need to reduce the file size of the image. You can modify an alpha channel's properties. For example, you can change the name, the color and opacity of the mask overlay, and whether the mask overlay covers the protected areas or the editable areas of the mask.

Related Topics

To display an alpha channel

To delete an alpha channel

To change the properties of an alpha channel


To display an alpha channel

•	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click the Eye icon beside an alpha channel.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

 Tip

•	If you want to change the order of an alpha channel in the list, drag it to a new position.

Related Topics

Managing alpha channels

To delete an alpha channel

To change the properties of an alpha channel


To delete an alpha channel

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, choose an alpha channel from the Channels list.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Click the Delete current channel button.

Related Topics

Managing alpha channels

To display an alpha channel

To change the properties of an alpha channel


To change the properties of an alpha channel

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, choose an alpha channel from the Channels list.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Click the flyout button, and click Channel properties.

3	In the Channel properties dialog box, change the properties you want.

Related Topics

Managing alpha channels

To display an alpha channel

To delete an alpha channel


Automating tasks

You can automate tasks using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications to create automation projects that can be edited and used in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 or other applications.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating automation projects using the Visual Basic Editor


Creating automation projects using the Visual Basic Editor

You can create automation projects using the Visual Basic Editor. The Visual Basic Editor lets you use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications to create and edit scripts that can be run in Corel PHOTO-PAINT or in other applications.

For information about working with the Visual Basic Editor, see "Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 VBA Help."

Related Topics

To open the Visual Basic Editor

To run an automation project


To open the Visual Basic Editor

•	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

Related Topics

Creating automation projects using the Visual Basic Editor

To run an automation project


To run an automation project

•	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

Related Topics

Creating automation projects using the Visual Basic Editor

To open the Visual Basic Editor


Retouching

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 lets you retouch images to improve their quality or modify their contents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	improving scanned images

•	removing red-eye

•	removing dust and scratch marks

•	cloning image areas

•	sharpening images

•	erasing image areas

•	smearing, smudging, and blending colors


Improving scanned images

You can remove lines from scanned or interlaced video images. These lines can be filled with copies of adjacent lines of pixels, or with colors derived from surrounding pixels. You can also remove moiré or noise. Moiré is the wave pattern produced when halftone screens of two different frequencies are superimposed on the same image. Noise is the speckled effect produced by scanning or video-capturing.

Related Topics

To improve scanned images


To improve scanned images

To	Do the following
Remove moiré	Click Effects [image] Noise [image] Remove moiré, and specify the settings you want.
Remove noise	Click Effects [image] Noise [image] Remove noise, and specify the settings you want.
Remove lines	Click Image [image] Transform [image] Deinterlace, and specify the settings you want.
Related Topics

Improving scanned images


Removing red-eye

You can remove the red-eye effect from the eyes of subjects in photos. Red-eye occurs when light from a flash reflects off the back of a person's eye.

Related Topics

To remove red-eye


To remove red-eye

1	Open the Touch-up flyout, and click the Red-eye removal tool.

2	Type a value in the Size box to match the brush size to the eye.

3	Click the eye to remove the red pixels.

You can also
Change the tolerance level	On the property bar, choose a value in the Tolerance box.
Change the brush shape	On the property bar, choose a brush shape from the Shape picker.
 Notes

•	The default Tolerance value corrects red-eye in most photos; however, if it is difficult to isolate the eye area, and a subject has red tones in their face, you may want to decrease the Tolerance value to differentiate the red in the eye from the skin tone.

•	You can use the Red-eye removal tool on images in the Paletted, Lab, RGB, and CMYK color modes.

 Tips

•	You can quickly zoom to the eye area by opening the Zoom flyout, clicking the Zoom tool, and dragging in the image window to enclose the eye area in the zooming rectangle.

•	You can adjust the brush size interactively by holding down Shift (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) while dragging in the image window.

Related Topics

Removing red-eye


Removing dust and scratch marks

You can quickly improve the appearance of an image that has small dust and scratch marks by applying a filter to the entire image. If an image has one or more scratches in a specific area, you can create a mask around the scratches and apply the filter to the editable areas.

The filter works by eliminating the contrast between pixels that exceed the contrast threshold you set. You can set a radius to determine how many pixels are affected by the changes. The settings you choose depend on the size of the blemish and the area surrounding it. For example, if you have a white scratch that is 1 or 2 pixels wide on a dark background, you can set a radius of 2 or 3 pixels and set the contrast threshold higher than if the same scratch was on a light background.

If the scratch or blemish is fairly large or in an area of the image that has a varied color and texture, such as leaves on a tree, you can achieve better results by cloning image areas. For information about cloning, see "Cloning image areas."

Related Topics

To remove small dust and scratch marks throughout an image

To remove scratch marks from part of an image


To remove small dust and scratch marks throughout an image

1	Click Image [image] Correction [image] Dust and scratch.

2	Move the following sliders:

•	Radius [image] lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the radius as low as possible to retain image detail.

•	Threshold [image] lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as high as possible to retain image detail.

Related Topics

Removing dust and scratch marks

To remove scratch marks from part of an image


To remove scratch marks from part of an image

1	Define an editable area that includes the scratch marks.

2	Click Image [image] Correction [image] Dust and scratch

3	Move the following sliders:

•	Radius [image] lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the radius as low as possible to retain image detail.

•	Threshold [image] lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as high as possible to retain image detail.

 Tips

•	You can use the Brush mask tool to define an editable area that includes the scratch mark. Choose a nib size that is wider than the scratch mark so you can brush over the scratch easily. For information about the Brush mask tool, see "To define an editable area by freehand."

•	Feathering the edge of the editable area can improve results by softening the transition between the repaired areas and the original image. For information about feathering, see "To feather the edges of an editable area."

Related Topics

Removing dust and scratch marks

To remove small dust and scratch marks throughout an image


Cloning image areas

You can copy pixels from one image area to another in order to cover damaged or unwanted elements in an image. For example, you can fix a tear or remove a person from an image by applying cloned pixels over the area you want to remove. You can also clone image elements you like and apply them to another image area or a second image. If you clone an object, the newly cloned areas are added to the active object. You can also create abstract images, based on pixels sampled from the original image.

When you clone, two brushes display in the image window: a source point brush and a clone brush that applies the copied pixels from the source point. A cross-hair displays in the source point brush to distinguish it from the clone brush. The source point brush moves relative to the clone brush as you drag across the image.

Related Topics

To clone an image area or object


To clone an image area or object

1	Open the Touch-up flyout, and click the Clone tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Clone picker, and click Clone.

3	Choose a brush from the Brush type list box.

4	Click the image to set a source point for the clone.

If you want to reset the source point, right-click the area you want to clone.

5	Drag the clone brush in the image window to apply the pixels from the source point.

You can also
Create abstract image areas based on pixels sampled from the source point	Click Impressionism clone or Pointillism clone on the Clone picker before dragging in the image window.
Create multiple clones of an object	Click the Cumulative button on the Stroke attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is available only for some of the Effect tools and the Clone tool. If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.
Clone an object and the background simultaneously	Click the Merge source button on the Dab attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is only available when the Cumulative button is disabled.
Related Topics

Cloning image areas


Sharpening images

You can sharpen images to increase contrast, enhance image edges, or reduce shading. To sharpen an image, or an editable area of an image, you can use filters or brush strokes. Filters can also be applied using a lens. For more information about lenses, see "Working with lenses." Sharpening is usually done after adjusting the color and tone of an image and after resampling or resizing.

Related Topics

To sharpen an image by applying a filter

To sharpen selected areas by applying brush strokes


To sharpen an image by applying a filter

1	Click Image [image] Correction [image] Tune sharpen

2	Move the Percentage slider to set the amount of sharpening that is applied each time you click a thumbnail button.

3	Click any of the following thumbnail buttons:

•	Unsharp mask [image] lets you accentuate edge detail and focus blurred areas in the image without removing low-frequency areas.

•	Adaptive unsharp [image] lets you accentuate edge detail by analyzing the values of neighboring pixels. This filter preserves most image detail, but its effect is most apparent in high-resolution images.

•	Sharpen [image] lets you accentuate the edges of the image by focusing blurred areas and increasing the contrast between neighboring pixels. Move the Background slider to set the threshold for the effect. Lower values increase the number of pixels changed by the sharpening effect.

•	Directional sharpen [image] lets you enhance the edges of an image without creating a grainy effect.

You can also
Remove shading	Click Effects [image] Sharpen [image] High pass. The High pass filter removes image detail and shading to give an image a glowing quality by emphasizing its highlights and luminous areas. However, it can also affect the color and tone of the image.
 Notes

•	The Unsharp mask filter provides best results for most photographs.

•	Most sharpen filters support all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white. The Sharpen filter, supports all color modes except paletted and black-and-white.

 Tips

•	You can access each of the sharpen filters individually by clicking Effects [image] Sharpen, and clicking a filter.

•	You can use this procedure to sharpen an editable area of an image.

Related Topics

Sharpening images

To sharpen selected areas by applying brush strokes


To sharpen selected areas by applying brush strokes

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Effect tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Effect tool picker, and click the Sharpen tool.

3	Choose a brush from the Brush type list box.

4	Choose a nib from the Shape picker.

5	Type a value in the Size box to specify the nib size.

6	Drag across an image area.

Related Topics

Sharpening images

To sharpen an image by applying a filter


Erasing image areas

You can edit images and objects by erasing areas. For example, you can erase part of an object to change its shape or reveal more of the layer below. You can also erase areas of the image to reveal the background color, or erase part of the last action applied to the image.

The tools used to erase have many of the same settings as brushes, which means you can control the size, shape and transparency to create unique effects. For example, you can apply a bitmap fill to the entire image, increase the transparency value of the eraser tool, and create a superimposed effect by partially erasing the fill (the last action performed).

You can also erase image areas based on color. The background color replaces the foreground color you erase.

Related Topics

To erase part of an object

To erase image areas and reveal the background color

To erase the last action applied to an image

To replace a foreground color with the background color


To erase part of an object

1	 Select an object.

2	Click the Eraser tool.

3	Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

4	Drag across the area you want to erase.

 Note

•	The erased areas reveal the object below.

 Tip

•	To maintain the shape of an object, enable the Lock object transparency button on the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Erasing image areas

To erase image areas and reveal the background color

To erase the last action applied to an image

To replace a foreground color with the background color


To erase image areas and reveal the background color

1	 Click the Eraser tool.

2	Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

3	Drag across the image area you want to erase.

Related Topics

Erasing image areas

To erase part of an object

To erase the last action applied to an image

To replace a foreground color with the background color


To erase the last action applied to an image

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Undo brush tool.

2	Specify the settings you want on the property bar.

3	Drag across the area you want to erase.

 Note

•	If you want to erase the last action completely, click the Undo button on the standard toolbar. For more information about undoing, see "Undoing and redoing actions."

 Tip

•	You can also erase the last action applied to an object, but you must use the Eraser tool to erase the object itself.

Related Topics

Erasing image areas

To erase part of an object

To erase image areas and reveal the background color

To replace a foreground color with the background color


To replace a foreground color with the background color

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Replace color brush tool.

2	On the property bar, choose a nib shape from the Shape picker.

3	Type a value in the Tolerance box.

4	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click the Foreground color swatch, and choose a color.

5	Drag in the image window.

 Note

•	The Tolerance setting lets you specify the color tolerance based on color similarity.

 Tip

•	You can select a foreground color from the image by clicking the Eyedropper tool, and clicking a color in the image window. The color you select displays in the Foreground color swatch.

Related Topics

Erasing image areas

To erase part of an object

To erase image areas and reveal the background color

To erase the last action applied to an image


Smearing, smudging, and blending colors

You can smear, smudge, or blend the paint in an image. Smearing produces a similar effect to dragging across wet paint. Smudging has the same effect as rubbing across a pastel drawing. Blending softens the transition between colors or hard edges. You can smear, smudge, or blend the colors in an entire image or in an editable area you define. For more information about defining an editable area, see "Masking."

Related Topics

To smear, smudge, or blend colors in an image


To smear, smudge, or blend colors in an image

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Effect tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Effect tools picker, and click one of the following tools:

•	Smear

•	Smudge

•	Blend

3	Choose a brush from the Brush type list box on the property bar.

4	Drag in the image window.

You can also
Increase the effect of the brush across an area without clicking over the area multiple times	Click the Cumulative button on the Stroke attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is available only for some of the Effect tools and the Clone tool. If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.
Apply the effect to an object and the background simultaneously	Click the Merge source button on the Dab attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is only available when the Cumulative button is disabled.
Related Topics

Smearing, smudging, and blending colors


Applying special effects

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 provides special effects filters that let you apply a wide range of transformations to images. For example, you can transform images to simulate drawings, paintings, etchings, or abstract art.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	working with special effects

•	applying preset styles

•	applying color and tone effects

•	managing plug-ins

For more information about special effects categories and each special effect you can apply, see "Special effects categories."


Working with special effects

Corel PHOTO-PAINT special effects let you change the appearance of an image. You can apply a special effect to the entire image, or you can use a mask or a lens to transform only part of an image.

Applying special effects

The following are all the categories of special effects available, each of which includes several different effects:

3-D effects	Color transform	Distort
Art strokes	Contour	Noise
Blur	Creative	Texture
Camera	Custom
When you apply a special effect, you can adjust its settings to control how the effect transforms an image. For example, when you use a vignette effect to frame an image, you can increase the offset value and decrease the fade value to decrease the size and opacity of the frame. With a watercolor effect, you can decrease the size of the brush to show more image detail or increase the size of the brush for an abstract effect.

Applying special effects to part of an image

You can apply special effects to part of an image by defining an editable area. For information about editable areas, see "Masking."

You can also use a lens to apply a special effect to part of an image. The following special effects are also preset lens types:

Jaggy despeckle	Scatter	Invert
Smooth	Pixelate	Posterize
Soften	Add noise	Threshold
Psychedelic	Remove noise
Solarize	Sharpen
When you use a lens, changes are not applied to the image; instead they are seen on the screen through the lens. For information about lenses, see "Working with lenses."

Repeating and fading special effects

You can repeat a special effect to intensify its result. You can also fade an effect to diminish its intensity, and you can define how the effect is merged with the image. For information about repeating and fading a special effect that you've applied, see "Undoing, redoing, repeating, and fading." For information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

Related Topics

To apply a special effect

To apply a special effect to an editable area

To repeat a special effect


To apply a special effect

1	Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect.

2	Adjust the settings of the special effect filter.

 Note

•	If the image contains one or more objects, the special effect is applied only to the background or the selected object.

 Tips

•	When you preview the special effect in the image window, you can press and hold F2 to hide the special effect dialog box.

•	Some special effects can affect the shape of the object they are applied to. You can retain an outline of the object's original shape by enabling the Lock object transparency button on the Objects Docker window/palette. The areas which remain between the outline of the original shape and the new shape of the object are filled with black. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Working with special effects

To apply a special effect to an editable area

To repeat a special effect


To apply a special effect to an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect.

3	Adjust the settings in the dialog box.

Related Topics

Working with special effects

To apply a special effect

To repeat a special effect


To repeat a special effect

•	Click Effects [image] Repeat, and click one of the following:

•	Repeat [last effect] [image] repeats the last applied effect

•	[Last effect] to all visible [image] repeats the last applied effect to all visible elements in an image

•	[Last effect] to all selected [image] repeats the last applied effect to all selected objects in an image

Related Topics

Working with special effects

To apply a special effect

To apply a special effect to an editable area


Applying preset styles

Some special effects include preset styles. You can apply different preset styles and modify their settings to get the effect you want. When you are satisfied with an effect, you can save the customized settings as a preset style to apply it to other images. When you no longer need a preset style, you can delete it.

The following special effects include preset styles:

Bevel effects	Spot filter	Bump map
The Boss	Glass	Mesh warp
Lens flare	Frame	Whirlpool
Lighting effects	Alchemy
Related Topics

To apply a preset style

To create a custom preset style

To delete a custom preset style


To apply a preset style

1	Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect that includes preset styles.

2	Choose a preset style from the Style or Presets list box.

Related Topics

Applying preset styles

To create a custom preset style

To delete a custom preset style


To create a custom preset style

1	Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect that includes preset styles.

If you want to base the custom preset style on an existing preset style, choose a preset style from the Style or Presets list box.

2	Adjust the settings of the special effect.

3	Click the Add preset button.

4	Type a name in the dialog box.

Related Topics

Applying preset styles

To apply a preset style

To delete a custom preset style


To delete a custom preset style

1	Click Effects, choose a special effect category, and click an effect that includes preset styles.

2	Choose a preset style from the Style or Presets list box.

3	Click the Delete preset button.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default or the last-used preset style.

Related Topics

Applying preset styles

To apply a preset style

To create a custom preset style


Applying color and tone effects

You can transform the color and tone of an image to produce a special effect. For example, you can create an image that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the appearance of an image.

Related Topics

To apply color and tone effects


To apply color and tone effects

•	Click Image [image] Transform, and click one of the following effects:

•	Invert [image] lets you reverse the colors of an image. Inverting an image creates the appearance of a photographic negative.

•	Posterize [image] lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image to remove gradations and create larger areas of flat color.

•	Threshold [image] lets you specify a brightness value as a threshold. Pixels with a brightness value higher or lower than the threshold will display in white or black, depending on the threshold option you specify.

If a dialog box displays, adjust the effect settings.

Related Topics

Applying color and tone effects


Managing plug-ins

Plug-ins provide additional features and effects for image editing in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Special effect plug-in filters process image information and alter an image according to preset specifications.

At start-up, Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically detects and loads plug-ins placed in the plug-ins folder. For example, the Digimarc plug-in is loaded automatically, and added to the Effects menu. You can add more plug-ins to the plug-ins folder or you can add plug-ins installed in other locations, but third-party plug-ins must be installed in a folder for which you have read and write access.

In the Mac OS, you can use plug-ins installed in other folders by creating an alias for the folder where the plug-in is located and moving the alias to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT plug-ins folder.

In Windows, you can disable plug-ins you are not using.

Related Topics

To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)

To disable a plug-in (Windows)

To install a new plug-in in the Plugins folder (Mac OS)

To install a plug-in from another location (Mac OS)


To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Plug-ins.

3	Click Add.

4	Choose the folder where the plug-in is stored.

Related Topics

Managing plug-ins

To disable a plug-in (Windows)

To install a new plug-in in the Plugins folder (Mac OS)

To install a plug-in from another location (Mac OS)


To disable a plug-in (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Plug-ins.

3	Disable the checkbox next to the plug-in you want to disable.

 Note

•	If your plug-ins are installed in the Corel PHOTO-PAINT plug-ins folder, you must add individual plug-ins to the list on the Plug-ins page, and disable the first checkbox in the list (the Corel PHOTO-PAINT plug-in folder) before you can disable individual plug-ins. To add individual plug-ins to the list, see "To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)."

Tip

•	You can also disable a plug-in and remove it from the plug-in list by clicking a plug-in to highlight it, and clicking the Remove button.

Related Topics

Managing plug-ins

To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)

To install a new plug-in in the Plugins folder (Mac OS)

To install a plug-in from another location (Mac OS)


To install a new plug-in in the Plugins folder (Mac OS)

•	Drag the plug-in into the application's Plugins folder.

If Corel PHOTO-PAINT is running, restart it to activate the new plug-in.

 Notes

•	Once Corel PHOTO-PAINT is running, the plug-ins can be accessed from the File, Effects, or Mask menus.

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT only supports Photoshop 7 compatible plug-ins.

Related Topics

Managing plug-ins

To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)

To disable a plug-in (Windows)

To install a plug-in from another location (Mac OS)


To install a plug-in from another location (Mac OS)

1	Select the folder containing the plug-in.

2	Click File [image] Make alias.

3	Drag the alias into the application's Plugins folder.

If Corel PHOTO-PAINT is running, restart it to activate the new plug-in.

 Note

•	Once the alias is moved to the Plugins folder, Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically detects the plug-in at start-up and makes it accessible.

Related Topics

Managing plug-ins

To install a plug-in from another location (Windows)

To disable a plug-in (Windows)

To install a new plug-in in the Plugins folder (Mac OS)


Special effects categories

The following are all the categories of special effects available, each of which includes several different effects that you can apply:

•	3-D special effects

•	Art strokes

•	Blur

•	Camera

•	Color transform

•	Contour

•	Creative

•	Custom

•	Distort

•	Noise

•	Texture

For information about the Sharpen special effects, see "Sharpening images." For information about the Remove moiré and Remove noise effects, see "Improving scanned images."

Related Topics

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


3-D special effects

You can apply three-dimensional special effects to an image to create the illusion of depth.

The three-dimensional special effects are

•	3-D rotate [image] lets you rotate an image by adjusting an interactive, three-dimensional model

•	Bevel effect [image] lets you create the appearance of a raised surface by applying a sloped edge along an editable area. For more information, see "Applying Bevel effects."

•	Cylinder [image] shapes an image into a cylinder

•	Emboss [image] transforms an image into a relief, with details appearing as ridges and crevices on a flat surface. You can choose the embossing color or depth, as well as the direction of the light source.

•	Glass [image] places a three-dimensional, glass-like surface over an editable area. You can specify the width of the bevel, the area that is slanted to produce the three-dimensional look, the sharpness of the bevel's edges, and the angle at which the light is bent at the edges. You can also specify the brightness, direction, and angle of the light that strikes the bevel. The Glass effect lets you apply preset styles and create custom preset styles.

•	Page curl [image] makes one of the corners of an image roll in on itself. You can specify a corner and set the curl orientation, transparency, and size. You can also choose a color for the curl and the background that is exposed where the image curls away from the paper.

•	Perspective [image] gives an image three-dimensional depth, as if the image recedes into the distance. You can also skew an image into different shapes.

•	Pinch/punch [image] warps an image by pinching it toward you or punching it away from you. You can position the effect by setting a center point.

•	Sphere [image] wraps an image around the inside or outside of a sphere. You can set a center point around which an image wraps, and you can control the wrapping. Positive values expand the central pixels toward the edges of an image resulting in a convex shape. Negative values compress pixels toward the center of an image resulting in a concave shape.

•	The Boss [image] raises the area of the image that falls along the edges of a mask. You can specify the width, height, and smoothness of the raised edge, as well as the brightness, sharpness, direction, and angle of the light sources. The Boss effect lets you apply preset styles and create custom preset styles.

•	Zig zag [image] creates waves of straight lines and angles that twist an image outward from an adjustable center point. You can choose the type of waves and specify their number and strength.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Art strokes special effects

The art strokes special effects give images a hand-painted look. You can use these effects to make images look like pastel drawings, sponge paintings, and watercolors, or to create textured backgrounds.

The art strokes special effects are

•	Charcoal [image] makes an image look like a black-and-white charcoal drawing

•	Conté crayon [image] simulates textures produced with a conté crayon. You can select multiple crayon colors and set the crayon pressure and the granularity of the texture.

•	Crayon [image] makes an image look like a wax crayon drawing. You can specify the crayon pressure and create dark outlines around elements in the image.

•	Cubist [image] groups similarly colored pixels into squares to produce an image that resembles a cubist painting. You can specify the square size, the amount of light, and the paper color.

•	Dabble [image] makes image pixels look like dabs of paint. You can choose from a variety of brush strokes and specify the brushstroke size.

•	Impressionist [image] makes an image look like an impressionist painting. You can customize the dabs of color or the brush strokes and specify the amount of light in the image.

•	Palette knife [image] creates the impression that an image was created by spreading paint on a canvas with a palette knife. You can specify the amount of smudging and the size and direction of the brush strokes.

•	Pastels [image] makes an image look like a pastel drawing. You can specify the size and color variation of the brush strokes.

•	Pen and ink [image] makes an image look like a pen-and-ink drawing created with a cross-hatching or stipple technique

•	Pointillist [image] analyzes the main colors of an image and converts them to small dots. You can specify the size of the dots and the amount of light in the image.

•	Scraperboard [image] scrapes away a black surface to reveal white or another color, making an image look like a sketchy drawing. You can specify the density of the paint and the brush stroke size.

•	Sketch pad [image] makes an image look like a pencil sketch

•	Water marker [image] makes an image look like an abstract sketch created with color markers. You can change the brush strokes by selecting different modes. You can also specify the size and color variation of the brush strokes.

•	Watercolor [image] makes an image look like a watercolor painting. You can specify the brush size, granulation level, and image brightness. You can also specify the intensity of the colors and determine the degree to which the colors blend.

•	Wave paper [image] makes an image look like a painting created on textured, wave paper. You can create a black-and-white painting, or you can preserve the original color of the image.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Blur special effects

The blur special effects change the pixels of an image to soften them, smooth their edges, blend them, or create motion effects.

The blur special effects are

•	Tune blur [image] lets you apply any of four blurring effects, which are represented by thumbnails, to an image. You can adjust the blur effect and preview the image with softer or sharper focus while you are editing it. The Tune blur filter lets you improve image quality or create exciting visual effects.

•	Directional smooth [image] smooths the regions of gradual change in an image while preserving edge detail and texture. You can use this filter to subtly blur the edges and surfaces of images without distorting the focus.

•	Gaussian blur [image] produces a hazy effect, blurring the focus of an image according to Gaussian distribution, which spreads the pixel information outward using bell-shaped curves

•	Jaggy despeckle [image] scatters colors in an image, creating a soft, blurred effect with minimal distortion. It is most effective for removing the jagged edges that can appear in line art or high-contrast images. The Jaggy despeckle effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Low pass [image] removes sharp edges and detail from an image, leaving smooth gradients and low-frequency areas. The higher the settings you specify, the more image detail is erased.

•	Motion blur [image] creates the illusion of movement in an image. You can specify the direction of movement.

•	Radial blur [image] creates a blurring effect in an image that spins around or radiates outward from a center point that you specify

•	Smooth [image] mutes the differences between adjacent pixels to smooth an image without losing detail. It is especially useful for removing the dithering that is created when you convert an image from the paletted mode to the RGB mode. The Smooth effect produces a more pronounced effect than the Soften effect. The Smooth effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Soften [image] smooths and tones down the harsh edges in an image without losing important image detail. The difference between the Smooth and Soften effects is subtle but is often apparent when images are viewed at high resolution. The Soften effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Zoom [image] blurs image pixels outward from a center point. The pixels closest to the center point are the least blurry.

•	Smart blur [image] blurs an image but retains the edge detail. This effect is useful if you want to retain the sharp lines and edges, such as the ones that form the letters in text, when you export an image to a file format that would normally reduce the amount of detail.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Camera special effects

The Camera special effects let you simulate the effect produced by photographic filters, such as spot filters and diffusion filters. You can also add lighting effects, such as sun flares or spot lights.

The camera special effects are

•	Diffuse [image] softens images by distributing image pixels to fill in blank spaces and remove noise. The result simulates the soft focus of a photographer's diffusion filter. You can make this effect smooth or blurry.

•	Lens flare [image] produces rings of light on an RGB image, simulating the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed towards a direct, bright light. For more information, see "Applying Lens flare effects."

•	Lighting effects [image] lets you add light sources to an RGB or grayscale image to create the illusion of spotlights, floodlights, or sunlight. You can also apply a texture to create embossed reliefs. You can use a preset light or texture style, or customize a preset style and save it in the preset list. For more information, see "Applying Lighting effects."

•	Spot filter [image] lets you control the focus area in an image and de-emphasize the surrounding area by applying a Gaussian blur to imitate a photographer's use of depth of field. You can set the position and radius of the area in focus, control the edges and degree of the blur, and decrease light in the surrounding areas. You can use a preset style or customize a preset style and save it in the preset list.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Color transform special effects

The color transform special effects let you create dramatic effects by changing the color of an image.

The color transform special effects are

•	Bit planes [image] reduces an image to basic RGB color components and displays tonal changes using solid colors. You can adjust the tonal values of each color component individually or as a group.

•	Halftone [image] gives an image the appearance of a color halftone. A color halftone is an image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes that represent different tones. You can specify the size of the biggest dot and vary the color pattern.

•	Psychedelic [image] changes the colors in an image to bright, electric colors, such as orange, hot pink, cyan, and lime green. The Psychedelic effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Solarize [image] transforms colors in an image by reversing image tones. The Solarize effect is also a preset lens type.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Contour special effects

The contour special effects detect and accentuate the edges of objects, items, and editable areas in an image. You can adjust the level of edge detection, the type of edges that are detected, as well as the color of the edges that are detected.

The contour special effects are

•	Edge detect [image] detects the edges in an image and converts them to lines on a single-color background. You can customize this effect by specifying the intensity of the outline and the background color.

•	Find edges [image] locates edges in an image and lets you convert these edges to soft or solid lines. When you convert edges to soft lines you create a smooth blurred outline. Converting edges to solid lines creates a sharper outline. The Find edges filter is particularly useful for high-contrast images, such as images that contain text.

•	Trace contour [image] highlights the edges of image elements using a 16-color palette. Trace contour lets you specify which edge pixels are highlighted.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Creative special effects

The creative special effects use a variety of shapes and textures to transform an image into abstract art. They use craft items, crystals, fabric, glass, game pieces, frames, whirlpools, or raindrops as the foundation for creating something new.

The creative special effects are

•	Crafts [image] makes an image look as though it was created with craft shapes, such as puzzle pieces, gears, marbles, candy, ceramic tile, and poker chips. You can specify the size and angle of the shapes, as well as the brightness of the effect.

•	Crystalize [image] makes an image look as though it was created with crystals. You can control the effect by specifying the dimensions of the crystals. Lower values produce smaller crystals, causing less distortion. Higher values produce larger crystals and create a more abstract effect.

•	Fabric [image] makes an image look as though it was created with textiles, such as needlepoint, rug hooking, quilts, strings, ribbons, and tissue collage. You can specify the size and angle of the textile, as well as the brightness.

•	Frame [image] lets you frame an image with a preset frame, another image, or an area defined by a mask. You can change the color, opacity, and alignment of a frame, and you can save customized settings as preset styles.

•	Glass block [image] makes an image look as though it is being viewed through thick glass blocks. You can control the effect by specifying the dimensions of the glass blocks.

•	Kid's play [image] makes an image look as though it was created with light pegs, building blocks, finger paint, or paint-by-numbers. You can specify the size and angle of the elements, as well as the brightness of the effect.

•	Mosaic [image] breaks an image into unequal elliptical pieces to form the appearance of a mosaic. You can specify the size of the pieces and the background color. You can also frame the mosaic.

•	Particles [image] lets you add sparkle to an image by using white or colored bubbles and star particles. You can specify the size, number, and transparency of the particles, as well as the amount of color they contain.

•	Scatter [image] distorts an image by scattering pixels. You can specify the direction of the scattering. The Scatter effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Smoked glass [image] applies a transparent colored tint to images. You can specify the color of the smoked glass, the opacity of the tint, and the amount of blurring.

•	Stained glass [image] transforms images into stained-glass artwork. You can adjust the size of the glass pieces and create solder between them.

•	Vignette [image] lets you add an elliptical, circular, rectangular, or square frame around an image. You can specify the color and fade rate of the effect.

•	Vortex [image] produces a swirl around a center point that you specify in an image. You can specify the direction of the swirl's inner and outer pixels.

•	Weather [image] lets you apply snow, rain, and fog effects to an image. You can specify the effect's intensity and the size of the elements.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Custom special effects

The custom special effects offer you a wide range of effects to transform an image. You can create an artistic media painting, overlay an image with a customized image, or use a variety of blur, sharpen, and edge detect effects.

The custom special effects are

•	Alchemy [image] transforms images into artistic media paintings by applying brush strokes to images. You can create a brush and specify color, size, angle, and transparency settings. You can also choose from a variety of preset brushes, and save customized brushes.

•	Band pass [image] adjusts the sharp and smooth areas on images. Sharp areas are areas where abrupt changes take place (for example, colors, edges, noise). Smooth areas are areas where gradual changes take place.

•	Bump map [image] adds texture and patterns to an image by embedding its surface with a relief based on the pixel values of a bump map image. The pixel values of the bump map image represent surface elevation. You can use a preset bump map or load a custom bump map image. You can specify the surface and lighting properties of the effect.

•	User defined [image] lets you create blur, sharpen, or edge detect special effects by defining a new color value for each pixel based on the color values of adjacent pixels. You define the value of the selected pixel numerically, by typing values in a grid. The central box in the grid represents the selected pixel, and the boxes around it represent the adjacent pixels. The number you type in the central box of the grid is multiplied by the original color value of the selected pixel. The resulting number (the new color value of the selected pixel) can be further modified by choosing how much it is influenced by the values of the adjacent pixels, which can be added to or subtracted from the value of the selected pixel. For example, if you type 0 in all the boxes surrounding the central pixel, the pixel's value is not influenced by the adjacent pixels, but only by the number you type in the central box. All numbers you type in the grid are multiplied by the corresponding pixel values and added together to create a new value for the pixel. The new pixel value is then divided by a divisor value you choose. If the divisor is the same as the number you type in the central box, then they will cancel each other out, and the new pixel value will depend only on the values of the adjacent pixels. The result of all numerical operations in the grid represents the final color value (1 to 255) of the pixel.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Distort special effects

The distort special effects transform the appearance of images without adding depth.

The distort special effects are

•	Blocks [image] breaks down the image into scrambled block pieces. You can specify the size of the blocks, the distance between the blocks, and the color of the background (exposed when the effect is applied).

•	Displace [image] shifts an active image according to the values of a secondary image known as a displacement map. Values from the displacement map display as forms, colors, and warp patterns in the image.

•	Mesh warp [image] lets you distort an image by repositioning the nodes on a superimposed grid. You can increase the number of nodes on the grid by increasing the number of gridlines to a maximum of 10. Increasing the number of nodes on the grid provides finer control over small details in the image. You can use any of the preset mesh warp styles, and you can create and save custom mesh warp styles.

•	Offset [image] changes an image's position by shifting it according to the parameters you specify. When an image is offset, empty areas display where the image was previously positioned. You can fill the empty areas by tiling or stretching the image, or by applying color.

•	Pixelate [image] breaks an image into square, rectangular, or circular cells. The Pixelate effect is also a preset lens type.

•	Ripple [image] distorts an image with one or more waves. You can specify the strength of the primary wave to set the warping of the image or add an additional perpendicular wave to increase the distortion.

•	Shear [image] maps the shape of an image to the shape of a line segment

•	Swirl [image] creates a swirl across an image according to the direction, number of whole rotations, and angle that you specify

•	Tile [image] reduces the image's dimensions and reproduces it as a series of tiles on a grid. You can use this effect in combination with a flood fill to create a background or to create a wallpaper effect for a Web page.

•	Wet paint [image] creates the illusion of wet paint on images. You can specify the size of the drips and the range of colors that are affected in the image.

•	Whirlpool [image] applies a fluid, swirling pattern across an image. You can use a preset whirlpool style, or you can create a custom style by setting the smear length, spacing, twist, and streak detail of the effect. You can also save custom whirlpool styles.

•	Wind [image] blurs an image in a specific direction, creating the effect of wind blowing across the image. You can specify the strength and direction of the blur, as well as the transparency of the effect.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Noise special effects

Texture special effects


Noise special effects

In bitmap editing, noise is defined as the random pixels that display across an image, which resemble static on television screens. The noise special effects let you create, control, or eliminate noise.

The noise special effects are

•	Tune noise [image] lets you apply any of nine noise effects. Each effect is represented by a thumbnail which lets you preview the image as you apply an effect.

•	Add noise [image] creates a granular effect that adds texture to a flat or overly blended image. You can specify the type and amount of noise that is added to the image. The Add noise effect is also a preset lens type.

•	3-D stereo noise [image] creates a dithered noise pattern giving an image the appearance of three-dimensional depth when viewed a certain way. This effect is particularly suited to high-contrast line art and grayscale images. This effect may be very difficult to perceive.

•	Maximum [image] removes noise by adjusting the color value of a pixel based on the maximum color values of its neighboring pixels. This effect also produces a mild blurring effect when applied more than once.

•	Median [image] removes noise and detail by adjusting the color value of a pixel according to the median color value of the surrounding pixels

•	Minimum [image] removes noise by adjusting the color value of a pixel, based on the minimum color values of its neighboring pixels

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Texture special effects


Texture special effects

The texture special effects let you add texture to an image using a variety of shapes and surfaces. You can use bricks, bubbles, canvas, elephant skin, plastic, and stone; or you can create etchings and underpaintings. You can also use these effects to make an image look as though it is painted on a plaster wall or as though you are viewing it through a screen door.

The texture special effects are

•	Brick wall [image] groups pixels into a series of interlocking cells to make an image look like a painting on a brick wall. You can specify the brick size and the density of the brick pattern.

•	Bubbles [image] creates a bubbling foam on an image. You can specify the size of the bubbles and the amount of the image that is covered.

•	Canvas [image] applies a textured surface to an image by letting you use another image as a canvas. You can choose a preset canvas map, or you can load any image as a canvas map. For best results, choose images that have high to medium contrast.

•	Cobblestone [image] makes an image look as though it was created with cobblestones. You can specify the size, spacing, and granularity of the cobblestones.

•	Elephant skin [image] gives an image a wrinkled look by creating an overlay of wavy lines. You can specify the age of the elephant skin (up to 100 years) as well as the skin color.

•	Etching [image] transforms an image into an etching. You can control the depth of the etching, the amount of detail, the direction of the light, and the color of the metal surface.

•	Plaster wall [image] redistributes pixels so that an image looks as though it was painted on a plaster wall

•	Plastic [image] makes an image look as though it is made of plastic. You can specify the image depth, as well as the color and angle of light shining on the plastic.

•	Relief sculpture [image] transforms an image into a relief sculpture. You can set the smoothness of the relief, the amount of detail it contains, the direction of the light, and the surface color.

•	Screen door [image] makes an image look as though it is being viewed through a screen door. You can specify the mesh detail and brightness, the softness within the image, as well as whether the image is color or black-and-white.

•	Stone [image] gives an image a stone texture. You can specify the amount of detail, the density of the pattern, and the angle of the light hitting an image. You can apply a preset stone style or create and save a custom stone style as a preset.

•	Underpainting [image] makes an image look like a painting created on a canvas that is subsequently covered with layers of paint. You can specify the degree to which the original image is painted over and adjust the brightness of the image.

Related Topics

Special effects categories

3-D special effects

Art strokes special effects

Blur special effects

Camera special effects

Color transform special effects

Contour special effects

Creative special effects

Custom special effects

Distort special effects

Noise special effects


Applying Bevel effects

Bevel effects let you create the appearance of a raised surface by applying a sloped edge along an editable area. For example, you can use bevel effects to add depth to text or create 3D buttons for the Web. You can change the angle, direction and color of the lighting, as well as apply a texture along the beveled edge. You can use a preset style or customize a preset style and save it in the preset list.

Related Topics

To apply a bevel


To apply a bevel

1	Select an editable area.

2	Click Effects [image] 3D Effects [image] Bevel effects.

3	Click the Bevel tab, and adjust the following sliders:

•	Width [image] lets you specify the width of the bevel in pixels

•	Height [image] lets you specify the depth of the bevel. The height and width settings determine the angle of the bevel.

•	Smoothness [image] lets you specify the roundness of the beveled edge. Higher values produce rounder edges.

4	Click the Lighting tab, and specify the settings you want.

You can also
Change the color of the light	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
Apply a texture to the beveled edge	Open the Texture picker, and click a texture.
Apply lighting and texture settings to the area inside the bevel	Disable the Preserve interior check box.
Related Topics

Applying Bevel effects


Applying Lens flare effects

You can add rings of light to an RGB image to simulate the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed towards a direct, bright light. For example, you can create the appearance of sunlight reflecting off a surface or create a space scene with nebulas and galaxies. You can control many elements of a lens flare effect:

•	flare [image] the brightest part of the reflected light

•	halo [image] a ring of light that appears around the flare

•	reflection tail [image] a series of smaller circles moving away from the flare

•	rays [image] lines of light that radiate from the flare

•	anamorphic light [image] a streak of light that passes through the flare

You can set the position, size, brightness, and color of these elements, and add noise to create a more natural looking effect.

Related Topics

To apply a lens flare


To apply a lens flare

1	Select an image, editable area, or object.

2	Click Effects [image] Camera [image] Lens flare.

3	Click the Flares tab, and set the properties you want.

If you want to modify the halo or reflection tail, choose Halo or Reflection tail from the list box, and modify the settings you want.

4	Click the Rays tab, and set the properties you want.

If you want to modify the anamorphic light, choose Anamorphic light from the list box, and modify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Applying Lens flare effects


Applying Lighting effects

You can add light sources to an RGB or grayscale image to create the illusion of spotlights, floodlights, or sunlight. You can specify the type and number of light sources, the intensity of the light, and the color of the light. You can also create embossed reliefs by applying a preset or modifying color channel information. You can use a preset light and texture style, or you can customize a preset style and save it in the preset list.

Related Topics

To apply a lighting effect


To apply a lighting effect

1	Click Effects [image] Camera [image] Lighting effects.

2	Click the Light source tab.

3	Enable the Spotlight option in the Type area.

4	In the preview window, drag the Light source selector to set the position and direction for the light.

5	Type a value in the Angle box to set the angle of the light relative to the image.

6	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] lets you set the intensity of the light source

•	Cone size [image] lets you set the width of the light beam. Higher values produce a wider, more diffused light beam.

•	Edge [image] lets you set the diffusion of the light along the edge of the beam

•	Opacity [image] lets you set the density of the light

7	Click the Atmosphere tab, and move the Brightness slider to adjust the brightness of the entire image.

You can also
Change the color of the light	Click the Color picker, and choose a color swatch.
Add a light with the same properties as the last light applied	Click the Add light button.
Delete the last light applied	Click the Delete light button.
Hide/Reveal the Light source selector	Click the Hide/Reveal Light source button.
Add three-dimensional texture using a preset	Click the Presets tab, choose a preset that adds texture to the image, and click the Image texture tab to set the properties you want.
Add three-dimensional texture using color channels	Click the Image texture tab, choose a color channel from the Channels list box, and modify the settings you want.
Related Topics

Applying Lighting effects


Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size

You can change the dimensions and resolution of an image. You can also change the size of the paper border that surrounds an image.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing image dimensions

•	changing image resolution

•	changing the paper size

You can also change the size of an image by removing unwanted areas, or by joining multiple images. For more information, see "Cropping, stitching, and changing orientation."


Changing image dimensions

You can change the physical dimensions of images by increasing or decreasing their height and width. When you increase image dimensions, the application inserts new pixels between existing pixels, and their colors are based on the colors of adjacent pixels. If you increase image dimensions significantly, images may appear stretched and pixelated.

The size of the image on your screen depends on the pixel height and width of the image, on the zoom level, and on your monitor settings. As a result, an image may display as a different size on your screen than when it is printed.

Related Topics

To change the dimensions of an image


To change the dimensions of an image

1	Click Image [image] Resample.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Anti-alias [image] smooths the edges in the image

•	Maintain aspect ratio [image] avoids distortion by maintaining the width-to-height ratio of the image

3	In the Image size area, type values in one of the following pairs of boxes:

•	Width and Height [image] let you specify the image dimensions

•	Width % and Height % [image] let you resize the image to a percentage of its original size

 Note

•	When you change the dimensions of an image, you produce better results using width and height values that are factors of the original values. For example, reducing an image by 50 per cent produces a better-looking image than by reducing the size by 77 per cent. When reducing an image by 50 per cent, the application removes every other pixel; to reduce an image by 77 per cent, the application must remove pixels irregularly.

Related Topics

Changing image dimensions


Changing image resolution

You can change the resolution of an image. Resolution is measured by the number of dots per inch (dpi) when the image is printed. The resolution you choose depends on how the image is output. Typically, images created only for display on computer monitors are 96 or 72 dpi and images created for the World Wide Web are 72 dpi. Images created for printing on desktop printers are generally 150 dpi, while professionally printed images are usually 300 dpi.

Increasing resolution

Higher resolution images contain smaller and more densely packed pixels than lower resolution images. Upsampling increases the resolution of an image by adding more pixels per unit of measure. Image quality may be reduced because the new pixels are interpolated based on the colors of neighboring pixels; the original pixel information is simply spread out. You cannot use upsampling to create detail and subtle color gradations where none existed in the original image. When you increase image resolution, the image size increases on your screen; by default the image maintains its original size when printed.

Decreasing resolution

Downsampling decreases the resolution of an image by removing a specific number of pixels per unit of measure. This produces better results than upsampling. Best results are usually achieved when downsampling is done after correcting an image's color and tone but before sharpening. For more information about correcting and sharpening images, see "Adjusting color and tone" and "Retouching."

You can change the resolution of an image to increase or decrease its file size.

Related Topics

To change the resolution of an image


To change the resolution of an image

1	Click Image [image] Resample.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Identical values [image] sets the same value in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes

•	Anti-alias [image] smooths the edges in the image

•	Maintain original size [image] maintains the size of the file on your hard disk when you change the resolution of the image

3	In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Notes

•	If you resample an image using pixels as the unit of measure, the size of the image also changes.

•	The Identical values check box is grayed if the Maintain aspect ratio check box is enabled.

Related Topics

Changing image resolution


Changing the paper size

Changing the paper size lets you modify the dimensions of the printable area, which contains both the image and the paper. When you resize the paper, you increase or decrease the paper-colored border, but not the dimensions of the original image. However, if you reduce the paper size so that its height and width are smaller than the dimensions of the original image, the original image will be cropped.

Related Topics

To change the paper size


To change the paper size

1	Click Image [image] Paper size.

2	Choose a unit of measure from the list box beside the Width box.

3	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height

If you want to lock the paper size ratio, click Lock.

Related Topics

Changing the paper size


Painting

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 lets you create images or modify existing ones using a variety of shape and paint tools.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	drawing shapes and lines

•	applying brush strokes

•	spraying images

•	painting symmetrical patterns and orbits

•	repeating brush strokes

•	creating custom brushes

•	using a pressure-sensitive pen

•	understanding merge modes


Drawing shapes and lines

You can add shapes, such as squares, rectangles, circles, ellipses, and polygons, to images. By default, shapes are added to an image as new objects. Shapes can be outlined, filled, or rendered as separate, editable objects. For more information about objects, see "Creating objects."

You can also add lines to images. When you add lines, you can specify the width and transparency, as well as the way line segments join together. The current foreground color determines the color of a line.

Related Topics

To draw a rectangle or an ellipse

To draw a polygon

To draw a line


To draw a rectangle or an ellipse

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click one of the following tools:

•	Rectangle tool

•	Ellipse tool

2	On the property bar, choose one of the following options in the Fill list box:

•	Uniform fill

•	Fountain fill

•	Bitmap fill

•	Texture fill

If you want to edit the fill, click the Edit button on the property bar.

3	Drag in the image window until the rectangle or ellipse is the size you want.

You can also
Disable the fill	Click the Disable button on the property bar.
Apply an outline	Type a value in the Border box on the property bar to specify the border width in pixels.
Change the color of an outline	Click the Shape outline button on the property bar.
Round the corners of a rectangle	Type a value in the Radius box on the property bar.
Change the transparency	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar.
 Note

•	The current fill is displayed in the color control area of the toolbox. For information about fills, see "Filling images."

 Tips

•	You can draw a square with the Rectangle tool or a circle with the Ellipse tool by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

•	You can use this procedure to create an object by clicking the New object button on the extended property bar after you click the Rectangle or Ellipse tool.

Related Topics

Drawing shapes and lines

To draw a polygon

To draw a line


To draw a polygon

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Polygon tool.

2	On the property bar, choose one of the following options in the Fill list box:

•	Uniform fill

•	Fountain fill

•	Bitmap fill

•	Texture fill

If you want to edit the fill, click the Edit button on the property bar.

3	Click where you want to set the anchor points of the polygon, and double-click to set the last anchor point.

You can also
Disable the fill	Click the Disable button on the property bar.
Apply an outline to polygon	Type a value in the Border box on the property bar to specify the border width in pixels.
Change the color of an outline	Click the Shape outline button on the property bar.
Change the way outline segments join	Choose a join type from the Shape joints list box on the extended property bar.
Change the transparency	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar.
 Tips

•	You can create 45-degree angles by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) while dragging the Polygon tool.

•	You can use this procedure to create an object by clicking the New object button on the extended property bar after you click the Polygon tool.

Related Topics

Drawing shapes and lines

To draw a rectangle or an ellipse

To draw a line


To draw a line

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Line tool.

2	Type a value in the Width box on the property bar.

3	Click the Color button on the property bar, and choose a color.

4	On the property bar, open the Line joint list box, and click one of the following:

•	Butt [image] joins the segments; if you specify a higher width value, a gap appears between the joined segments

•	Filled [image] fills the gaps between joined segments

•	Round [image] rounds the corners between joined segments

•	Point [image] makes points on the corners of joined segments

5	Drag in the image window to draw a single line segment.

You can also
Draw a line with multiple segments	In the image window, click where you want to start and end each segment, and double-click to end the line.
Change the transparency	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar.
 Tip

•	You can use this procedure to create an object by clicking the New object button on the extended property bar after you click the Line tool.

Related Topics

Drawing shapes and lines

To draw a rectangle or an ellipse

To draw a polygon


Applying brush strokes

Paint tools let you imitate a variety of painting and drawing media. For example, you can apply brush strokes that imitate watercolors, pastels, felt markers and pens. By default, brush strokes are added to the active object or background. Brush strokes can also be rendered as separate objects. For information about objects, see "Creating objects."

The paint tool and brush type you choose determines the appearance of the brush stroke on the image. When you paint with a preset brush, the brush attributes of the paint tool are predetermined.

The color of the brush stroke is determined by the current foreground color, which is displayed in the color control area. You can also choose a foreground color by taking a color sample from an image. For more information about choosing colors, see "Working with color."

In addition to painting with color, you can apply images and textures by painting with a fill. You can also apply a brush stoke to a path. For more information, see "Applying brush strokes to paths."

Merge modes control the way the foreground colors blend with base colors. Merge modes let you combine these colors in various ways to create new colors and effects. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

Related Topics

To paint with a preset brush

To paint with a color sampled from an image

To paint with a fill

To change the merge mode


To paint with a preset brush

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	Open the Paint tool picker on the property bar, and click a paint tool.

3	Choose a preset brush type from the Type list box on the property bar.

4	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click the Foreground color swatch, and choose a color.

5	Drag in the image window.

If you want to constrain the brush to a straight horizontal or vertical line, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) while you drag and press Shift (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) to change direction.

You can also
Change the brush shape	Choose a brush shape from the Shape picker on the property bar.
Change the brush size	Type a value in the Size box on the property bar.
Change the transparency	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar.
 Note

•	The property bar provides options for changing the attributes of a preset brush. After you change an attribute, the brush name changes to Custom art brush. For more information about custom brushes, see "Creating custom brushes."

 Tips

•	You can use this procedure to create an object by clicking Object [image] Create [image] New object before you drag in the image window.

•	You can also choose a preset brush by clicking on a brush stroke sample in the Artistic media Docker window/palette. If the Artistic media Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Artistic media.

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To paint with a color sampled from an image

To paint with a fill

To change the merge mode


To paint with a color sampled from an image

1	Click the Eyedropper tool.

2	Click a color in the image window.

3	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

4	Open the Paint tool picker on the property bar, and click a paint tool.

5	Choose a preset brush type from the Type list box on the property bar.

6	Drag in the image window.

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To paint with a preset brush

To paint with a fill

To change the merge mode


To paint with a fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

2	On the property bar, choose a fill type.

3	Open the Touch-up flyout, and click the Clone tool.

4	On the property bar, open the Clone tool picker, and click the Clone from fill tool.

5	Drag in the image window.

 Note

•	You can paint with any type of fill. For information about fills, see "Filling images."

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To paint with a preset brush

To paint with a color sampled from an image

To change the merge mode


To change the merge mode

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click a paint tool.

2	Choose a merge mode from the Mode list box on the property bar.

 Note

•	For more information on merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To paint with a preset brush

To paint with a color sampled from an image

To paint with a fill


Spraying images

You can paint with small-scale, full-color bitmaps, instead of a brush. For example, you can enhance landscapes by spraying clouds across the sky or foliage across the ground.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT includes a variety of images, which are used to create spraylists. You can load a preset spraylist, edit a preset, or create a spraylist by saving images in an image list. You can edit the source images at any time.

Related Topics

To spray images

To load an image list

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an object

To create an image list from an image

To edit a source image


To spray images

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

2	Choose a preset image list from the Type list box on the property bar.

3	Type a value in the Size box on the property bar.

4	Drag in the image window.

You can also
Return to the preset image list options	Click Reset image list button on the property bar.
Choose the sequence of images in the spraylist	Choose an option from the Image options list box on the property bar.
Change the transparency of the spraylist images	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar.
Specify the number of images sprayed in each dab of the brush	Type a value in the Number of dabs box on the extended property bar.
Specify the distance between dabs along the length of a stroke	Type a value in the Spacing box on the extended property bar.
Specify the distance between dabs along the width of a brush stroke	Type a value in the Spread box on the extended property bar.
Change the rate at which paint fades in a brush stroke	Type a value in the Fade out box on the extended property bar. Negative numbers fade in while positive numbers fade out.
 Note

•	The minimum and maximum numeric values for a box on the property bar can be displayed by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) in the box to open the Settings dialog box.

Related Topics

Spraying images

To load an image list

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an object

To create an image list from an image

To edit a source image


To load an image list

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

2	Click the Load image sprayer list button on the extended property bar.

3	Choose the folder where the image list is stored.

4	Click a filename.

(Windows) If you want to view a thumbnail of the image list, enable the Preview check box.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Spraying images

To spray images

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an object

To create an image list from an image

To edit a source image


To create a spraylist

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

2	Choose a preset image list from the Type list box on the property bar.

3	Click the Create spraylist button on the extended property bar.

4	In the Create spraylist dialog box, specify the contents of the spraylist.

Related Topics

Spraying images

To spray images

To load an image list

To create an image list from an object

To create an image list from an image

To edit a source image


To create an image list from an object

1	Using the Pick tool, select the objects you want to use as source images.

2	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

3	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the flyout button, and click Save objects as image list.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

4	Choose the folder where you want to save the image list.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Spraying images

To spray images

To load an image list

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an image

To edit a source image


To create an image list from an image

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

2	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the flyout arrow, and click Save document as image list.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

3	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Images per row [image] lets you specify the number of horizontal tiles in the image list

•	Images per column [image] lets you specify the number of vertical tiles in the image list

•	Number of images [image] lets you specify the number of images to include in the list

4	Click OK.

5	Choose the folder where you want to save the image list.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Spraying images

To spray images

To load an image list

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an object

To edit a source image


To edit a source image

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Image sprayer tool.

2	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the flyout arrow, and click Edit current image list.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

3	Edit the source image.

If you want to overwrite the last version of the image list, click File [image] Save as, and click Save in the Save an image to disk dialog box.

 Note

•	After you edit an image list, you must reload it in the Image sprayer tool to activate the changes.

Related Topics

Spraying images

To spray images

To load an image list

To create a spraylist

To create an image list from an object

To create an image list from an image


Painting symmetrical patterns and orbits

Corel PHOTO-PAINT gives you tools to create symmetrical and orbital patterns.

Painting symmetrical patterns

You can paint symmetrical patterns on an image by using the radial or mirror brush symmetry mode. When you paint in radial mode, satellite brush nibs, called satellite points, create brush strokes around a center point. When you paint in mirror mode, an identical brush stroke is created on the horizontal plane, the vertical plane, or both.

Painting with orbits

You can create spiral effects by painting an image with orbits. Orbits are circular paths that rotate around a center point. Orbits let you paint spirals, pods, and rings. For example, you can draw a single spiral and adjust the size and closeness of the coils. You can also vary the size of the coils to create rounded segments called pods, or increase the number of orbits to create rings.

Related Topics

To paint symmetrical patterns

To paint with orbits


To paint symmetrical patterns

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3	Click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Symmetry bar.

4	On the Symmetry bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Radial symmetry [image] lets you add satellite points at intervals along the radius of a brush nib. Type a value in the Radial points box to specify the number of satellite points.

•	Mirror symmetry [image] lets you create an identical stroke on the horizontal or vertical plane of an image. Click the Horizontal mirror button, the Vertical mirror button, or both.

5	Click the Set symmetry center button, and click the image to position the center point for the symmetry.

6	Drag in the image window.

 Tip

•	Click the No symmetry button on the Symmetry bar to disable the brush symmetry mode.

Related Topics

Painting symmetrical patterns and orbits

To paint with orbits


To paint with orbits

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3	Click the Enable orbits button on the extended property bar.

4	Click the Orbits bar in the Brush settings Docker window/palette.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Number of orbits [image] lets you specify the number of orbits that are distributed around the center of a brush stroke. Use a value from 1 to 128. Use lower values for spirals and higher values for rings.

•	Radius [image] lets you specify the distance between the center of a brush stroke and the orbits. Use a value from 1 to 999. A smaller nib requires higher values.

•	Rotation speed [image] lets you specify the speed at which the orbits rotate around a brush stroke. Use a value from 0 to 100. Higher values result in closer coils.

•	Grow speed [image] lets you specify the speed at which the orbits move toward the center of a brush stroke. Use a value from 0 to 100. Higher values increase the frequency of the size variation.

•	Grow amount [image] lets you specify the distance that the orbits move when rotating toward the center of a brush stroke. Use a value from 0 to 100. Higher values increase the size variation and create pods.

6	Drag in the image window.

 Tip

•	You can hide or display the point around which the orbits rotate clicking the Include center button on the Orbits bar in the Brush settings Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Painting symmetrical patterns and orbits

To paint symmetrical patterns


Repeating brush strokes

You can save a brush stroke and then reapply it to the same image or other images. You can also repeat a brush stroke along the border of a path or mask. For information about applying a brush stroke to a path, see "Applying brush strokes to paths."

You can edit a saved brush stroke to create new effects by adjusting attributes such as the size, number, angle, and color of the brush stroke.

Related Topics

To save a brush stroke

To apply a saved brush stroke

To edit a saved brush stroke


To save a brush stroke

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	Open the Paint tool picker on the property bar, and click a paint tool.

3	Apply a brush stroke.

4	Click Edit [image] Repeat brushstroke.

If you click Repeat brush stroke you repeat the last action. For this step, you must click the next menu item, Repeat brushstroke.

5	In the Repeat stroke dialog box, click the Stroke flyout arrow, and click Add last tool stroke.

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the brush stroke.

7	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Repeating brush strokes

To apply a saved brush stroke

To edit a saved brush stroke


To apply a saved brush stroke

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	Click Edit [image] Repeat brushstroke.

If there are two menu items called Repeat brushstroke, click the second one.

3	Choose a brush stroke from the Stroke list box.

4	Click in the image window to apply the brush stroke.

If you want to apply more than one brush stroke, continue clicking.

Related Topics

Repeating brush strokes

To save a brush stroke

To edit a saved brush stroke


To edit a saved brush stroke

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	Click Edit [image] Repeat brushstroke.

If there are two menu items called Repeat brushstroke, click the second one.

3	In the Repeat stroke dialog box, choose a saved brush stroke from the Stroke list box.

4	In the Repeat stroke dialog box, modify any attributes.

5	Click in the image window to apply the brush stroke.

Related Topics

Repeating brush strokes

To save a brush stroke

To apply a saved brush stroke


Creating custom brushes

You can create a custom brush by modifying brush attributes. Once you have created a custom brush, you can save it and use it again.

Nib properties

The shape a of brush is determined by the brush nib. The preset nib shapes can be modified or a nib can be created from an editable area and saved. The nib attributes you can adjust are

•	Transparency [image] lets you specify the transparency level for the nib

•	Rotate [image] lets you specify the angle at which the nib is rotated

•	Flatten [image] lets you specify the amount by which the nib is flattened along one dimension

•	Soft Edge [image] lets you specify the transparency and width of the edges of the nib

Stroke attributes

The stroke attributes you can modify are

•	Smoothing [image] lets you specify a value for the smoothing of the stroke when the mouse moves fast. A higher value results in a rounder curve.

•	Fade out [image] lets you specify the intensity of the fade-out effect for the brush stroke. A higher value results in a shorter brush stroke, i.e., the brush stroke runs out of paint faster. A negative value results in a fade-in effect.

Dab attributes

The dab attributes you can adjust are

•	Number of dabs [image] lets you specify the number of dabs in a brush stroke

•	Spacing [image] lets you specify the amount of space between dabs along the length of the brush stroke. A value of 1 produces a solid line. A higher value separates the dabs in the brush stroke.

•	Spread [image] lets you specify the distance between dabs along the width of the brush stroke. A higher value results in a thicker brush stroke.

•	Hue [image] lets you specify the hue variation in the brush stroke

•	Saturation [image] lets you specify the saturation variation in the brush stroke

•	Lightness [image] lets you specify the lightness variation in the brush stroke

Brush texture

Loading a preset brush texture gives you additional design options. The texture attributes you can adjust are

•	Brush Texture [image] lets you specify how much of the texture is applied to the brush stroke

•	Edge texture [image] lets you specify how much of the texture is applied to the edges of the brush stroke. The Edge Texture box is available only if the nib has a soft edge.

•	Bleed [image] lets you specify the extent to which brush strokes become diluted throughout the stroke. If a Sustain Color value is specified, traces of the paint remain throughout the brush stroke.

•	Sustain color [image] lets you specify the extent to which traces of the paint color appear in a brush stroke with a specified bleed value

Color variation

The color attributes you can modify are

•	Hue speed [image] lets you specify how fast the hue value changes

•	Hue range [image] lets you specify the amount of hue variation in the brush stroke

•	Saturation speed [image] lets you specify how fast the saturation value changes

•	Saturation range [image] lets you specify the amount of saturation variation in the brush stroke

•	Lightness speed [image] lets you specify how fast the lightness value changes

•	Lightness range [image] lets you specify the amount of lightness variation in the brush stroke

Related Topics

To create a custom brush

To create a brush nib from an editable area

To load a preset brush texture


To create a custom brush

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3	Choose a preset brush in the Type list box on the property bar.

4	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, move the Size slider.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

5	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the roll-down arrow on any of the following bars, and specify values for any attributes:

•	Nib properties

•	Stroke attributes

•	Dab attributes

•	Brush texture

•	Color variation

You can also
Add a custom nib to the Nib shape picker	Click the Nib options button on the Nib properties bar, and click Add current nib.
Save a custom brush	Click the flyout arrow on the Brush settings Docker window/palette, and click Save brush. In the Save brush dialog box, type a filename.
Related Topics

Creating custom brushes

To create a brush nib from an editable area

To load a preset brush texture


To create a brush nib from an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

3	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

4	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the Nib options button on the Nib properties bar.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

5	Click Create from contents of a mask.

6	Type a value in the Nib size box.

Related Topics

Creating custom brushes

To create a custom brush

To load a preset brush texture


To load a preset brush texture

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the Load texture button on the Brush texture bar.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

4	Choose the folder where the texture file is stored.

5	Double-click the filename.

6	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the roll-down arrow on the Brush texture bar, and type a value from 0 to 100 in any of the following boxes:

•	Brush texture [image] lets you adjust the amount of texture applied to a brush stroke

•	Edge texture [image] lets you adjust the amount of texture applied to the edge of a brush stroke

Related Topics

Creating custom brushes

To create a custom brush

To create a brush nib from an editable area


Using a pressure-sensitive pen

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides settings to control brush strokes applied using a pressure-sensitive pen, or stylus. The pressure applied with the pen on a pen tablet determines the size, opacity, and other attributes of the brush stroke.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically configures pen tablets. In Windows, you can manually configure older pen tablets.

You can assign a different tool to each pressure-sensitive pen and eraser available with the pen tablet. You can also set the pen attributes. Some pressure-sensitive pen attributes are set in percentages; others are set in angles; size is set in pixels. Positive values increase a brush tool attribute as you add pressure to the pen, resulting in a more pronounced effect. Negative values make a brush tool attribute less pronounced as you add pressure.

The pressure-sensitive pen attributes can be saved for future use when you save a custom brush. For more information about custom brushes, see "Creating custom brushes."

Related Topics

To configure a pen tablet (Windows)

To assign a tool to a pressure-sensitive pen

To assign a tool to the eraser of a pressure-sensitive pen

To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen


To configure a pen tablet (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	In the Pen tablet area, click the Configuration button.

4	Apply five strokes using a full range of pressure.

 Note

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically configures many pressure-sensitive pens. If your pressure-sensitive pen has been configured automatically, the Pen tablet configuration button appears grayed.

Related Topics

Using a pressure-sensitive pen

To assign a tool to a pressure-sensitive pen

To assign a tool to the eraser of a pressure-sensitive pen

To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen


To assign a tool to a pressure-sensitive pen

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	In the Pen tablet area, enable the Save last used tool for each stylus check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click a paint tool with the pressure-sensitive pen.

Related Topics

Using a pressure-sensitive pen

To configure a pen tablet (Windows)

To assign a tool to the eraser of a pressure-sensitive pen

To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen


To assign a tool to the eraser of a pressure-sensitive pen

1	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the Eraser options button on the Pen settings bar.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

2	Click a tool.

Related Topics

Using a pressure-sensitive pen

To configure a pen tablet (Windows)

To assign a tool to a pressure-sensitive pen

To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen


To set the attributes of a pressure-sensitive pen

1	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Paint tool picker, and click a paint tool.

3	In the Brush settings Docker window/palette, click the roll-down arrow on the Pen settings bar.

If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.

4	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Size [image] lets you specify the size of the brush tool. Use a value from -999 to 999

•	Opacity [image] lets you adjust the transparency of the brush stroke. Positive or negative values have no impact if the transparency of the tool is set to 0 or is already set to the maximum. Use a value from -99 to 100.

•	Soft edge [image] lets you specify the width of the transparent edge along a brush stroke. Use a value from -99 to 100.

•	Hue [image] lets you shift the hue of the paint color around the Color Wheel up to the specified degree

•	Saturation [image] represents the maximum variation in the saturation of the paint color. Use a value from -100 to 100.

•	Lightness [image] represents the maximum variation of lightness of the paint color. Use a value from -100 to 100.

•	Texture [image] lets you specify the amount of texture visible for the current paint tool. Use a value from -100 to 100.

•	Bleed [image] lets you specify how quickly a brush stroke runs out of paint. Use a value from -100 to 100.

•	Sustain color [image] works in conjunction with the bleed value to adjust the traces of paint that remain throughout the brush stroke. Use a value from -100 to 100.

•	Elongation [image] represents the amount of tilt and rotation of the pen. Use a value from 0 to 999.

5	Drag the pen, varying the amount of pressure you apply to the tablet, to test the attributes.

 Note

•	To vary the shape of artistic nibs which do not support pressure-sensitive sizing, use variants of circular and rectangular nibs.

Related Topics

Using a pressure-sensitive pen

To configure a pen tablet (Windows)

To assign a tool to a pressure-sensitive pen

To assign a tool to the eraser of a pressure-sensitive pen


Understanding merge modes

On computers, colors have numeric values, and merge modes let you perform mathematical calculations with these color values. Merge modes combine a source and a base color in an image to produce a new color or effect, called a result color.

For paint tools, merge modes alter the way brush strokes combine with an image. For objects, merge modes alter the way the colors of an object combine with the background behind the object or with underlying objects.

Merge mode
	Normal replaces the base color with the source color. This is the default merge mode.
	Add adds the values of the source and base colors.
	Subtract adds the values of the source and base colors and subtracts 255 from the result. Because this merge mode treats the color channels as subtractive, the result color is never lighter than the base color. For example, painting blue on white yields blue, and painting blue on black yields black.
	Difference subtracts the source color value from the base color value and applies the absolute value of the result. If the value of the current source color is 0, the base color does not change.
	Multiply multiplies the values of the source and base colors and divides the result by 255. Unless you paint on white, the final result is always darker than the original base color. Multiplying black with any color produces black. Multiplying white with any color leaves the color unchanged.
	Divide divides the base color value by the source color value, and ensures that the result is less than or equal to 255.
	If lighter replaces the base color with the source color when the source color is lighter than the base color.
	If darker applies the source color to the base color when the source color is darker than the base color.
	Texturize converts the source color to grayscale and multiplies the grayscale value by the base color value.
	Color uses the hue and saturation values of the source color and the lightness value of the base color to create a result. This merge mode is the opposite of the Lightness merge mode.
	Hue uses the hue value of the source color and the saturation and lightness values of the base color to create a result color.
	Saturation uses the saturation value of the source color and the lightness and hue values of the base color to create a result color.
	Lightness uses the lightness value of the source color and the hue and saturation values of the base color to create a result color. This merge mode is the opposite of the Color merge mode.
	Invert creates a result color using the complementary color to the source color. This merge mode inverts the value of the current source color and applies the inverted value to the base color. If the value of the source color is 127, the color does not change, because this value lies in the center of the color wheel.
	Logical AND applies the Boolean algebraic formula "AND" to the source and base color values.
	Logical OR applies the Boolean algebraic formula "OR" to the source and base color values.
	Logical XOR applies the Boolean algebraic formula "XOR", or exclude, to the source and base color values.
	Behind applies the source color to those areas of the image that are transparent. The effect is similar to looking through the clear, silver-free areas on a 35-mm negative.
	Screen inverts the source and base color values, multiplies them, and then inverts the result. The result color is always lighter than the base color.
	Overlay multiplies or screens the source color according to the value of the base color.
	Soft light applies a soft, diffused light to the base color.
	Hard light applies a hard, direct spotlight to the base color.
	Color dodge simulates the photographic technique called dodging, which lightens image areas by decreasing the exposure.
	Color burn simulates the photographic technique called burning, which darkens image areas by increasing the exposure.
	Red applies the source color to the red channel of an RGB image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is an RGB image.
	Green applies the source color to the green channel of an RGB image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is an RGB image.
	Blue applies the source color to the blue channel of an RGB image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is an RGB image.
	Cyan applies the source color to the cyan channel of a CMYK image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is a CMYK image.
	Magenta applies the source color to the magenta channel of a CMYK image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is a CMYK image.
	Yellow applies the source color to the yellow channel of a CMYK image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is a CMYK image.
	Black applies the source color to the black channel of a CMYK image. This merge mode is available only when the active image is a CMYK image.


Working with objects

You can increase your image-editing capabilities using objects, which are independent image elements that float above the background. Objects are transparent layers that stack on top of one another. The background forms the bottom layer, and when you create new objects, they are added to the top of the stack. For example, when you open a photo, it becomes the background. You can then add shapes, brush strokes, sprayed images, and other objects on top of the photo.

In this section you'll learn about

•	creating objects

•	changing object properties

•	selecting objects

•	moving, copying, and deleting objects

•	displaying and arranging objects

•	grouping and combining objects


Creating objects

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can create objects from:

•	brush strokes

•	shapes

•	the background

•	editable areas

You can create objects from scratch by applying brush strokes or creating shapes, or you can add brush strokes and shapes to an existing object. For more information about applying brush strokes and creating shapes, see "Painting."

You can also create an object using an entire image background. The background cannot be edited or moved in the stacking order unless it is converted to an object.

Another way you can create an object is to define an editable area on an image background or another object. When you create an object from an editable area, you can include only the visible elements in that area. If an object is obscured by other objects, and you cannot see it, then it will not be included in the editable area. For information about defining editable areas, see "Masking."

All objects in an image have the same resolution and color mode. As you add objects to a file, the file size and memory requirements increase. To decrease file size, you can flatten an image by combining objects. For more information on combining objects, see "Grouping and combining objects."

To retain objects when you save an image, you must save the image in the native Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format. For more information on saving images, see "Saving and closing."

Related Topics

To create an object using a brush tool

To create an object using a shape tool

To create an object using the entire image background

To create an object using an editable area

To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area


To create an object using a brush tool

1	Click Object [image] Create [image] New object.

2	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

3	Set the attributes on the property bar.

4	Drag in the image window to create a brush stroke.

 Notes

•	When the Marquee visible command in the Object menu is enabled, a dashed outline, called a marquee, surrounds the new object.

•	All brush strokes and sprayed images are added to the active object by default.

 Tip

•	You can also create an object by clicking the New object button in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Creating objects

To create an object using a shape tool

To create an object using the entire image background

To create an object using an editable area

To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area


To create an object using a shape tool

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click a shape tool.

2	Set the attributes on the property bar.

3	Drag in the image window to create a shape.

 Notes

•	When the Marquee visible command in the Object menu is enabled, a dashed outline, called a marquee, surrounds the new object.

•	If you want to add a shape to the active object, instead of creating a new object, disable the New object button on the extended property bar.

Related Topics

Creating objects

To create an object using a brush tool

To create an object using the entire image background

To create an object using an editable area

To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area


To create an object using the entire image background

•	Click Object [image] Create [image] From background.

Related Topics

Creating objects

To create an object using a brush tool

To create an object using a shape tool

To create an object using an editable area

To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area


To create an object using an editable area

1	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the thumbnail of the background, or of an object.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palette [image] Objects.

2	Define an editable area.

3	Click Object [image] Create [image] Object: copy selection.

 Tip

•	If you want to remove the editable area of an image as you create an object, click Object [image] Create [image] Object: cut selection.

Related Topics

Creating objects

To create an object using a brush tool

To create an object using a shape tool

To create an object using the entire image background

To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area


To create an object using all visible elements in an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy visible.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Paste as new object.

Related Topics

Creating objects

To create an object using a brush tool

To create an object using a shape tool

To create an object using the entire image background

To create an object using an editable area


Changing object properties

You can rename an object and change its properties. When you create an object, it is given a default name, such as Object 2. If you have not specified settings, the default settings are applied to the object.

You can change the opacity of an object, choose a merge mode, and modify the way an object blends with underlying objects or with the background image. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

By changing object properties, you can also turn an object into a clickable area of an image map for the World Wide Web. For more information, see "Creating image maps."

Related Topics

To change the properties of an object


To change the properties of an object

1	Do one of the following

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select an object in the image window.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Right-click an object, and choose Object properties.

•	(Mac OS) Control + click an object, and choose Object properties.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Type a new name in the Name box.

You can also
Change the opacity of an object	Move the Opacity slider.
Choose a merge mode	Choose a merge mode from the Merge mode list box.
Change the way an object blends with underlying objects or with the background	Modify settings in the Blend area.
 Note

•	An object's name cannot be more than 39 characters long.

 Tip

•	You can also rename an object by double-clicking its name in the Objects Docker window / palette.

Related Topics

Changing object properties


Selecting objects

You must select objects before you can change them. You can select one object, covered objects, multiple objects, all objects, or multiple groups of objects. When you select a single object, a highlighting box with eight transformation handles surrounds the object. When you select multiple objects, the highlighting box expands to surround all of the objects.

You can select multiple objects, but only one object is active. The active object is outlined by a dashed outline called a marquee. You can edit the active object by filling it and applying special effects to it.

When you finish making changes to the selected objects, you can deselect them.

Related Topics

To select objects (Windows)

To select objects (Mac OS)

To deselect objects (Windows)

To deselect objects (Mac)


To select objects (Windows)

To select	Do the following
An object	Open the Pick flyout, click the Object pick tool, and click an object.
All objects in an image	Click Objects [image] Select all.
An object covered by another object	Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool. Hold down Alt, and click until the highlighting box of a covered object displays. This shortcut key allows you to cycle through layered objects.
Multiple objects	Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool. Click one object, hold down Shift, and click the other objects.
Multiple groups of objects	Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool. Click an object in one group, hold down Shift, and click an object from each group you want to select.
 Notes

•	When the Marquee visible command in the Object menu is enabled, a dashed outline, called a marquee, surrounds the active object.

•	If the background is selected before you click Objects [image] Select all, it is added to the selection [image] all objects and the background are now selected. If an object is selected before you click Objects [image] Select all, the background is not included in the selection.

 Tips

•	You can select an object by clicking a thumbnail in the Objects Docker window. If the Objects Docker window is not open, click Window [image] Dockers [image] Objects.

•	You can also select objects in the Objects Docker window stacking order using the following shortcut keys: press Shift + N to select the object above the current object; Shift + P to select the object below the current object; Shift + T to select the top object in the stacking order; and Shift + B to select the bottom object.

Related Topics

Selecting objects

To select objects (Mac OS)

To deselect objects (Windows)

To deselect objects (Mac)


To select objects (Mac OS)

To select	Do the following
An object	Using the Object pick tool, click an object.
All objects in an image	Click Objects [image] Select all.
An object covered by another object	Using the Object pick tool, hold down Option, and click until the highlighting box of a covered object displays. This shortcut key allows you to cycle through layered objects.
Multiple objects	Using the Object pick tool, click one object, hold down Shift, and click the other objects.
Multiple groups of objects	Using the Object pick tool, click an object in one group, hold down Shift, and click an object from each group you want to select.
 Notes

•	When the Marquee visible command in the Object menu is enabled, a dashed outline, called a marquee, surrounds the active object.

•	If the background is selected before you click Objects [image] Select all, it is added to the selection [image] all objects and the background are now selected. If an object is selected before you click Objects [image] Select all, the background is not included in the selection.

 Tips

•	You can select an object by clicking a thumbnail on the Objects palette. If the Objects palette is not open, click Window [image] Palettes [image] Objects.

•	You can also select objects in the Objects palette stacking order using the following shortcut keys: press Option + N to select the object above the current object; Option + P to select the object below the current object; Option + T to select the top object in the stacking order; and Option + B to select the bottom object.

Related Topics

Selecting objects

To select objects (Windows)

To deselect objects (Windows)

To deselect objects (Mac)


To deselect objects (Windows)

To deselect	Do the following
An object	Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool. Click anywhere outside the object's highlighting box.
Multiple objects	Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool. Hold down Shift, and click each object in the image window.
All objects	Open the Pick flyout, click the Object pick tool, and click the background.
 Notes

•	When you deselect an object, it is still active.

•	If the background is part of the selection, clicking the background in the image window does not deselect all objects.

Related Topics

Selecting objects

To select objects (Windows)

To select objects (Mac OS)

To deselect objects (Mac)


To deselect objects (Mac)

To deselect	Do the following
An object	Using the Object pick tool, click anywhere outside the object's highlighting box.
Multiple objects	Using the Object pick tool, hold down Shift, and click each object in the image window.
All objects	Using the Object pick tool, click the background.
 Notes

•	When you deselect an object, it is still active.

•	If the background is part of the selection, clicking the background in the image window does not deselect all objects.

Related Topics

Selecting objects

To select objects (Windows)

To select objects (Mac OS)

To deselect objects (Windows)


Moving, copying, and deleting objects

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you move an object or part of an object to a new location in the same image window or to another image window. You can also copy an object, or part of an object, and paste it into an image. To copy and paste between image windows, you can drag and drop an object from one window to another.

When you move or copy part of an image, you must first define an editable area for that part of the image. You can also move or copy an object into an editable area. For more information about defining editable areas, see "Defining editable areas."

When you no longer need an object, you can delete it.

Related Topics

To move an object

To move part of an object

To copy an object

To copy or move an object into an editable area

To delete an object


To move an object

To move	Do the following
An object within an image window or to another image window	Select an object, and drag it to a new location.
An object by nudging it in preset increments	Select an object, and press an Arrow key.
An object to a precise location relative to the image window.	Select an object. Click the Position and size mode button on the property bar, and type values in the Position boxes on the extended property bar.
 Note

•	For information about setting the nudge value, see "Setting options."

 Tip

•	You can move an object to a precise location that is relative to its current position by enabling the Relative position button on the extended property bar.

Related Topics

Moving, copying, and deleting objects

To move part of an object

To copy an object

To copy or move an object into an editable area

To delete an object


To move part of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Define an editable area on the object.

3	Click Edit [image] Cut.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Paste as new object.

Related Topics

Moving, copying, and deleting objects

To move an object

To copy an object

To copy or move an object into an editable area

To delete an object


To copy an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Paste as new object.

 Note

•	If you paste the object into the same window, the copy is placed on top of the original object.

 Tips

•	You can also copy and paste an object using Ctrl + C (Windows) or Command + C (Mac OS) to copy and Ctrl + V (Windows) or Command + V (Mac OS) to paste.

•	To copy a selected object within the same image window, click Object [image] Duplicate.

Related Topics

Moving, copying, and deleting objects

To move an object

To move part of an object

To copy or move an object into an editable area

To delete an object


To copy or move an object into an editable area

1	Select an object.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Copy

•	Cut

3	Define an editable area.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Into selection.

Related Topics

Moving, copying, and deleting objects

To move an object

To move part of an object

To copy an object

To delete an object


To delete an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a selected object by clicking the Delete object(s) button in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Moving, copying, and deleting objects

To move an object

To move part of an object

To copy an object

To copy or move an object into an editable area


Displaying and arranging objects

You can hide an object from view, align an object to image elements, distribute objects throughout an image, and change the stacking order of objects.

Displaying and hiding objects

By default, all objects are displayed in the image window. However, you can hide an object to make it temporarily invisible. While hidden, it is locked and cannot be modified.

Aligning objects

Objects can be aligned to each other, to the center of the image, to the grid and guidelines, or to the image window. For information about aligning objects to the grid and guidelines, see "Using the guidelines, grid, and rulers."

Distributing objects

You can distribute objects by spacing them equal distances apart. Objects can be distributed vertically, horizontally, or both. Distribution is based on the distance between the centers of selected objects, or on the space between the adjacent edges of the objects.

Changing the order of objects

When you create multiple objects in an image, they are stacked on top of one another in the order in which they were created. The most recently created object is at the top of the stack, and the image background is at the bottom. You can move an object in the image window to cover an object that is lower in the stacking order; however an object always displays behind objects that are higher in the stacking order. Changing the stacking order of objects brings hidden objects into view or places the topmost objects behind other objects.

Related Topics

To hide or display an object

To align an object

To distribute objects

To change the order of objects


To hide or display an object

•	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the Hide/Show icon next to an object thumbnail.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

 Note

•	When an object is hidden, the Hide/Show icon is grayed.

 Tips

•	(Windows) When you hide the background, a checkered transparency grid displays. To customize the transparency grid, click Tools [image] Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display. In the Display dialog box, modify any attributes in the Transparency grid area.

•	(Mac OS) When you hide the background, a checkered transparency grid displays. To customize the transparency grid, click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display. In the Display dialog box, modify any attributes in the Transparency grid area.

Related Topics

Displaying and arranging objects

To align an object

To distribute objects

To change the order of objects


To align an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Align tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	To active [image] aligns the selected objects to the active object. This option is available only when multiple objects are selected.

•	To center of document [image] aligns the selected object to the center of the image window

•	Selected to document [image] aligns the selected object to the image window

5	Enable any of the horizontal and vertical alignment check boxes.

If you want to preview the alignment in the image window, click Preview.

 Tip

•	You can align the object to the nearest grid point by enabling the Align to grid check box.

Related Topics

Displaying and arranging objects

To hide or display an object

To distribute objects

To change the order of objects


To distribute objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Distribute tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	To extent of selection [image] evenly spaces the selected objects

•	To extent of document [image] evenly spaces the objects across the image

•	By object spacing [image] lets you specify the distance between objects in the X and Y boxes

5	Enable any of the horizontal and vertical distribution check boxes.

If you want to preview the distribution in the image window, click Preview.

 Note

•	To distribute objects, you must have more that one object selected.

Related Topics

Displaying and arranging objects

To hide or display an object

To align an object

To change the order of objects


To change the order of objects

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Order, and click one of the following:

•	To front [image] places the selected object in front of all objects in the image

•	To back [image] places the selected object behind all objects in the image

•	Forward one [image] places the selected object in front of the object it is currently behind

•	Back one [image] places the selected object behind the object it is currently in front of

•	Reverse order [image] reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. This command is available only when multiple objects are selected.

 Notes

•	The image background is always placed at the bottom of the stacking order and no object can be placed below it.

•	When objects are grouped, they are considered to be at the same level in the stacking order. Therefore, you cannot place an object between individual objects in a group.

 Tips

•	You can change the stacking order of an object by dragging its thumbnail to a new position in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

•	(Windows) You can also change the order of objects using shortcut keys. Move an object to the top of the stack by pressing Shift + Page Up; move it to the bottom of the stack, but above the background, by pressing Shift + Page Down; move it up one step in the stacking order by pressing Ctrl + Page Up; and move it down one step by pressing Ctrl + Page Down.

•	(Mac OS) You can also change the order of objects using shortcut keys. Move an object to the top of the stack by pressing Shift + Page Up; move it to the bottom of the stack, but above the background, by pressing Shift + Page Down; move it up one step in the stacking order by pressing Command + Page Up; and move it down one step by pressing Command + Page Down.

Related Topics

Displaying and arranging objects

To hide or display an object

To align an object

To distribute objects


Grouping and combining objects

You can group objects so they behave as one unit. Grouped objects can be moved, deleted, or transformed as a single entity. You can add objects to an existing group, and ungroup the objects when you want to edit them individually.

Another way to group objects is to create a clipping group. Clipping groups let you combine the characteristics of objects by placing the image elements from one or more objects into the shape of another; the characteristics of child objects are inserted into the shape of the parent object. For example, if the parent object is a picture of a flower, and the child object is a picture of the sky, the result will be a flower shape with the color and texture of the sky. An object is the parent to objects above it in the stacking order; a child object cannot be below the parent object. If you want to create a clipping group using the background image, you must first turn the background into an object. You can undo a clipping group at any time.

Combining objects lets you group them permanently. You can combine multiple objects into one object, or combine objects with the background. When you combine objects, you lose the ability to edit the objects independently. You can also decrease the file size of an image by combining objects.

Related Topics

To group objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To ungroup objects

To create a clipping group

To undo a clipping group

To combine objects


To group objects

1	In the image window, select the objects.

2	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Group.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To ungroup objects

To create a clipping group

To undo a clipping group

To combine objects


To add an object to a group of objects

1	In the image window, select an object in a group.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the object you want to add.

3	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Group.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To group objects

To ungroup objects

To create a clipping group

To undo a clipping group

To combine objects


To ungroup objects

1	In the image window, click an object in a group.

2	Click Object [image] Arrange [image] Ungroup.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To create a clipping group

To undo a clipping group

To combine objects


To create a clipping group

1	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the column to the left of the object thumbnail to make it a child object. A Paper clip icon displays.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

2	In the image window, select the child object and drag it over the parent object.

 Notes

•	Only areas of the child object that fall within the boundaries of the parent object are visible. Otherwise, only the object marquee of the child object is visible.

•	A child object must be above a parent object in the Objects Docker window/palette stacking order.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To ungroup objects

To undo a clipping group

To combine objects


To undo a clipping group

•	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the Paper clip icon next to each child object.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To ungroup objects

To create a clipping group

To combine objects


To combine objects

To combine
Multiple objects into one object	Select the objects, and click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine objects together.
One or more objects with the background	Select an object or objects, and click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine objects with background.
All objects with the background	Click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine all objects with background.
 Note

•	When objects are combined with the background, they become part of the background layer and can no longer be edited as individual objects.

 Tip

•	You can specify a merge mode and transparency level before you combine objects by modifying the settings in the Merge mode list box and Opacity box in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Grouping and combining objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group of objects

To ungroup objects

To create a clipping group

To undo a clipping group


Saving and closing

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can save your work as you create and edit an image and before you close it. You can also save images to many different file formats.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	saving images

•	saving images to different file formats

•	closing images


Saving images

You can save an image to preserve it. You can also save images automatically at regular intervals and save backup copies of the file.

Saving images

When you save an image, you can specify a file format, a filename, and a folder where you want to save the file. Images are automatically saved using the currently selected file format, name, and location. The default format is the native Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format. Saving to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format retains all image properties [image] objects, the most recently created mask, alpha channels, grids, guidelines, and color information [image] so you can edit them later.

You can also save an image using a different filename, or to another file format or location. For more information about saving to other file formats, see "Saving images to different file formats."

Auto-saving and backing up images

You can specify auto-save settings to save an image automatically at regular intervals as you work. You can choose to save an image temporarily at a particular stage in its development, or you can overwrite the last version of the image.

Specifying backup settings lets you create a copy of an image each time you save. A backup copy is stored in the folder you choose.

You can also create a checkpoint to save a snapshot of the current image temporarily, so that you can return the image to that state if necessary. For more information about checkpoints, see "To create or return to a checkpoint."

Related Topics

To save an image

To specify auto-save settings

To specify backup settings


To save an image

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Choose a file type from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

 Note

•	You can save a file to a non-native file format. For information, see "Saving images to different file formats."

 Tips

•	You can also save an image by clicking the Save button on the standard toolbar.

•	You can add notes to an image when you save it by typing text in the Notes box. You can view notes in the Notes box in the Open dialog box when you open an image, or in the Import dialog box when you import an image. Some file formats do not let you save annotations with an image.

Related Topics

Saving images

To specify auto-save settings

To specify backup settings


To specify auto-save settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Save.

3	Enable the Auto-save every check box, and type a value in the box beside it.

The value you type specifies the number of minutes between auto-saves.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Save to checkpoint [image] temporarily saves the image in its current state without overwriting the version that has been saved to disk

•	Save to file [image] overwrites the last version of the file that you saved to disk

If you want a message displayed at every auto-save, enable the Warn me before saving check box.

 Note

•	When you save the image or quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the checkpoint version of the image is lost.

Related Topics

Saving images

To save an image

To specify backup settings


To specify backup settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Save.

3	Enable the Make backup on save check box.

If you want to change the folder where backup copies are saved, enable the Back-up to check box, and click Browse to specify a folder.

Related Topics

Saving images

To save an image

To specify auto-save settings


Saving images to different file formats

You can save Corel PHOTO-PAINT images to a variety of file formats. The file format you choose depends on how you want to use the image in the future.

When you save an image to the native Corel PHOTO-PAINT file format, all image properties are saved with it, so you can reopen and edit the image later. However, when you save to another file format, you may lose some image properties; each file format has its own idiosyncrasies and appropriate use.

For example, if you want to work on an image in another image editing application, you can save it to the Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format. You retain many image properties, such as objects and masks, so you can continue to edit the image. If you want to share an image, the Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) or the Windows bitmap (BMP) file format are suitable because they are standard formats; images in these formats can be opened in most image viewers, image editing and desktop publishing applications.

For information about the image properties supported by file formats, consult the technical notes for each file format in "File formats."

When you save an image containing objects to a file format that does not support objects, you can continue working on the original file (which still contains the objects) in the image window. When you close the image, objects are merged and the image is saved to the selected file format. To preserve objects, as well as other image properties, you must save the image to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format.

For more information about saving images to the native Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format, see "Saving images." You can also export images to Web-compatible formats, such as the JPEG or GIF file formats. For more information, see "Exporting and optimizing images for the Web."

Related Topics

To save an image to a different format


To save an image to a different format

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose a file format from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a filename in the Filename list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

The file extension for the file format you choose is appended to the filename automatically, but can be removed.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Selected only [image] saves only the editable areas defined in your image, when there are no active and selected objects. If there are no editable areas, this option saves only the active and selected objects.

•	Web_safe_filenames [image] replaces the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames.

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] suppresses dialog boxes that provide other options when exporting

6	Click Export.

You can also	Do the following
Compress a file on export	Choose a compression type from the Type list box.
Save a file in a new folder	Click New, type a name in the Name of new folder box, and click Create.
Specify information about a file	Type any comments you want in the Notes box.
 Note

•	If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats".

Related Topics

Saving images to different file formats


Closing images

You can close an image or all images at any time. If you close images without saving them, your work is lost.

Related Topics

To close an image


To close an image

To close	Do the following
An image	Click File [image] Close.
All images	Click Window [image] Close all.
Related Topics

Closing images


Working with text

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can add text to images and create interesting text effects. You can also move, edit, and format text. Fitting text to a path lets you place text along an uneven line. If you are using an Asian operating system, you can take advantage of the Asian text formatting capabilities available with Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	adding and editing text

•	formatting text

•	fitting text to a path

•	working with Asian text


Adding and editing text

You can add text to enhance images. As you add text, you can specify its font, size, and alignment, as well as the character spacing and line spacing. Text is created as an object by default; therefore, you can move, size, scale, rotate, flip, skew, distort, and apply perspective as you would to an object; however, you will lose distortion or perspective effects if you add, remove, or edit text characters. For more information about working with objects, see "Working with objects." Text can also be rendered as an editable area of a mask. For more information about creating editable areas, see "Masking."

After you add text, you can edit the text by changing its color, painting it, or filling it with patterns and textures.

Related Topics

To add text

To change the color of text

To paint text

To fill text


To add text

1	Click the Text tool.

2	Choose a font from the Font name list box on the property bar.

3	Choose a font size from the Font size list box on the property bar.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Character spacing

•	Line spacing

5	Open the Alignment picker, and click a setting.

6	Click in the image window, and type the text.

 Tip

•	You render the text as an editable area by selecting the text with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply effects.

Related Topics

Adding and editing text

To change the color of text

To paint text

To fill text


To change the color of text

1	Click the Text tool.

2	Point to the text until the pointer becomes a cursor.

3	Select the text.

4	In the color control area, double-click the Foreground color swatch, and choose a color.

Related Topics

Adding and editing text

To add text

To paint text

To fill text


To paint text

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select the text.

3	Enable the Lock object transparency button in the Objects Docker window/palette.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

4	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Paint tool.

5	Specify any tool settings on the property bar.

6	In the color control area, double-click the Foreground color swatch, and choose a color.

7	Drag across the text.

 Note

•	Ensure text is correct before painting, as you will lose paint effects if you add, remove, or edit text characters.

Related Topics

Adding and editing text

To add text

To change the color of text

To fill text


To fill text

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select the text.

3	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

4	Specify any tool settings on the property bar.

5	Click each text character that you want to fill.

You must click directly in a character. If you don't, the fill is applied to the entire image. You can undo an unwanted fill by clicking Edit [image] Undo flood fill.

 Note

•	Ensure text is correct before filling, as you will lose fill effects if you add, remove, or edit text characters.

 Tips

•	You can quickly zoom into a text character by opening the Zoom flyout, clicking the Zoom tool, and dragging in the image to enclose the text character.

•	You can render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

Related Topics

Adding and editing text

To add text

To change the color of text

To paint text


Formatting text

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you format text to enhance its appearance. For example, you can change the font attributes, such as style and size, and you can underline, strike through, and overline text. You can also add superscript or subscript text, which is useful if an image requires footnotes or mathematical symbols.

Kerning text changes the space between characters. You can also shift text characters vertically and horizontally.

Related Topics

To change font attributes

To underline, strike through, and overline text

To add superscript or subscript text

To kern text

To shift characters


To change font attributes

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, modify any font attributes.

 Tip

•	You can also change the font style of selected text by clicking the Bold button or the Italic button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Formatting text

To underline, strike through, and overline text

To add superscript or subscript text

To kern text

To shift characters


To underline, strike through, and overline text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, choose a line style from one of the following list boxes:

•	Underline [image] underlines the text

•	Strikethru [image] adds a line through the text

•	Overline [image] adds a line above the text

You can also
Customize the thickness of a line	Click the Edit line button beside a line style list box, and type a value in the Thickness box.
Customize the distance between text and line	Click the Edit line button beside a line style list box, and type a value in the Baseline shift box.
 Tip

•	You can add a single underline to selected text by clicking the Underline button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Formatting text

To change font attributes

To add superscript or subscript text

To kern text

To shift characters


To add superscript or subscript text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, from the Position list box, choose one of the following:

•	Superscript

•	Subscript

Related Topics

Formatting text

To change font attributes

To underline, strike through, and overline text

To kern text

To shift characters


To kern text

1	Click the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, type a value in the Range kerning box.

Related Topics

Formatting text

To change font attributes

To underline, strike through, and overline text

To add superscript or subscript text

To shift characters


To shift characters

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] shifts text characters to the left or right

•	Vertical [image] shifts text characters up or down

 Note

•	Positive horizontal values move the characters to the right; negative horizontal values move them to the left. Positive vertical values move the characters up; negative vertical values move them down.

Related Topics

Formatting text

To change font attributes

To underline, strike through, and overline text

To add superscript or subscript text

To kern text


Fitting text to a path

After you create a path, you can fit text to it to place text along a line or shape. After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text's position relative to that path. For example, you can place text on the inside or outside of the path, or you can adjust the distance between text and a path.

You can render text as an object to separate it from a path; the text retains the shape of the path to which it was fitted. You can also straighten text to separate it from the path without retaining the path shape. For more information about creating paths, see "Creating paths."

Related Topics

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To render text as an object

To straighten text


To fit text to a path

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Object [image] Text [image] Fit text to path.

4	Click a path at the point where you want the text to begin.

 Tip

•	You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool, moving the pointer over a path, and clicking where you want the text to begin. As you move the pointer over the path, the pointer changes. This change indicates that you can now click and type.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To render text as an object

To straighten text


To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	On the property bar, choose a setting from any of the following list boxes:

•	Text orientation [image] lets you specify the orientation of text

•	Vertical placement [image] lets you specify the vertical position of text

•	Text placement [image] lets you specify the placement of text

•	Distance from path [image] lets you specify the distance between the text and the path

•	Horizontal offset [image] lets you specify the horizontal position of text

If you want to move text to the opposite side of the path, click the Place on other side button on the property bar.

 Tips

•	You can adjust the orientation of the text by selecting the text using the Object pick tool, and dragging the selections handles.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To fit text to a path

To render text as an object

To straighten text


To render text as an object

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Object [image] Text [image] Render as object.

 Tip

•	You can render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area which you can modify.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To straighten text


To straighten text

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Object [image] Text [image] Straighten text.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To render text as an object


Working with Asian text

You can type Asian text if you are using an operating system that has Asian language support, or if you have an Input Method Editor (IME). You can change the font properties of Asian text. You can also change text orientation if you are using an Asian operating system.

Related Topics

To change the font properties of Asian text

To change the orientation of Asian text


To change the font properties of Asian text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click Object [image] Text [image] Format text.

3	In the Format text dialog box, specify the font attributes.

4	Choose Asian from the Script list box.

Related Topics

Working with Asian text

To change the orientation of Asian text


To change the orientation of Asian text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Vertical text orientation [image] changes the orientation of selected text to vertical

•	Horizontal text orientation [image] changes the orientation of selected text to horizontal

 Notes

•	A text object can have only one orientation. Changing the orientation of text as you type changes the orientation for the entire text object.

•	The default orientation for Asian text is horizontal.

Related Topics

Working with Asian text

To change the font properties of Asian text


Using the guidelines, grid, and rulers

The guidelines, grid, and rulers let you position and size images, objects, and editable areas.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	setting up guidelines

•	setting up the grid

•	setting up the rulers


Setting up guidelines

Guidelines are vertical or horizontal lines that you can add anywhere in the image window to help you measure, align, and position image components. The guidelines use the same units of measure as the rulers. When you save an image in the Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 application, the guidelines are saved too.

You can display or hide the guidelines. You can also add, remove, move, and lock guidelines in the image window.

You can have objects and editable areas snap to guidelines, so that when you move an object or editable area to a guideline, the object or editable area automatically aligns to that guideline. You can set the sensitivity of this feature so that the object or editable area snaps when you move within a specific number of pixels of a guideline.

You can change the color of the guidelines to make them stand out against the image background. By default, when you select a guideline, it turns red. When you deselect a guideline, it turns blue.

Related Topics

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To display or hide the guidelines

•	Click View [image] Guidelines.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the guidelines are displayed.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To add a guideline

1	Click View [image] Setup [image] Guidelines.

2	In the Guidelines list of categories, click one of the following:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

3	Choose a unit of measure from the list box.

4	Type a value that corresponds to a location in the image window.

5	Click Add.

 Tip

•	You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler to the image window.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To remove a guideline

1	Click View [image] Setup [image] Guidelines.

2	In the list of categories, click one of the following:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

3	Choose a guideline from the list.

4	Click Delete.

 Tips

•	You can also remove all horizontal or vertical guidelines in the list by clicking Clear.

•	You can also remove individual guidelines by dragging them off the image window.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To move a guideline

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Object pick tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Object pick tool.

2	Drag a guideline to a new position in the image window.

 Tip

•	You can also move a guideline by nudging it.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To lock or unlock the guidelines

•	Click View [image] Lock guidelines.

A check mark displays beside the menu command to indicate the guideline is locked.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

•	Click View [image] Snap to [image] Guidelines.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Type a value in the Guideline snap tolerance (pixels) box.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To change the color of the guidelines


To change the color of the guidelines

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Open the Guideline color picker, and click a color.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a guideline

To remove a guideline

To move a guideline

To lock or unlock the guidelines

To have objects and editable areas snap to the guidelines

To set the snap sensitivity of the guidelines


Setting up the grid

The grid is a series of intersecting lines that are superimposed on an image to help you align and position objects accurately. You can display or hide the grid at any time.

You can have objects and editable areas align automatically with the gridlines. You can set up the grid by specifying values for the frequency, which is the number of gridlines per unit of horizontal and vertical distance, or the spacing, which is the distance between the grid lines. The color and style of the grid can also be changed.

For more precise pixel editing at maximum zoom level, you can display a grid around each pixel.

Related Topics

To display or hide the grid

To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

To change the color and style of the grid

To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level


To display or hide the grid

•	Click View [image] Grid.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the grid is displayed.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

To change the color and style of the grid

To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level


To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

•	Click View [image] Snap to [image] Grid.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

To change the color and style of the grid

To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level


To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

1	Click View [image] Setup [image] Grid & ruler.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Frequency

•	Spacing

3	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

To change the color and style of the grid

To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level


To change the color and style of the grid

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Open the Grid color picker, and click a color.

4	Click one of the following Grid style buttons:

•	Solid line

•	Dashed line

•	Dots

 Tip

•	You can also create a custom grid color by clicking Other in the Grid color picker.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level


To display a pixel grid at the maximum zoom level

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	Enable the Show pixel grid at maximum zoom check box.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To have objects and editable areas snap to the grid

To set the frequency and spacing of the gridlines

To change the color and style of the grid


Setting up the rulers

The on-screen rulers provide a visual reference to help you size and position images, objects, and editable areas. You can display or hide the rulers at any time. As you move the pointer in the image window, marks on the rulers indicate its position. You can also customize the rulers' zero mark position and specify a unit of measure for the current document.

You can move the rulers anywhere in the image window; however, by default they display along the top and left sides of the image window. Calibrating the rulers ensures the distances on the screen match real-world distances.

Related Topics

To display or hide the rulers

To customize the rulers

To move a ruler

To calibrate the rulers


To display or hide the rulers

•	Click View [image] Rulers.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the rulers are displayed.

Related Topics

Setting up the rulers

To customize the rulers

To move a ruler

To calibrate the rulers


To customize the rulers

1	Do one of the following:

•	Click Tools [image] Options.

•	Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Document list of categories, click Ruler.

3	In the Units area, choose a unit of measure from the following list boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

If you want to use the same unit of measure for both the horizontal and vertical rulers, enable the Same units for horizontal and vertical rulers check box.

4	In the Origin area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

The origin value indicates the distance, in the units of measure you specify, between the zero mark of the ruler and the point of origin of the ruler. For example, an origin value of 4 for the horizontal ruler moves the zero mark of that ruler four units away from the origin [image] the point where the ruler begins.

5	Type a value in the Tick divisions box.

If you want to display fractions on the rulers, enable the Show fractions check box.

Related Topics

Setting up the rulers

To display or hide the rulers

To move a ruler

To calibrate the rulers


To move a ruler

•	Hold down Shift, and drag a ruler to a new position.

You can also
Return the rulers to their original positions	Hold down Shift, and double-click a ruler.
Move both rulers at the same time	Hold down Shift, and drag the intersection point of the two rulers.
Related Topics

Setting up the rulers

To display or hide the rulers

To customize the rulers

To calibrate the rulers


To calibrate the rulers

1	Do one of the following:

•	Click Tools [image] Options.

•	Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Document list of categories, click Ruler.

3	Click Calibrate rulers.

4	Hold a clear plastic ruler next to the horizontal and vertical rulers displayed on your screen.

5	Type values in the following boxes so that one inch on each ruler corresponds exactly to one inch on the plastic ruler:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

Related Topics

Setting up the rulers

To display or hide the rulers

To customize the rulers

To move a ruler


Filling images

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can fill objects, editable areas, and images with colors, patterns, and textures. You can choose from a wide variety of fills and create your own fills.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	applying uniform fills

•	applying fountain fills

•	applying bitmap fills

•	applying texture fills

•	applying gradient fills

•	applying a transparency pattern to fills


Applying uniform fills

Uniform fills are the simplest fill type. They are solid colors that you can apply to images.

Related Topics

To apply a uniform fill


To apply a uniform fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before applying the fill.

2	Click the Uniform fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	 In the Uniform fill dialog box, choose a color model from the Model list box.

5	Click a color in the visual selection area.

6	Click OK.

7	Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

You can also
Specify a value for the opacity of the fill	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar. Higher values increase the transparency.
Specify how the fill spreads based on the color similarity of adjacent pixels	Type a value in the Tolerance box on the property bar. A value of 100 fills the entire object or area.
Change the way colors are combined	Choose a merge mode from the Mode list box on the extended property bar.
 Notes

•	You can choose the colors for a uniform fill from an image, or by accessing color models, mixers, or fixed or custom palettes. For information about choosing colors, see "Working with color."

•	Merge modes control the way the foreground or fill color blends with the base color of the image. You can change the merge mode setting from the default (Normal) for specific blending purposes. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

 Tips

•	To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

•	You can also select a fill color by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) a color on the color palette.

Related Topics

Applying uniform fills


Applying fountain fills

Fountain fills gradually change from one color to the next, along a linear, radial, conical, square, or rectangular path. You can use fountain fills to create the illusion of depth. You can choose a preset fill, or you can create a two-color or a custom fountain fill.

To create a custom fountain fill, you can change the colors, adjust the center point, or change the angle of a fill. You can also adjust the size of the blended area between the solid colors. When you finish creating a fountain fill, you can save it for later use as a preset.

Related Topics

To apply a preset fountain fill

To create a two-color fountain fill

To create a custom fountain fill


To apply a preset fountain fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before applying the fill.

2	Click the Fountain fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a preset fountain fill from the Presets list box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

You can also
Specify a value for the opacity of the fill	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar. Higher values increase the transparency.
Specify how the fill spreads based on the color similarity of adjacent pixels	Type a value in the Tolerance box on the property bar. A value of 100 fills the entire object or area.
Change the way colors are combined	Choose a merge mode from the Mode list box on the extended property bar.
 Note

•	Merge modes control the way the foreground or fill color blends with the base color of the image. You can change the merge mode setting from the default (Normal) for specific blending purposes. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

 Tip

•	To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To create a two-color fountain fill

To create a custom fountain fill


To create a two-color fountain fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

2	Click the Fountain fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a fountain fill from the Presets list box.

5	Choose a fountain fill type from the Type list box.

6	Enable the Two color option in the Color blend area.

7	Open the following color pickers, and click a color:

•	From [image] determines the start color for the progression

•	To [image] determines the end color for the progression

8	Move the Mid-point slider to set the midpoint between the two colors.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Direct color path [image] blends the colors along a straight line, beginning at the start color and continuing across the color wheel to the end color

•	Counterclockwise color path [image] blends the colors along a counterclockwise path around the color wheel

•	Clockwise color path [image] blends the colors along a clockwise path around the color wheel

You can also
Specify the center offset of a fill	Type a value in the Horizontal box, the Vertical box, or both. Not available for linear fills.
Specify the angle of a linear or conical fill	Type a value in the Angle box.
Specify the number of transition colors	Type a value in the Steps box. Higher numbers create a smoother transition.
Specify how long the start and end colors remain solid before they start blending	Type a value in the Edge pad box. Not available for conical fills.
Save a fill as a preset	Type a name in the Presets list box, and click Add fill.
Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To create a custom fountain fill


To create a custom fountain fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

2	Click the Fountain fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a fountain fill from the Presets list box.

5	Choose a fountain fill type from the Type list box.

6	Enable the Custom option in the Color blend area.

7	Double-click the area above the Color band to add a color marker, and click a color on the color palette.

If you want to change the location of a color marker, drag it to a new position.

You can also
Specify the number of transition colors	Type a value in the Steps box. Higher numbers create a smoother transition.
Specify the center offset of a fill	Type a value in the Horizontal box, the Vertical box, or both.
Specify the angle of a linear or conical fill	Type a value in the Angle box.
Adjust the size of the blended area between solid colors	Type a value in the Edge pad box. Not available for conical fills.
Save the fill as a preset	Type a name in the Presets list box, and click Add fill.
 Note

•	Custom fountain fills can contain up to 99 colors.

 Tips

•	You can delete a color marker by double-clicking it.

•	You can change the color of a color marker by clicking the color marker and clicking a color on the color palette.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To create a two-color fountain fill


Applying bitmap fills

Bitmap fills are bitmaps that you can use to fill an object or image. You can fill an area with a single bitmap. You can also tile, or repeat, a smaller bitmap across an area to create a seamless pattern.

You can fill images with preset bitmap fills, or you can create custom bitmap fills from saved images or editable areas.

It is best to use less complex bitmaps for fills, because complex bitmaps are memory-intensive and slow to display. The complexity of a bitmap is determined by its size, resolution, and bit depth.

Related Topics

To apply a bitmap fill

To tile a bitmap fill

To create a bitmap fill from an editable area

To import a bitmap fill


To apply a bitmap fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before applying the fill.

2	Click the Bitmap fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Bitmap fill dialog box, open the Bitmap fill picker, and click a fill.

5	Specify the attributes you want.

6	Click OK.

7	Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

You can also
Specify a value for the opacity of the fill	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar. Higher values increase the transparency.
Specify how the fill spreads based on the color similarity of adjacent pixels	Type a value in the Tolerance box on the property bar. A value of 100 fills the entire object or area.
Change the way colors are combined	Choose a merge mode from the Mode list box on the property bar.
 Note

•	Merge modes control the way the foreground or fill color blends with the base color of the image. You can change the merge mode setting from the default (Normal) for specific blending purposes. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

 Tips

•	To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

•	You can use this procedure to apply a bitmap fill to a selected object.

Related Topics

Applying bitmap fills

To tile a bitmap fill

To create a bitmap fill from an editable area

To import a bitmap fill


To tile a bitmap fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

2	Click the Bitmap fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Bitmap fill dialog box, open the Bitmap fill picker, and click a fill.

5	In the Size area, disable the Use original size and Scale bitmap to fit check boxes.

6	Type values in the Width and Height boxes to specify the size of bitmap tiles.

You can also
Fill an image with the default tile size	In the Size area, enable the Use original size check box.
Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the bitmap	Enable the Maintain aspect check box.
Specify the horizontal and vertical offset of the first tile	In the Origin area, type values in the x and y boxes. Offset is determined by the top left corner of the fill area.
Specify the angle of tile rotation and skew	In the Transform area, type values in the Rotate and Skew boxes.
Specify the center offset of rows and columns of tiles	In the Row/column offset area, enable the Row or Column option, and type a value in the % of tile slide box.
 Note

•	To fill an image with a single, large bitmap, enable the Scale bitmap to fit check box in the Size area.

Related Topics

Applying bitmap fills

To apply a bitmap fill

To create a bitmap fill from an editable area

To import a bitmap fill


To create a bitmap fill from an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Edit [image] Create fill from selection.

3	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

4	Type a filename in the File name box.

 Notes

•	For more information about defining editable areas, see "Defining editable areas."

•	The bitmap fill you create is added to the Bitmap fill picker.

Related Topics

Applying bitmap fills

To apply a bitmap fill

To tile a bitmap fill

To import a bitmap fill


To import a bitmap fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

2	Click the Bitmap fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Bitmap fill dialog box, click the Load button.

5	In the Load bitmap fill dialog box, choose the folder, disk, or CD where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

 Note

•	Thumbnail images of the bitmap files you import are added to the Bitmap fill picker.

Related Topics

Applying bitmap fills

To apply a bitmap fill

To tile a bitmap fill

To create a bitmap fill from an editable area


Applying texture fills

Texture fills are three-dimensional patterns. You can use preset texture fills, such as water, minerals, and clouds, or you can edit a preset to create a custom texture fill. You cannot import files to use as texture fills.

When you edit a texture fill, you can modify parameters, such as the softness, density, brightness, and colors. Parameters vary for each texture. Once you have edited a texture fill, you can save it as a custom texture fill.

Related Topics

To apply a texture fill


To apply a texture fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill tool.

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before applying the fill.

2	Click the Texture fill button on the property bar.

3	Click the Edit fill button on the property bar.

4	In the Texture fill dialog box, choose a texture library from the Texture library list box.

5	Choose a texture from the Texture list.

6	Click OK.

7	Click where you want to apply the fill in the image.

You can also
Edit texture fill preset	In the Style name area of the Texture fill dialog box, type values in the texture parameter boxes.
Preview random changes in the appearance of a selected texture	Click Preview in the Texture fill dialog box. Each time the button is clicked, random changes are made to unlocked parameters, and the modified texture displays in the Preview window.
Save fill settings	Click the Add fill button, and type a name in the Texture name box in the Save texture as dialog box. Choose a library from the Library name list box.
Specify a value for the opacity of the fill	Type a value in the Transparency box on the extended property bar Higher values increase the transparency.
Specify how the fill spreads based on the color similarity of adjacent pixels	Type a value in the Tolerance box on the property bar. A value of 100 fills the entire object or area.
Change the way colors are combined	Choose a merge mode from the Mode list box on the property bar.
 Notes

•	Texture fills are scaled to the image or image area to which you apply them.

•	You cannot tile texture fills.

 Tip

•	To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

Related Topics

Applying texture fills


Applying gradient fills

Gradient fills let you create a gradual blend between colors in an area. They are similar to fountain fills; but they can be adjusted directly in the image window. Gradient fills can be flat, linear, elliptical, radial, rectangular, square, or conical. They can also be made up of bitmaps or texture patterns.

When you apply a gradient fill to an image, a gradient arrow, which marks the transition from one color to another, displays in the image window. Each color in the gradient fill is represented by a square node on the gradient arrow. You can change and add colors or adjust the transparency of individual colors. You can also adjust the size of the gradient fill.

Related Topics

To apply a gradient fill


To apply a gradient fill

1	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

If you want to fill an object, you must select it using the Object pick tool before applying the fill.

2	Choose a gradient type from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

3	Choose Custom from the Interactive fill style list box on the property bar.

4	Drag in the image window to set the gradient arrow.

5 	Drag a color swatch from the color palette to a color node on the gradient arrow. A black arrow displays to indicate that the color swatch is in position.

If a color palette is not displayed, click Window [image] Color palettes, and choose a color palette.

You can also
Set the halfway point for the color transition	Drag the slider on the gradient arrow.
Change a color	Drag a color swatch from the color palette to a color node on the gradient arrow.
Add a color	Drag a color swatch from the color palette to any area along the gradient arrow.
Delete a color	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a color node, and click Delete.
Set the transparency of a color	Click a color node, and move the Node transparency slider on the property bar. Higher values increase transparency.
Change the size of the gradient fill	Drag the End point node, located next to the arrow point, toward the Origin node to reduce the size of the fill. Drag the End point away from the Origin node to enlarge the fill.
 Notes

•	If you are adding a gradient fill to an object, you must click the Lock object transparency button in the Objects Docker window/palette before you select and apply the fill. When the Lock object transparency button is enabled, the object's shape and transparency are protected.

•	When you choose a flat, bitmap or texture fill type from the Fill type list box, color nodes do not display in the image window; the current foreground color determines the color of the flat fill, and the last settings for the bitmap fill or texture fill are applied.

 Tip

•	To apply a fill to a text object, you can first render the text as an editable area by selecting the text object with the Text tool and clicking the Create text mask button on the extended property bar. This produces a text-shaped editable area to which you can apply fills.

Related Topics

Applying gradient fills


Applying a transparency pattern to fills

You can control the transparency level, and the pattern of the transparency, when you apply a fill to an entire image. The fill can be applied to any object layer to create foreground or background effects.

Related Topics

To apply a transparency pattern to a fill


To apply a transparency pattern to a fill

1	Click Edit [image] Fill.

2	In the Edit fill & transparency dialog box, click the Fill color tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Foreground color

•	Background color

•	Current fill

4	Click a Fill type button.

5	Click Edit, and modify any settings in the corresponding dialog box.

6	Click the Transparency tab.

7	Choose a pattern type from the Type list box.

8	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Start transparency

•	End transparency

9	Drag in the display window at the top of the dialog box to place the adjustment nodes and preview the fill.

Related Topics

Applying a transparency pattern to fills


Publishing to PDF

PDF is a file format designed to preserve the fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. You can also save multiple images to a single PDF file to create a compact photo album to send to others.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	saving documents as PDF files

•	including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files

•	reducing PDF file size

•	Specifying the encoding format for PDF files

•	outputting objects in PDF files

•	preparing PDF files for a service bureau

•	viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files

•	optimizing PDF files


Saving documents as PDF files

You can save a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on their computers. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the World Wide Web.

When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from five preset PDF styles, which apply settings that are specific to that particular PDF style. For example, with the PDF for the Web style, the resolution of the images in the PDF file will be optimized for the World Wide Web. You can also create a new PDF style or edit any preset style.

Related Topics

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To save a document as a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	From the PDF style list box, choose one of the following:

•	PDF for document distribution [image] enables JPEG bitmap image compression, and is best used for general document delivery. These documents can include bookmarks and hyperlinks and can be printed on a laser or desktop printer.

•	PDF for prepress [image] enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. Consult the service bureau for their preferred settings.

•	PDF for the Web [image] enables JPEG bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, compresses text, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails for publishing the document to the World Wide Web.

•	PDF for editing [image] enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that you can edit the file at a later date.

•	PDF/X-1 [image] enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options. This style contains the basic settings for prepress and is the standard format used for ad distribution.

3	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Note

•	The embedded fonts, compressed text, and preserved spot color options are available only in CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the General tab.

4	Enable the Documents option.

5	Enable the check box for each document you want to save.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To create a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Click the Add PDF style button.

6	Type a name for the style in the Save PDF style as list box.

 Tip

•	If you want to delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF style button.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To edit a PDF style


To edit a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Click the Add PDF style button.

6	Choose a style from the Save PDF style as list box.

 Note

•	If you save changes you make to preset style settings, the original settings will be overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset style settings with a new name.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style


Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files

You can include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF document. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to link to specific areas in a PDF file. You can specify whether bookmarks or thumbnails are displayed when the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.

Related Topics

To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file


To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Include hyperlinks

•	Generate bookmarks

•	Generate thumbnails

If you want to display bookmarks or thumbnails on startup, enable the Bookmarks or Thumbnails button in the On start, display area.

Related Topics

Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files


Reducing PDF file size

You can compress bitmap images to reduce the size of a PDF file. Bitmap image compression options include JPEG, LZW, or ZIP. Bitmap images using JPEG compression have a changeable quality scale ranging from 2 (high) to 255 (low). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.

Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images also reduces file size.

Related Topics

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file


To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box:

•	None

•	LZW

•	JPEG

•	ZIP

 Tip

•	If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by moving the Quality factor slider.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file


To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes, and type a value in the corresponding box:

•	Color

•	Grayscale

•	Monochrome

 Note

•	Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images is effective only when the resolution of the bitmap image is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file


Specifying the encoding format for PDF files

ASCII and binary are encoding formats. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose between exporting ASCII or binary files. ASCII creates files that are fully portable to all platforms. Binary creates smaller files that are less portable, since some platforms cannot handle the file format.

Related Topics

To specify an encoding format for a PDF file


To specify an encoding format for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	ASCII 85

•	Binary

Related Topics

Specifying the encoding format for PDF files


Outputting objects in PDF files

You can output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale. If you choose to output objects as CMYK, you can apply a generic ICC profile to define the CMYK color space of your printer. For more information on ICC color profiles, see "Working with color profiles."

Related Topics

To output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale


To output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Output all objects as list box:

•	RGB

•	CMYK

•	Grayscale

•	Native

If you want to use ICC profiles to define the CMYK color space of your printer, enable the Apply ICC profile check box and enable a printer profile from the list.

 Note

•	The ICC color profile option is only available for CMYK.

Related Topics

Outputting objects in PDF files


Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

A job ticket is useful when you want to send a PDF file to a service bureau, where the file is converted to film or plates. You can include specifications for publishing PDF files, including information about the customer, delivery, and the finishing of a job.

Generating a job ticket lets you embed a job ticket file or save an external file. When you embed a job ticket, you create a PDF file that contains a Portable Job Ticket object. When you create an external file, you create two separate files; a PDF file and a JTF file, which can be opened by a Job Ticket Editor. Consult the service bureau or print shop before sending a JTF file.

Printer's marks provide information to the service bureau about how the work should be printed. You can specify which printer's marks to include on the page. The available printer's marks are as follows:

•	Crop marks [image] represent the size of the paper and appear at the corners of the page. You can add crop marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you output multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns) you can add the crop marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. A bleed determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

•	Registration marks [image] are required to line up the film for proofing the printing plates on a color press. Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation.

•	Densitometer scale [image] is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

•	File information [image] can be printed, including the color profile; halftone settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name.

Related Topics

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Include job ticket check box.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	External file [image] lets you create two separate files, a PDF file and a JTF file

•	Embedded [image] lets you create a PDF file that contains a portable job ticket object

5	Click Settings.

6	In the Job ticket settings dialog box, type job specifications on any of the following pages:

•	Customer info

•	Delivery

•	Finishing

 Tip

•	If you enable the External option, you can save the JTF file by clicking Browse and typing a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To include printer's marks in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Prepress tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Crop marks

•	File information

•	Registration marks

•	Densitometer scales

If you want to include a bleed, enable the Include bleed check box, and type a bleed amount in the corresponding box.

 Notes

•	The bleed option is only available for Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, and PDF/X-1. A third party plug-in is required to view printer's marks in Adobe Acrobat.

•	Usually, a bleed amount of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file


Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files

Before printing your work, you can use Preflight to find potential problems. Preflight checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. By default, Preflight checks for many PDF issues, but you can disable the issues that you do not want Preflight to check.

Related Topics

To view the Preflight summary for a PDF file


To view the Preflight summary for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Preflight tab.

If there are issues that you don't want Preflight to check, click the Settings button, double-click Publishing to PDF, and disable the check boxes that correspond to the issues that you want Preflight to overlook.

 Tip

•	You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

Related Topics

Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files


Optimizing PDF files

You optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. You can select a compatibility depending upon what kind of viewer the recipients have. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can select one of four compatibilities: Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, or PDF/X-1. Different compatibilities have different options; for example, the bleed option is only available for Acrobat 4.0 and PDF/X-1.

Related Topics

To select a compatibility


To select a compatibility

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the General tab.

4	From the Compatibility list box, choose one of the following:

•	Acrobat 3.0

•	Acrobat 4.0

•	Acrobat 5.0

•	PDF/X-1

Related Topics

Optimizing PDF files


Printing

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides extensive options for printing your work.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	printing your work

•	laying out print jobs

•	previewing print jobs

•	applying print styles

•	fine-tuning print jobs

•	printing colors accurately

•	printing to a PostScript printer


Printing your work

In the Corel PHOTO-PAINT application, you can print one or more copies of the same image. You can specify whether to print the current image or specific images.

Before printing an image, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and device options.

Related Topics

To set printer properties

To print your work


To set printer properties

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click Properties (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS).

4	Set any properties in the dialog box.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To print your work


To print your work

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a value in the Number of copies box.

If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] prints the active drawing

•	Current page [image] prints the active page

•	Pages [image] prints the pages that you specify

•	Documents [image] prints the documents that you specify

 Note

•	The Collate check box is only available for documents with more than one page.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To set printer properties


Laying out print jobs

You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper.

If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation automatically.

Related Topics

To specify the size and position of a print job

To tile a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To specify the size and position of a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	As in document [image] maintains the image size, as it is in the document.

•	Fit to page [image] sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page

•	Reposition images to [image] lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position from the list box

 Note

•	Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and scale in the corresponding boxes.

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To tile a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To tile a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Tile overlap [image] lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles

•	% of page width [image] lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles will occupy

 Tip

•	Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks.

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To specify the size and position of a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To change the page orientation prompt

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list.

4	Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

•	Off [image] always match orientation

•	On [image] ask if orientations differ

•	Off [image] don't change orientation

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To specify the size and position of a print job

To tile a print job


Previewing print jobs

You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the individual color separations will appear when printed. You can also increase the speed of a print preview by hiding the graphics.

Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.

Related Topics

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To preview a print job

•	Click File [image] Print preview.

 Tip

•	You can quickly preview a print job in the Print dialog box by clicking File [image] Print, and clicking one of the following:

•	(Windows) Mini preview button

•	(Mac OS) Mini preview button

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To magnify the preview page

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

3	Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box.

 Tips

•	You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level.

•	You can also zoom in on a portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To preview color separations

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button.

 Tips

•	You can preview the composite by clicking View [image] Preview separations [image] Composite.

•	You can view individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the application window.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To hide or display graphics

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click View [image] Show image.

A check mark beside the menu command name indicates that graphics are displayed.

 Note

•	When the Show image menu command is disabled, the print job is represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size the job.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To view a summary of issues for a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

If you don't want Preflight to check for certain issues, click Settings, double-click Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you want overlooked.

 Tip

•	You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics


Applying print styles

A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and keep document-specific styles in the same directory as the document file.

You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or edit a print style and save the changes. You can also delete print styles.

Related Topics

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To choose a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose one of the following from the Print Style list box:

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT defaults

•	Browse

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To create a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To create a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Set any printing options.

4	Click Save as.

5	Choose the folder where you want to save the print style.

6	Type a name for the style in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Tips

•	(Windows) When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings to include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you have already selected. You can also specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box.

•	You can also save a print style by clicking File [image] Print preview, and clicking the Save print style as button..

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To edit a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Choose a print style from the Print style list box.

3	Modify any of the printing options.

4	Click Save as.

5	Choose the folder where the print style is stored.

6	Click the filename.

 Note

•	You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes before canceling; otherwise, you'll lose all of the modified settings.

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To delete a print style


To delete a print style

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Select a print style.

3	Click the Delete print style button.

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To edit a print style


Fine-tuning print jobs

When printing to a black-and-white printing device, you can specify to print color print jobs as grayscale.

To reduce file size, you can downsample images. Because images are made up of pixels, when you downsample an image, the number of pixels per line decreases, which decreases the file size.

Related Topics

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in grayscale

To downsample images


To specify driver compatibility settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Printing, and click Driver compatibility.

3	Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box.

4	Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the settings you want to specify.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in grayscale

To downsample images


To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	From the Option list, choose one of the following :

•	Bitmap output threshold (K)

•	Bitmap chunk overlap pixels

4	Choose a value from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify driver compatibility settings

To print color print jobs in grayscale

To downsample images


To print color print jobs in grayscale

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the All colors as grayscale option in the Proofing options area.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To downsample images


To downsample images

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Downsample to check box, and type a value in the corresponding box.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in grayscale


Printing colors accurately

To reproduce colors accurately, you can apply an International Color Consortium (ICC) color profile.

Using color management also helps you ensure accurate color reproduction. You can output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. For information on selecting printing device color profiles, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

Related Topics

To apply an ICC color profile


To apply an ICC color profile

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Apply ICC profile check box.

 Note

•	Applying an ICC color profile on the Misc page will use the settings that you specified for separations printer profiles in the Color management dialog box, when printing separations, and it will use the composite printer profiles when printing composites. For information about applying an ICC color profile in the Color management dialog box, see "To choose a color profile."

Related Topics

Printing colors accurately


Printing to a PostScript printer

PostScript is a page description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document. For improved compatibility you can choose a device independent PostScript device. You can also choose a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PostScript Printer Description file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer and is available from your printer manufacturer.

You can print to a PostScript printing device. To ensure that a print job prints properly on a PostScript Level 1 device, you can test for potential issues such as complex graphics and banding in fountain fills. To ensure that your print jobs print properly, you can reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness. Curve flatness determines how smooth a curve appears when printed.

A print job that contains too many fonts may not print properly, and a print job that contains too many spot colors increases file size. You can set the PostScript options to warn you when a print job contains more than a set number of fonts or spot colors. You can specify the maximum number of bitmap fonts that a print job can contain.

Related Topics

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To select a PostScript Printer Description file

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Enable the Use PPD check box.

5	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To print to a PostScript device

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the PostScript tab.

5	From the list box in the Compatibility area, choose the PostScript level that corresponds to the printer.

If you want to compress bitmaps when printing, enable the Use JPEG compression check box in the Bitmaps area, and move the Quality factor slider.

 Note

•	Bitmap compression settings can be saved in PostScript Interpreted (PS or PRN) files when you print to a file. For information about printing to a file, see "To print to a file."

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To test for complex graphics

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

3	Click Settings.

4	Double-click Printing.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Text with texture fills (PS Level1 Only)

•	Bitmaps in complex clipping paths (PS Level1 only)

•	Texture fills in complex objects (PS Level1 only)

•	Complex clipping regions (PS Level1 only)

•	Objects with outline having many nodes (PS Level1 only)

•	Objects with outline and fill having many nodes (PS Level1 only)

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To test fountain fills for banding

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

3	Click Settings.

4	Double-click Printing.

5	Enable the Banded fountain fills check box.

 Note

•	Testing fountain fills for banding applies only to linear fountain fills.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To reduce curve complexity

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Type a value in the Set flatness to box.

 Note

•	As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To set color separations and font warning options

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Spot color separations warning from the Option list.

4	Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

•	If any spot colors are used

•	If more than 1 spot color used

•	If more than 2 spot colors used

•	If more than 3 spot colors used

5	Choose Fonts warning threshold from the Option list.

6	Choose a number from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Bitmap font limit (PS) from the Option list.

4	Choose a value from the Settings list box.

If you want to set a maximum bitmap font size, choose a font size from the Bitmap font size threshold (PS) list box.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options


Commercial printing

With Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can prepare a print job for commercial printing.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	preparing a print job for a service bureau

•	working with imposition layouts

•	printing printer's marks

•	printing color separations

•	working with color trapping

•	specifying In-RIP trapping settings

•	printing to film


Preparing a print job for a service bureau

You can print a drawing to a file, which lets the service bureau send the file directly to an output device. If you are unsure about which settings to choose, consult the service bureau.

You can include a job information file or a printed sheet with all the pre-press settings that you have specified.

For more information about commercial printing, see "Understanding commercial printing."

Related Topics

To print to a file

To include a job information sheet with the print job


To print to a file

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Enable the Print to file check box.

(Mac OS) If the Print to file check box is grayed, choose Device independent PostScript file from the Printer list box. This enables the Print to file check box automatically.

4	Click the flyout arrow, and click one of the following commands:

•	(Windows) For Mac [image] saves the drawing to be readable on a Macintosh computer

•	Single file [image] prints pages to a single file

•	Pages to separate files [image] prints pages to separate files

•	Plates to separate files [image] prints plates to separate files

5	Click Print.

6	Choose one of the following from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS):

•	Print file [image] saves the file as a PRN file

•	PostScript file [image] saves the file as a PS file

7	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

8	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Note

•	If you prefer not to prepare PostScript files, service bureaus equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, CorelDRAW files) and apply the required prepress settings.

Related Topics

Preparing a print job for a service bureau

To include a job information sheet with the print job


To include a job information sheet with the print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Print job information sheet check box.

4	Click Info settings.

5	In the Information area, disable any of the options.

6	In the Destination area, enable one of the following:

•	Send to text file

•	Send to printer

Related Topics

Preparing a print job for a service bureau

To print to a file


Working with imposition layouts

Working with imposition layouts lets you print more than one page of a document on each sheet of paper. You can choose a preset imposition layout to create documents such as magazines and books to print on a commercial printing press; produce documents that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or greeting cards; or print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page. You can also edit a preset imposition layout to create your own layout.

You can select a binding method by choosing from three preset binding methods or you can customize a binding method. When you choose a preset binding method, all but the first signature are automatically arranged.

You can arrange pages on a signature manually or automatically. When you arrange the pages automatically, you can choose the angle of the image. If you have more than one page across or down, you can specify the size of gutters between pages; for example, you can choose the automatic gutter spacing option, which sizes gutters so that the document's pages fill the entire available space in the layout.

When printing on a desktop printer, you can adjust the margins to accommodate the non-printable area of a page. If the margin is smaller than the non-printable area, the edges of some pages or some printer's marks may be clipped by your printer.

Related Topics

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To choose a preset imposition layout

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.

 Note

•	The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is printed.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To edit an imposition layout

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Edit any imposition layout settings.

6	Click Save layout on the property bar.

7	Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save as box.

 Note

•	When editing an imposition layout, you should save it with a new name; otherwise the settings for a preset imposition layout will be overwritten.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To select a binding method

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit basic settings from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Type values in the Pages across/down boxes.

If you want the page to be double-sided, click the Single/double sided button.

5	Choose one of the following binding methods from the Binding mode list box:

•	Perfect binding

•	Saddle stitch

•	Collate and cut

•	Custom binding

If you choose either Perfect binding or Custom binding, type a value in the corresponding box.

 Note

•	When you click the Single/double sided layout for double-sided printing, and you are printing on a non-duplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printer, so that you can print on both sides of the page.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To arrange pages

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit page placements from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Intelligent auto-ordering

•	Sequential auto-ordering

•	Cloned auto-ordering

If you want to arrange the page numbering manually, click on the page and specify the page number in the Page sequence number box.

5	Choose an angle from the Page rotation list box.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To edit gutters

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit gutters and finishing from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Auto gutter spacing

•	Equal gutters

5	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Cut location

•	Fold location

 Notes

•	If you click the Equal gutters button, you must specify a value in the Gutter size box.

•	You can edit the gutters only if you've selected an imposition layout with two or more pages across and down.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To adjust margins


To adjust margins

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit margins from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Auto margins

•	Equal margins

 Notes

•	If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes.

•	When preparing a job for a commercial press, the service bureau may request minimum margin sizes, such as for page grippers and printer's marks.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters


Printing printer's marks

Printing printer's marks lets you display information on a page about how a work should be printed. You can specify the position of the printer's marks on the page.

The available printer's marks are as follows:

•	Crop/fold marks [image] represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns) you can choose to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. Composite crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each separation plate of an imported CMYK file.

•	Bleed limit [image] determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

•	Registration marks [image] are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation.

•	Color calibration bars [image] are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation and ensure accurate color reproduction To see calibration bars, the page size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.

•	Densitometer scale [image] is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

•	Page numbers [image] helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any page numbers or do not contain page numbers that correspond to the actual number of pages.

•	File information [image] prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name.

Related Topics

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print crop and fold marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Crop/fold marks check box.

If you want to print only the exterior crop/fold marks, enable the Exterior only check box.

 Note

•	To print crop and fold marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

 Tip

•	To set crop and fold marks, see "To edit gutters."

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print composite crop/fold marks

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Composite crop marks from the Option list.

4	Choose Output in CMYK from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To set a bleed limit

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Bleed limit check box.

4	Type a value in the Bleed limit box.

 Note

•	Usually, a bleed limit of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print registration marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print registration marks check box.

4	Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box.

 Note

•	To print registration marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	In the Calibration bars area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Color calibration bar

•	Densitometer scales

If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares) and type a new density for that square.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print page numbers

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print page numbers check box.

If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position within page check box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print file information

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print file information check box.

4	Type a job name in the Job name/slug line box.

If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position within page check box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To position printer's marks


To position printer's marks

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Marks placement tool.

3	Click the Auto-position marks rectangle button on the property bar.

4	Type values in the Marks alignment rectangle boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also change the position of printer's marks by clicking on a printer's mark icon in the print preview window and dragging the bounding box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information


Printing color separations

When you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service bureau must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify the color separations to print, including the order in which they print.

Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot color, or both. You can convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. For more information on spot and process colors, see "Choosing colors."

Corel also supports PANTONE Hexachrome, a type of printing process that increases the range of printable colors. Talk to the service bureau about whether you should use PANTONE Hexachrome color.

When setting halftone screens to print color separations, we recommend that you use default settings; otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you are using an imagesetter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the service bureau to determine the correct setting.

Related Topics

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To print color separations

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

If you want to print specific color separations, enable the corresponding check box in the list of color separations.

 Tips

•	Although not recommended, you can print separations in color by enabling the Print separations in color check box in the Options area.

•	You can change the order in which color separations print, by enabling the Use advanced settings check box, clicking Advanced, and choosing an order from the Order list box.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To convert spot colors to process colors

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Convert spot colors to process check box in the Options area.

 Note

•	Changing the spot colors to process colors when you print does not affect the document, only the way it is printed.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Hexachrome plates check box in the Options area.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To customize a halftone screen


To customize a halftone screen

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Use advanced settings check box.

5	Click Advanced.

6	Change any of the following settings:

•	Screening technology

•	Resolution

•	Basic screen

•	Halftone type

 Note

•	You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color


Working with color trapping

Trapping intentionally overlaps colors so that minor problems with the alignment of printing plates are not noticed. To overlap colors and create color trapping, one color must overprint the other. Overprinting works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color may result (for example, cyan over yellow may result in a green object).

You can preserve overprint settings by choosing to overprint specific color separations, specify in which order they will print, and specify whether you want to overprint graphics, text, or both.

For advanced trapping options, see "Specifying In-RIP trapping settings."

Related Topics

To overprint selected color separations


To overprint selected color separations

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Use advanced settings check box.

5	Click Advanced.

6	In the Advanced separations settings dialog box, choose a color separation from the Screening technology list box.

7	In the Overprint column, click one or both of the following icons:

•	Overprint graphics

•	Overprint text

 Note

•	The icons appear darker when the separation is set to overprint.

 Tip

•	You can change the order in which color separations print by selecting a color separation and choosing an order from the Order list box.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping


Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

In-RIP trapping allows you to specify advanced trapping settings. Before selecting In-RIP trapping, ensure that your PostScript 3 printer has In-RIP options.

You can select a trap width [image] the amount that one color spreads into another. You can also specify image trap placement, which determines where the trap occurs. You can, for example, specify whether the trap is a choke or a spread, depending upon the neutral densities of adjacent colors. Neutral density indicates the lightness or darkness of a color and helps determine how adjacent colors spread into one another.

You can specify a threshold at which a trap will be created by specifying a step trap limit. If trap colors are of similar neutral densities, the trap placement will be adjusted accordingly. The step trap limit specifies a threshold at which a trap will adjust.

Before trapping, you can set the inks; for example, you can set an ink to opaque, as in the case of a metallic ink, so that nothing shows through it. To reduce the visibility of a trap, you can decrease the amount of ink color in a trap. This is especially helpful in the case of pastel colors, contrasting colors, and colors with similar neutral densities.

Related Topics

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To select a trap width

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in the Trap width box.

If you are trapping to black, type a value in the Black trap width box.

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To specify image trap placement

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	From the Image trap placement list box, choose one of the following placements:

•	Neutral density [image] used to determine the lighter object and thus, the direction and placement of the trap

•	Choke [image] used to trap a dark foreground object to a light background image

•	Spread [image] used to trap a light foreground object to a dark background image

•	Centerline [image] used when adjacent images and objects have similar neutral densities or when image density changes along an object's edge

If you want to trap an object to an image, enable the Trap objects to images option.

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To specify a threshold

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in one or any of the following boxes:

•	Step limit [image] specifies a threshold between color variations. The lower the threshold value, the more likely it is that a trap will be created

•	Black limit [image] specifies the threshold at which process black is considered pure black

•	Black density limit [image] specifies a neutral density value for the black ink

•	Sliding trap limit [image] specifies the difference between the neutral densities of adjacent colors at which a trap adjusts (slides) from the darker side of a color edge toward the centerline. The lower the sliding trap limit, the more gradual the transition

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To set inks for trapping

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Click Type, and for each color separation, select one of the following:

•	Transparent [image] the selected ink doesn't get trapped, but anything beneath it does

•	Neutral density [image] the neutral density of the selected ink determines how it is treated

•	Opaque [image] the selected ink is treated as opaque

•	Opaque ignore [image] the selected ink doesn't get trapped nor does anything beneath it

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To select a trap color reduction


To select a trap color reduction

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in the Trap color reduction box.

 Notes

•	A reduction value of 100% indicates no reduction, while a lower value reduces the neutral density.

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping


Printing to film

You can set up a print job to produce negative images. An image-setter produces images on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device you are using. Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine whether you can produce images on film.

You can specify to print with the emulsion down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image on desktop printers.

Related Topics

To print a negative

To specify film with the emulsion down


To print a negative

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Invert check box.

 Note

•	Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printer.

Related Topics

Printing to film

To specify film with the emulsion down


To specify film with the emulsion down

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Mirror check box.

Related Topics

Printing to film

To print a negative


Understanding commercial printing

If you use commercial printing services for your print jobs, you probably use a service bureau or a printing shop. The service bureau takes your file and converts it directly to film or to plates. The printing shop uses the film from a service bureau to make printing plates.

When you prepare a print job for commercial printing, you can send camera-ready paper output or the work on disk. If you send the work on disk, the service bureau needs either a PostScript file or a native file from the application that you use. If you are creating a file to send to an image-setter or a plate-setter, speak with the service bureau about the best file format and printing device settings to use. Always provide a final printout of the work to the service bureau, even if it is only a black-and-white representation. This helps the service bureau to identify and assess any potential problems.

Before printing a drawing, you must choose and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver. Consult the printing device manufacturer instructions, or the service bureau or printing shop that you use to print the work, to find out the best way to set up the printing device driver.


Using Preflight

Preflight checks the status of your file before you decide to output it. A summary of issues of potential problems and suggestions for resolving them is provided. You can specify which issues Preflight checks for. You can also save Preflight settings. For more information about specific Preflight settings, see any of the following:

•	To check for issues relating to printing a file

•	To check for issues relating to publishing a PDF file


Working with lenses

Lenses let you view special effects, corrections, or adjustments, on a separate object layer before you apply the changes to the image.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating lenses

•	editing lenses

•	combining lenses with the image background


Creating lenses

Lenses let you view adjustments and special effects that you want to apply to an image. When you create a lens, the changes you make are not applied to the image pixels; instead, they are displayed on the screen through the lens. The lens is created as a separate object on a layer above the image background so you can edit the lens and the background image separately. When you achieve the results you want, you can combine the lens with the image background. When you export or print an image, the effects of the lens are applied to the exported or printed image.

You can create a lens to cover the entire image, or you can create a lens from the editable area of a mask. You can create as many lenses as you want for an image and assign a unique name to each. You can also use multiple lenses to apply successive changes to a specific area in the image.

When you create a lens, you must choose a lens type based on the change that you want to apply. However, the types of lenses are determined by the image's color mode. For example, you cannot use a color lens on a grayscale image because there are no colors to modify. If you want to correct or adjust image color and tone, choose a lens type that corresponds to the adjustment and transform filters. For more information about using filters, see "Adjusting color and tone." If you want to apply a special effect to improve image quality or dramatically transform an image, choose a special effects filter. For more information about special effects, see "Applying special effects."

Related Topics

To create a lens

To create a lens from an editable area


To create a lens

1	Click Object [image] Create [image] New lens.

2	Choose a lens from the Lens type list.

3	Type a name in the Lens name box.

4	Click OK.

If a dialog box displays, specify the lens properties.

 Tip

•	You can also create a lens by clicking the New lens button in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Creating lenses

To create a lens from an editable area


To create a lens from an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Object [image] Create [image] New lens.

3	Enable the Create lens from mask check box.

4	Choose a lens from the Lens type list.

5	Type a name in the Lens name box.

6	Click OK.

7	In the dialog box, specify the lens properties.

 Tip

•	You can also create a lens from an editable area by clicking the New lens button in the Objects Docker window/palette after defining an editable area. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Creating lenses

To create a lens


Editing lenses

After you create a lens, you can edit it. For example, you can add areas to it and remove areas from it. You can change the lens properties or change the transparency of a lens to fine-tune the changes you want to apply to the image.

Lenses can be selected and transformed in the same way that you select and transform objects. For information about selecting and transforming objects, see "Working with objects" and "Modifying objects." You can also change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter. For more information about special effects, see "Applying special effects."

Related Topics

To add an area to a lens

To remove an area from a lens

To change the properties of a lens

To change the transparency of a lens

To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter


To add an area to a lens

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Paint tool

•	Rectangle tool

•	Ellipse tool

•	Polygon tool

•	Line tool

4	On the property bar, specify the tool's attributes.

5	Drag across the areas that you want to add to the lens.

 Note

•	When adding areas to a lens, the grayscale value of the foreground color or fill color affects the lens opacity. White adds areas to the lens while and black makes lens areas transparent. For more information, see "Working with object transparency."

•	The Rectangle tool, Ellipse tool, Polygon tool, and Line tool, create new objects by default. To add areas to the lens object layer, ensure the New object button on the extended property bar is disabled.

Related Topics

Editing lenses

To remove an area from a lens

To change the properties of a lens

To change the transparency of a lens

To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter


To remove an area from a lens

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	Click the Eraser tool.

4	On the property bar, specify the Eraser tool's attributes.

5	Drag across the areas that you want to remove from the lens.

Related Topics

Editing lenses

To add an area to a lens

To change the properties of a lens

To change the transparency of a lens

To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter


To change the properties of a lens

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	Click Object [image] Edit lens.

4	Edit the lens properties.

 Note

•	You cannot change the properties of a Desaturate lens or an Invert lens.

Related Topics

Editing lenses

To add an area to a lens

To remove an area from a lens

To change the transparency of a lens

To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter


To change the transparency of a lens

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	In the Objects Docker window/palette, type a value in the Opacity box.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

 Note

•	The Opacity box is not available for 1-bit black-and-white images.

Related Topics

Editing lenses

To add an area to a lens

To remove an area from a lens

To change the properties of a lens

To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter


To change the shape of a lens using a special effects filter

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	Click Effects, and click a special effect.

4	Specify the settings of the special effects filter.

 Note

•	Only some special effects change the shape of lenses. For example, many special effects from the 3D and Distort special effect categories work well.

Related Topics

Editing lenses

To add an area to a lens

To remove an area from a lens

To change the properties of a lens

To change the transparency of a lens


Combining lenses with the image background

To apply a lens's adjustment and special effects to the pixels of an image, you combine the lens with the image background. Combining a lens with the image background reduces the file size of the image and lets you save the image to a non-native file format. If you save an image as a Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 file, lenses are saved with the image and do not have to be combined. Once a lens is combined with the image background, the lens cannot be selected or modified.

When you combine a lens with the image background, you can choose a merge mode to enhance the results. For information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

Related Topics

To combine a lens with the image background


To combine a lens with the image background

1	Click the Object pick tool.

2	Select a lens.

3	In the Objects Docker window/palette, choose a merge mode from the Merge mode list box.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

4	Click Object [image] Combine, and click one of the following:

•	Combine objects with background [image] combines the selected lens with the image background

•	Combine all objects with background [image] combines the selected lens and all other objects with the image background

Related Topics

Combining lenses with the image background


Getting help

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 offers you a variety of ways to help you learn the application.

•	User guide and quick reference card

•	help available through the application window

•	CorelTUTOR

•	World Wide Web resources

For information about technical support, including news groups and FAQs, see "Corel support, services, and contact."


User guide and quick reference card

The user guide is designed to get you started with Corel PHOTO-PAINT by explaining basic concepts and features, as well as providing procedures for performing common tasks. Chapters ending with From here tables contain keywords that direct you to additional topics in the Help available through the application window. For information about the conventions used in this guide, see "Documentation conventions."

Corel PHOTO-PAINT also includes a quick reference card that contains basic information about tools, commands, and shortcut keys.


Help available through the application window

You can access electronic help for Corel PHOTO-PAINT through the application window. The list below indicates the type of help available:

•	Help [image] lets you find topics using the table of contents, index, and word/phrase search tool. You can also view topics related to your current task.

•	ToolTips [image] let you access names or functions of icons and buttons

Related Topics

To use Help (Windows)

To use Help (Mac OS)


To use Help (Windows)

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Contents [image] lets you browse through the table of contents

•	Index [image] lets you use the index to find a topic

•	Search [image] lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word. This option is effective if you want to search for specific tools or commands.

You can also	Do the following
View Help topics related to a dialog box	Click Help in a dialog box.
View Help topics related to a tool	Click the Active tool help button on the property bar. The button displays the active tool's icon and a question mark.
Print a specific Help topic	Open a Help topic, and click Print.
 Note

•	For information about the conventions used in the Help, see "Documentation conventions."

 Tip

•	You can also launch Help by pressing F1.

Related Topics

Help available through the application window

To use Help (Mac OS)


To use Help (Mac OS)

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Choose a section title from the contents list.

3	Click a topic title.

You can also
Search for a topic by keyword	Type a keyword and click Ask.
Print a specific Help topic	Click File [image] Print. Select a printer and printer options, then click Print.
View Help for a dialog box	Click the Help button [image].
 Note

•	The Help button returns you to the Mac OS Help Center.

 Tip

•	To return to the contents page from a procedure or overview topic, click Table of contents at the bottom of the page.

Related Topics

Help available through the application window

To use Help (Windows)


Using CorelTUTOR

CorelTUTOR provides a series of project-based tutorials that introduce you to basic and advanced features of Corel PHOTO-PAINT. These tutorials are designed to show practical applications of the powerful photo editing and bitmap creation tools of Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Related Topics

To access CorelTUTOR


To access CorelTUTOR

•	Click Help [image] CorelTUTOR.

 Note

•	The default browser launches with the CorelTUTOR start page.

Related Topics

Using CorelTUTOR


World Wide Web resources

The following sites include product information, articles, tips, and additional tutorials, as well as graphics resources such as photos, clipart, and font subscriptions:

•	www.corel.com

•	www.Designer.com

•	www.MyFonts.com


Welcome to Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 is a bitmap image-editing application that lets you retouch existing photos or create original graphics. Corel PHOTO-PAINT gives you the tools and supplies of a professional graphic design studio. You can choose from an array of media and textures; colors and brushes; and a library of ready-made images. You can also animate your images and publish your work to the Web.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	documentation conventions

•	installing and uninstalling applications

•	starting and quitting Corel PHOTO-PAINT

•	what's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11

•	Corel Corporation

•	registering Corel products

•	Corel support, services, and contact

•	other resources


Documentation conventions

The table below describes important conventions used in the user guide and Help.

Convention	Description	Examples
Menu [image] Menu command	Click the menu item followed by the menu command.	Click File [image] Open.
list box	A list of options that drops down, like a pop-up menu, when a user clicks the down arrow button.	Choose a value from the Force field list box on the property bar.
Control + click (Mac OS)	Hold down the Control key and click the mouse button.	You can also delete an object by Control + clicking an object and clicking Clear.
	A note contains information that is important to the preceding steps. It can describe conditions under which the procedure can be performed	If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes.
	A tip contains suggestions for performing the preceding steps. It can present alternatives to the steps and other benefits and uses of the procedure.	You can also create a hyperlink using the Internet toolbar.


Installing and uninstalling applications

The application's installer makes it easy to install Corel applications and components. It lets you

•	install any Corel applications included in your software package

•	add components to a currently installed application

•	refresh files and configurations of currently installed applications

Related Topics

To install applications (Windows)

To install applications (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To install applications (Windows)

1	Close all applications.

2	Insert Disc 1 of the application into the CD drive.

If the Corel Installation wizard does not start up automatically, click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run. Type D:\Setup, where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD drive.

3	Follow the instructions in the Installation wizard and select one of the following options:

•	Typical [image] to install the default applications and components

•	Compact [image] to install the minimum components for the application to operate

•	Custom [image] to choose applications and components

4	Follow the instructions for installing and registering the application.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install applications (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To install applications (Mac OS)

1	Close all applications.

2	Insert Disc 1 of the application into the CD drive.

3	Double-click the CD icon on your desktop and double-click the Installer.

4	Select one of the following options:

•	Easy install [image] to install the default applications and components

•	Custom install [image] to choose applications and components

5	Follow the instructions for installing and registering the application.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To uninstall applications (Windows)

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Control Panel.

If your operating system is Windows 2000 or earlier, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel.

2	Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

3	Choose the Corel application from the list, click the Change/Remove button, and enable Remove All in the dialog box.

If your operating system is Windows 2000 or earlier, click the Remove button.

4	Follow the InstallShield Wizard instructions.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install applications (Windows)

To install applications (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To uninstall applications (Mac OS)

1	Drag the Corel application folder to the Trash.

2	Open the Users:username:Library folder where you have Mac OS X installed. (username is your Mac OS X username: for example, jsmith)

If you do not have a user profile, open Users:Corel:Library.

3	Drag the Preferences:Corel application Preferences folder to the Trash. (application is the name of the installed Corel application)

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install applications (Windows)

To install applications (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)


Starting and quitting Corel PHOTO-PAINT

You can start Corel PHOTO-PAINT from the Windows taskbar (Windows) or from the Corel Graphics 11 folder (Mac OS), and end a Corel PHOTO-PAINT session from the application window.

Related Topics

To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Mac OS)


To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To	Do the following
Start Corel PHOTO-PAINT	From the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Programs [image] Corel Graphics Suite 11 [image] Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11
Quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT	Click File [image] Exit.
Related Topics

Starting and quitting Corel PHOTO-PAINT

To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Mac OS)


To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Mac OS)

To	Do the following
Start Corel PHOTO-PAINT	In the Corel Graphics 11 folder, double-click the Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 icon.
Quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT	Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Quit.
 Tip

•	You can also start Corel PHOTO-PAINT from the Dock. To add the Corel PHOTO-PAINT icon to the Dock, drag the icon from the application folder or the desktop to the left of the line in the Dock.

Related Topics

Starting and quitting Corel PHOTO-PAINT

To start and quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)


What's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 provides users with exciting new features to enhance image editing and create images for the Web. For a full description of new features, see "What's new in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11."


About Corel Corporation

Founded in 1985, Corel Corporation is a leading technology company that offers software for home and small business users, creative professionals and enterprise customers. With its headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, Corel’s common stock trades on the Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR.

For more information about Corel Corporation, visit its Web site www.corel.com.


Registering Corel products

Registering Corel products is important. Registration provides you with timely access to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers. Also, when you register a product, you are eligible for 30 days of free technical support.

You can register when you install CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 11, or choose to register at a later date.

You can register using the following methods:

•	online [image] you can launch online registration if you are connected to the Internet when you install the Corel graphics application. If no Internet connection is detected, a list of options displays in a dialog box.

•	FTP [image] you can complete the registration form and it will be sent automatically when an Internet connection is detected

•	by phone [image] you can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you

For more information about registering a Corel product, visit www.corel.com/support/register.


Corel support, services, and contact

Corel Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information about Corel product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical support.

World Wide Web

For information about Corel technical support and customer service support, visit www.corel.com/support.

Web service	Description
Support newsgroups	Let you exchange information, tips and techniques with other users of Corel products
Corel Knowledge Base	Lets you read, print, and download documents that contain answers to many technical questions or problems
FAQs	Answers common user questions
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)	Lets you download printer drivers, patches, plug-ins, updates, or other files
Telephone

You can telephone Corel Support Services with your questions. For information about the levels of service that Corel provides, visit www.corel.com/support.

•	North America [image] you can call Corel Support Services by calling our 1-800-772-6735 toll-free line. The hours of operation are 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m., Monday to Friday, Eastern Standard Time (EST).

•	Outside North America [image] you can call a local authorized Corel Support Services partner from a toll line at +353-1-213-3912.

Mail, fax, and email

•	You can send specific customer-service questions to Corel Support Services representatives by mail, fax, and email.

Corel Corporation
Support Services
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario
Canada K1Z 8R7

fax: 1-613-761-9176

email: custserv@corel.com

Related Topics

Corel wants your feedback


Corel wants your feedback

If you have any comments or suggestions about the enclosed user guides, Help, and tutorials, you can send them by email to drawdoc@corel.com or by regular mail to the address below. You can check the product Web site for the latest news, tips and tricks, and product upgrade information. Go to www.corel.com and follow the links to the product site.

Creative Products Documentation Manager
Corel Corporation
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
K1Z 8R7

Related Topics

Corel support, services, and contact


Other resources

Corel has training partnerships with other firms and provides professional services for its software products.

Training

•	Corel training events

Maximize your skills and attend a Corel training camp [image] special intensive training events held throughout North America on various Corel products. All training camps are delivered by a Corel training specialist, with hands-on instruction, exercises and practical real-world projects. To look at the training schedule or to register for a course, please visit: www.corel.com/trainingschedule.

•	Corel customized training

Once you have Corel applications running on your computers, our team of expert Corel training specialists can help you make the most of them with customized training, tailored to the specific needs of your work environment. We will help you develop a custom curriculum which is practical and relevant to the needs of your organization. For more information about Corel customized training, please visit www.corel.com/customizedtraining.

•	Corel Training Partners (CTP)

CTP's are independent, officially accredited local organizations that provide training on Corel products and are located worldwide for your convenience. To find a partner near you, please visit www.corel.com/trainingpartners.

Corel Corporate Services

Corel is committed to getting you up and running quickly with time and money-saving workflow solutions. To simplify the process of deploying Corel PHOTO-PAINT across your organization, our Corporate Services department offers a comprehensive range of cost-effective services to meet your technology needs. This group brings together highly skilled experts from across the company who are dedicated to providing top-notch solutions. Our knowledgeable team is ready to offer assistance through all stages of your project, from application development and support to software systems integration and training.

For more information on Corel Corporate Services, please contact proservices@corel.com


Corel PHOTO-PAINT workspace tour

Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 helps you follow the concepts and procedures found in the user guide and the help that is available through the application window.

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT terms

•	application window

•	toolbars

•	toolbox

•	property bar

•	Docker windows/palettes

•	status bar


Corel PHOTO-PAINT terms

Before you get started in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you should be familiar with the following terms.

Term	Description
Channel	An 8-bit grayscale image that stores color or mask information for another image.
Editable area	An editable area of a mask allows paint and effects to be applied to a selected area of an image.
Image	A file you open or create in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.
Lens	An object layer that protects part or all of an image when you perform color and tonal corrections.
Mask	A mask can be applied to an image during image editing to define protected areas and editable areas.
Object	An independent bitmap that is layered above the background image.
Path	A series of line and curve segments connected by adjustable endpoints called nodes.
Thumbnails	A miniature, low-resolution version of an image.
For more terms and definitions, see "Glossary".


Exploring the application window

The Corel PHOTO-PAINT application window contains elements that help you access the tools and commands you need to view and edit images. Application commands are accessible through the menu bar, toolbox, property bar, toolbars, or Docker windows/palettes.

You can customize many of the elements in the application window to suit your workflow. For information about customizing Corel PHOTO-PAINT, see "Customizing your application".

The application window contains the following main parts:

Part	Description
Menu bar	The area containing drop-down menus with commands grouped by category
Property bar	A detachable bar containing commands that change according to the active tool.
Toolbar (standard)	A bar that contains shortcuts to some menus and other basic commands, such as opening, saving, and printing
Toolbox	A bar that contains tools for editing, creating, and viewing images. The toolbox also contains the color control area which lets you select colors and fills.
Image window	The area in which the image displays. Although more than one image window can be open at the same time, you can apply commands to the active image window only.
Title bar	The area on the image window displaying the title of the image
Navigator	A button that lets you view a thumbnail of the entire image so you can focus the image window on a specific area. The Navigator is only available if you have areas that exceed the image window.
Docker window/palette	A window that provides access to additional commands and image information. Some Docker windows/palettes provide a visual display area. The Object Docker window/palette is displayed by default.
Status bar	An area that displays image information, system information, and tips


Toolbars

Toolbars consist of buttons that are shortcuts to menu commands. The standard toolbar consists of commonly used commands. The table below outlines the buttons on the standard toolbar.

Press this button	To
	Start a new image
	Open an image
	Save an image
	Print an image
	Cut selected objects to the Clipboard
	Copy selected objects to the Clipboard
	Paste the Clipboard contents into an image
	Undo the last action
	Redo the last action
	Import an image
	Change the zoom level
	Display a full-screen preview. Press F9 to exit the full-screen preview.
	Show or hide the image slicing grid
	Show or hide the mask marquee
	Show or hide the object marquee
	Clear a mask
	Invert a mask
	Launch another Corel application
In addition to the standard toolbar, Corel PHOTO-PAINT has toolbars for specific kinds of tasks. For example, if you frequently work with masks , you can display the Mask/object toolbar. Unlike the property bar, the contents of a toolbar remain the same.

For information about moving and re-sizing toolbars, and changing which toolbars display by default, see "To customize toolbar position and display". You can also create a custom toolbar to include the tools and commands you use most often. For information about creating custom toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

Related Topics

To hide or display a toolbar


To hide or display a toolbar

•	Click Window [image] Toolbars, and click a toolbar.

A check mark next to a toolbar name indicates that the toolbar is displayed in the image window.

Related Topics

Toolbars


Toolbox

The toolbox contains tools for editing, creating, and viewing images. Some of the tools are visible by default, while others are grouped in flyouts. Flyouts open to display a set of related tools. A small arrow in the bottom, right-hand corner of a toolbox button indicates a flyout. The last tool used in a flyout displays in the toolbox. For example, in the Brush flyout, the Paint tool displays by default, but if you use another tool in the flyout, such as the Image Sprayer tool, the Image Sprayer tool displays in the toolbox with the flyout arrow. Flyouts function like toolbars when you drag them away from the toolbox. This lets you view all the related tools while you work.

In addition to the tools, the color control area displays in the toolbox. The color control area lets you choose colors and fills.

The following tables provide descriptions of the flyouts, tools, and the color control area in the Corel PHOTO-PAINT toolbox.

Flyout	Description
Pick flyout (Windows)	Lets you access the Object pick tool and the Mask transform tool
Mask flyout	Lets you access the Rectangular mask tool, the Ellipse mask tool, the Freehand mask tool, the Lasso mask tool, the Magnetic mask tool, the Magic wand mask tool, and the Brush mask tool
Zoom flyout	Lets you access the Zoom tool and the Pan tool
Touch-up flyout	Lets you access the Red-eye removal tool and the Clone tool
Shape flyout	Lets you access the Rectangle tool, the Ellipse tool, the Polygon tool,  the Line tool, and the Path tool
Fill flyout	Lets you access the Fill tool and the Interactive fill tool
Brush flyout	Lets you access the Paint tool, the Effect tool, the Image sprayer tool, the Undo brush tool, and the Replace color brush tool
Interactive/Transparency flyout	Lets you access the Interactive dropshadow tool, the Interactive object transparency tool, the Color transparency tool, and the Object transparency brush tool
Tools	Description
Object pick	Lets you select an object
Mask transform	Lets you change the appearance of editable areas
Rectangle mask	Lets you define rectangular editable areas
Ellipse mask	Lets you define elliptical editable areas
Freehand mask	Lets you define irregularly shaped or polygonal editable areas
Lasso mask	Lets you define editable areas that are irregular in shape and surrounded by pixels of similar colors
Magnetic mask	Lets you detect edges of elements in your image, that is, the outline of areas that are in contrasting color to their surroundings, and place the mask marquee along that edge
Magic wand mask	Lets you define irregularly shaped editable areas that include all adjacent pixels that are similar in color to the pixel you first selected
Brush mask	Lets you define an editable area by brushing an area as if you were painting
Crop	Lets you remove unwanted areas and straighten crooked images
Zoom	Lets you change the magnification level in the image window
Pan	Lets you drag areas of an image into view when the image is larger than its window
Eyedropper	Lets you choose colors from an image
Eraser	Lets you erase image areas or object areas to reveal the object or background underneath
Text	Lets you add text to your image and edit existing text
Red-eye removal	Lets you remove the red-eye effect from the eyes of subjects in photos.
Clone	Lets you duplicate part of an image and apply it to another part of the image or to another image
Rectangle	Lets you draw square or rectangular shapes
Ellipse	Lets you draw circular or elliptical shapes
Polygon	Lets you draw polygons
Line	Lets you draw single or joined straight line segments using the foreground color
Path	Lets you create and edit paths
Fill	Lets you fill areas with one of four fill types: uniform, fountain, bitmap, and texture
Interactive fill	Lets you apply a gradient fill to the entire image, object, or selection
Paint	Lets you paint on an image using the foreground color
Effect	Lets you perform local color and tonal corrections on the image
Image sprayer	Lets you load one or more images and paint them on your image
Undo brush	Lets you restore image areas to how they looked before your last brush stroke
Replace color brush	Lets you replace the foreground color in your image with the background color
Interactive dropshadow	Lets you add shadows to objects
Interactive object transparency	Lets you make the colors of an object fade gradually towards the image background color
Color transparency	Lets you make pixels with a specific color value in an object transparent
Object tranparency brush	Lets you brush areas on an object to make them more transparent
Image slicing	Lets you cut a large image into smaller sections that can be modified for the Web
Color control area
	Lets you choose colors and fills. Consists of three swatches: a Foreground color swatch, a Background color swatch, and a Fill color swatch. The arrow lets you swap the foreground color and background color, and the Reset color icon lets you return to the default colors.


Property bar

The property bar displays commonly used commands that are relevant to the active tool. Unlike toolbars, the contents of the property bar change depending on which tool is active. For example, when you use the Text tool, the contents of the property bar change to display text-related settings such as font type, font size, and alignment.

More advanced options for the active tool can be accessed on the extended property bar. A button with a double arrow at the end of the property bar lets you open or close the extended property bar.

Related Topics

To open or close the extended property bar


To open or close the extended property bar

To	Do the following
Open the extended property bar	Click the Open advanced options button.
Close the extended property bar	Click the Close advanced options button.
Related Topics

Property bar


Docker windows/palettes

Docker windows/palettes display controls, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. Some Docker windows/palettes also include additional visual information about the tools or image elements. You can keep Docker windows/palettes open while you work on an image.

In Windows, you can attach, or dock, Docker windows to either side of the application window, or you can float, or undock, them so you can move them as you work in the application window. You can also minimize Docker windows to save valuable screen space. If you open more than one Docker window at a time, the windows stack on top of each other and tabs display so you can quickly access the Docker window you want.

In the Mac OS, you can move palettes as you work in the application window. If you open more than one palette at a time, you can stack the palettes on top of each other and combine them to save valuable screen space. Tabs let you access each of the palettes in the stack.

An example of a Docker window/palette is the Objects Docker window/palette. The Objects Docker window/palette displays thumbnails of the image background and each object layer, as well as command buttons and options related to objects.

Related Topics

To open a Docker window/palette

To move a Docker window/palette

To minimize a Docker window (Windows)


To open a Docker window/palette

•	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes, and click a Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Docker windows/palettes

To move a Docker window/palette

To minimize a Docker window (Windows)


To move a Docker window/palette

•	Drag the title bar of the Docker window/palette to a new location.

(Windows)  Dragging a Docker window away from the side undocks it, whereas dragging a floating Docker window toward the side docks it.

 Note

•	(Windows)  As you drag, an outline of the Docker window displays. The outline changes shape as you drag to the side of the application window to indicate that the Docker window is docked.

Related Topics

Docker windows/palettes

To open a Docker window/palette

To minimize a Docker window (Windows)


To minimize a Docker window (Windows)

To minimize	Do the following
A floating Docker window	Click the roll-down arrow on the title bar of the Docker window.
A docked Docker window	Click the double-arrow on the title bar of the Docker window. A tab displays along the right side of the application window.
Related Topics

Docker windows/palettes

To open a Docker window/palette

To move a Docker window/palette


Status bar

The status bar displays information about the image, system memory, and the active tool. You can change the type of information that displays to help you with your current task. For example, if you are working with images that have different dimensions, you can display the dimension of the current image.

You can also customize the status bar by adding command buttons. For information about customizing the status bar, see "Customizing the status bar"..

Related Topics

To change the type of information displayed on the status bar


To change the type of information displayed on the status bar

•	Click the arrow on the status bar, and click one of the following:

•	File size

•	Current tool

•	Document dimension

•	Color mode

•	Memory

Related Topics

Status bar


Adjusting color and tone

You can improve the quality of images by adjusting the color and tone to correct color casts and exposure problems or to alter specific colors.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	adjusting image color and tone

•	adjustment filters

•	working with color channels


Adjusting image color and tone

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 provides you with filters and tools to make adjustments to the color and tone of images. When you adjust the color and tone, you adjust elements such as hue, saturation, brightness, contrast, or intensity. If you want to adjust the color and tone of the entire image, you can apply an adjustment filter directly to the image or apply a lens which exists on a separate object layer and can be edited without changing the original image. For information about lenses, see "Working with lenses."

You can adjust part of an image by editing the size and shape of a lens or by creating an editable area before applying an adjustment filter. For information about editable areas, see "Masking."

The table below shows the filters that can be used to make adjustments to images.

To adjust	Use the following filters
Exposure, adjust shadows, midtones, and highlights	Auto Equalize, Tone curve, Gamma, Sample/Target balance, Balance tone, Histogram equalization
Overall color	Color hue, Color balance, Channel mixer
Specific colors	Selective color, Replace colors
Contrast	Color tone, Brightness/Contrast/Intensity, Contrast enhancement, Local equalization
Saturation	Hue/Saturation/Lightness, Desaturate
Choosing color and tone filters

Some filters adjust the image automatically, while others give you varying degrees of control. For example, the Auto equalize filter adjusts the tonal range automatically, while the Tone curve filter lets you pinpoint and adjust tone, or color using separate color channels. More advanced filters, such as the Tone curve filter and the Contrast enhancement filter, are precise and can correct a variety of problems, but require practice. If you are new to color and tone correction, consider the following options:

•	Automatic adjustments: apply the Auto equalize filter. This filter improves the tone of most images instantly. If the filter doesn't correct the problem, you can undo the change, and try another filter.

•	Quick tone adjustments: apply the Color tone filter to brighten or darken an image, or improve contrast using thumbnail buttons. You can also try the Brightness/Contrast/Intensity filter. After you adjust the brightness, you must adjust the contrast and intensity to retain image detail.

•	Quick color adjustments: apply the Color hue filter to adjust the color using thumbnail buttons, or apply the Color balance filter which lets you increase or decrease specific color values. For example, if an image has a green cast, you can remove some green, or add a contrasting color (magenta) to neutralize the green cast.

Adjusting tone interactively

You can view the tonal range of an image using a histogram to evaluate and adjust the color and tone of an image. For example, a histogram can help you determine if there is hidden detail in an underexposed photo. A histogram has a horizontal bar chart that plots the brightness values of the pixels in your image on a scale from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the histogram represents the shadows of an image, the middle part represents the midtones, and the right part represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates how many pixels are at each brightness level. For example, a large number of pixels in the shadows (the left side of the histogram) indicates the presence of image detail in the dark areas of the image.

A histogram is available with the following filters:

•	Contrast enhancement

•	Histogram equalization

•	Sample/Target balance

Adjusting the color and tone using brush strokes

You can adjust the brightness, contrast, hue or saturation in part of an image by applying brush strokes. You can use preset brushes or create a custom brush. For more information, see "Creating custom brushes."

Related Topics

To adjust image color and tone

To adjust image tone interactively

To adjust image color and tone using brush strokes


To adjust image color and tone

1	Click Image [image] Adjust, and click an adjustment filter.

2	In the filter's dialog box, specify the settings you want.

 Note

•	For descriptions of adjustment filters, see "Adjustment filters."

 Tip

 Tip

•	You can compare the original image with the adjusted image by clicking the Dual window preview button in filter dialog boxes.

•	You can adjust the color and tone in an editable area by defining an editable area before you click an adjustment filter.

Related Topics

Adjusting image color and tone

To adjust image tone interactively

To adjust image color and tone using brush strokes


To adjust image tone interactively

1	Click Image [image] Adjust [image] Contrast enhancement.

2	Move the Input value clipping arrows to adjust shadows and highlights.

The arrow on the left lets you darken shadow areas. Drag the arrow until it points to the area where the histogram starts to spike.

The arrow on the right lets you lighten highlight areas. Drag the arrow until it points to the area where the histogram stops spiking.

3	Move the Gamma slider to adjust the midtones.

4	Move the Output range compression arrows to fine-tune the contrast:

The arrow on the left lets you lighten darker areas as you drag the arrow to the right.

The arrow on the right lets you darken light areas as you drag the arrow to the left.

You can also
Adjust image color	Choose a color channel from the Channel list box, before making adjustments.
Automatically redistribute pixels across the tonal range	Enable the Auto-adjust check box.
Set input and output values by sampling pixels in the image	Enable the Set input values or Set output values option from the Eyedropper sampling area. Click the Shadow eyedropper button to sample shadow areas, or click the Highlight eyedropper button to sample highlight areas.
 Note

•	The histogram displays adjusted values as a black outline and original values as gray shading.

 Tip

•	You can compare the original image with the adjusted image by clicking the Dual window preview button in filter dialog boxes.

Related Topics

Adjusting image color and tone

To adjust image color and tone

To adjust image color and tone using brush strokes


To adjust image color and tone using brush strokes

1	Select an object or the background image.

2	Open the Brush flyout, and click the Effect tool.

3	On the property bar, open the Effect tool picker, and click one of the following:

•	Brightness tool [image] brightens or darkens the image

•	Contrast tool [image] increases or decreases the contrast

•	Hue tool [image] shifts all hues along the color wheel by the number of degrees that you specify in the Amount box

•	Hue replacer tool [image] retains the brightness and saturation of the original colors, but replaces all hues with the current paint color

•	Sponge tool [image] saturates or desaturates the colors

•	Dodge/Burn tool [image] brightens (overexposes) or darkens (underexposes) the image

•	Tint tool [image] tints the image using the current paint color

4	Choose a preset brush from the Type list box on the property bar.

If you want to customize the brush, specify the settings you want on the property bar.

5	Drag in the image window.

You can also
Increase the effect of the brush across an area without clicking over the area multiple times	Click the Cumulative button on the Stroke attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is available only for some of the Effect tools. If the Brush settings Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Brush settings.
Apply the effect to an object and the background simultaneously	Click the Merge source button on the Dab attributes bar that displays in the Brush settings Docker window/palette. This option is only available when the Cumulative button is disabled.
Related Topics

Adjusting image color and tone

To adjust image color and tone

To adjust image tone interactively


Adjustment filters

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides you with the following filters to adjust the color and tone of images. Many of these filters are also preset lens types. For more information about using lenses, see "Working with lenses."

Contrast enhancement

The Contrast enhancement filter lets you adjust the tone, color, and contrast of an image while preserving shadow and highlight detail that is lost when you adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of an image. An interactive histogram lets you shift or compress brightness values to printable limits. The histogram can also be adjusted by sampling values from the image.

Local equalization

The Local equalization filter lets you enhance the contrast near image edges and reveals details in both light and dark regions. The filter uses neighboring pixels to create a stylized effect.

Histogram equalization

The Histogram equalization filter lets you view the tonal range of an image and redistribute the balance of shadows, midtones, and highlights in the composite channel or in individual color channels according to a preset histogram model.

Sample/Target balance

The Sample/Target balance filter lets you shift the tonal range of an image by sampling specific image areas. You can take samples from shadow, midtone, and highlight areas, and set target tonal values by choosing colors from a color model. For example, if you want to increase the tonal range, you can sample a shadow area to set the target color to black, and then sample a highlighted area to set the target color to white. You can also shift the tonal range to a specific color channel. The tonal range is displayed as a histogram.

Tone curve

The Tone curve filter lets you perform color and tonal corrections by adjusting individual color channels or the composite channel. Individual pixel values are plotted along a response curve that appears in a graph and represents the balance between shadows, midtones, and highlights. You can pinpoint a problem area and fix it on the response curve by adding nodes for curved or straight lines, drawing freehand, or using a gamma curve. You can also specify the outlying pixels at each end of the tonal range. Tone curve settings can be saved for use with other images.

Auto equalize

The Auto equalize filter performs a flat equalization of the shadows, midtones, and highlights in an image by automatically redistributing the significant pixel values throughout the tonal range.

Balance tone

The Balance tone filter equalizes shadows, midtones, and highlights in an image by automatically redistributing the pixel values throughout the tonal range.

Brightness/Contrast/Intensity

The Brightness/Contrast/Intensity filter lets you change the brightness, contrast, and intensity of an image. You can shift pixel values up or down the tonal range. Adjusting the brightness lightens or darkens all colors equally. Contrast and intensity usually work together because increasing the contrast can wash out detail in shadows and highlights; however, increasing the intensity can restore this detail.

Color balance

The Color balance filter lets you adjust the color balance of an image by shifting the colors between complementary pairs of the primary RGB color values and secondary CMY color values. This method is very useful for correcting color casts. For example, if you want to tone down the red in a photo, you can shift the color values from red to cyan. You can also change the hue values to change the colors used in an image.

Gamma

The Gamma filter lets you pick up detail in a low-contrast image without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. The Gamma filter corrects tones in an image based on the perception of the tonal value relative to the surrounding tonal values. For example, if you place a circle filled with 10-percent gray on a black background and an identical gray circle on a white background, the circle surrounded by black appears lighter than the circle surrounded by white [image] even though the brightness values are identical. The Gamma filter affects all image values but it is curve-based; consequently, changes are weighted toward the midtones.

Hue/Saturation/Lightness

The Hue/Saturation/Lightness filter lets you change the hue, saturation, and lightness values of an image or channel. Hue represents color; saturation represents color depth or richness; and lightness represents the overall percentage of white in an image. Color ribbons display the shift in hue.

Selective color

The Selective color filter lets you change a color by changing the percentage of the component process colors (CMYK values) in a color spectrum (reds, yellows, greens, cyans, blues, and magentas). You can also use this filter to add process color to the grayscale tonal component of an image. Selective color modifications increase and decrease the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black pixels that make up each primary color in the color spectrum. For example, decreasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum results in a color shift toward yellow. Conversely, increasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum causes a color shift toward magenta and an overall increase in red. The extent of color modification depends on the adjustment percentage method you choose.

Replace colors

The Replace colors filter lets you replace one image color with another color. A color mask is created to define the color to be replaced. Depending on the range you set, you can replace one color or shift an entire image from one color range to another. You can set the hue, saturation and lightness for the new color.

Desaturate

The Desaturate filter creates a grayscale image without changing the color mode, by automatically reducing the saturation of each color to zero, removing the hue component, and converting each color to its grayscale equivalent.

Color hue

The Color hue filter lets you change the hue of an image by clicking sample thumbnails. For example, you can remove a yellow cast from an image by clicking a thumbnail that adds blue. The intensity of the effect increases by a specified amount each time you click the thumbnail. The thumbnails also let you preview the color hue adjustment.

Color tone

The Color tone filter lets you change the brightness, saturation, and contrast of colors by clicking sample thumbnails. The intensity of the effect increases by a specified amount each time you click the thumbnail. The thumbnails also let you preview the color tone adjustment.


Working with color channels

You can adjust the color and tone of an image by making changes directly to the image's color channels. The number of color channels in an image depends on the number of components in the color mode associated with the image. For example, black-and-white, grayscale, duotone, and paletted images have only one color channel; RGB and Lab images have three channels; and CMYK images have four color channels. For more information about these color models, see "Understanding color models."

Displaying, mixing and editing color channels

Although color channels represent the colored components of an image, they are displayed by default as grayscale images in the image window. However, you can display these channels in their respective colors so that the red channel is tinted red, the blue channel is tinted blue, and so on.

You can mix color channels to balance the colors of an image. For example, if an image has too much red, you can adjust the red channel in an RGB image to improve image quality.

You can edit color channels the same way that you edit other grayscale images. For example, you can select areas, apply paints and fills, add special effects or filters, and cut and paste objects in the image channel.

Splitting and combining images using color channels

You can split an image into a series of 8-bit grayscale image files [image] one for each color channel of the color mode. Splitting an image into separate channel files lets you edit one channel without affecting the others, save channel information before you convert the image to another mode, or associate channels from one mode with another mode for editing purposes. For example, if you have an oversaturated RGB image, you can reduce the saturation by splitting the image into the HSB mode and reducing the saturation (S) channel. When you finish editing the images, you can combine them into one image. The images are combined automatically using equal values.

You can split an image into the following color channels.

Splitting mode	Color channels created
RGB	Red (R), green (G), blue (B)
CMYK	Cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), black (K)
HSB	Hue (H), saturation (S), brightness (B)
HLS	Hue (H), lightness (L), saturation (S)
YIQ	Luminance (Y), two chromaticity values (I, Q)
Lab	Luminosity (L), green/magenta (a), blue/yellow (b)
Merging channels or images using calculations

You can modify an existing image or create a new composite image by combining channel data from one image with the channel data of another image. A merge mode calculation is performed on the pixels and applied to a specified channel, an open image, or a new file. You can use calculations to correct images by merging channels from a single image or by merging two images that were created by splitting a single image. You can create a superimposed effect by merging different images. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes".

Related Topics

To display color channels

To mix color channels

To edit a color channel

To split an image using color channels

To combine images using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To display color channels

•	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

 Tips

•	(Windows)  You can display color channels using their respective colors by clicking Tools [image] Customization. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and enable the Tint screen color channels check box.

•	(Mac OS)  You can display color channels using their respective colors by clicking Edit [image] Customization. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and enable the Tint screen color channels check box.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To mix color channels

To edit a color channel

To split an image using color channels

To combine images using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To mix color channels

1	Click Image [image] Adjust [image] Channel mixer.

2	Choose a color mode from the Color model list box.

3	Choose an output channel from the Output channel list box.

4	Move the sliders in the Input channels area.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To display color channels

To edit a color channel

To split an image using color channels

To combine images using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To edit a color channel

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click the channel that you want to edit.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Edit the image.

 Tip

•	You can click the composite channel at the top of the Channels Docker window/palette to view the edited image.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To display color channels

To mix color channels

To split an image using color channels

To combine images using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To split an image using color channels

•	Click Image [image] Split channels to, and click a color mode.

 Note

•	Images in the CMYK and Lab color modes must be split into their original component channels.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To display color channels

To mix color channels

To edit a color channel

To combine images using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To combine images using color channels

1	Click Image [image] Combine channels.

2	In the Mode area, choose a color mode option.

3	In the Channel area, choose a channel option and click a filename from the Images list to associate the channel with a file.

4	Repeat step 3 until all the channels in the Channel area have been associated with an image from the Images list.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To display color channels

To mix color channels

To edit a color channel

To split an image using color channels

To merge color channels or images using calculations


To merge color channels or images using calculations

1	Click Image [image] Calculations.

2	In the Source 1 area, choose a filename from the Image list box.

3	Choose a channel type from the Channel list box.

4	In the Source 2 area, choose a filename from the Image list box.

5	Choose a channel type from the Channel list box.

6	In the Destination area, choose a filename from the Image list box, and a channel type from the Channel list box.

7	In the Method area, choose a merge mode from the list box.

8	Type a value in the Opacity box.

 Notes

•	The merge mode determines how colors mix. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

•	The Calculations command is grayed if the image contains objects. All objects in the image must be merged with the image background before you can perform image calculations.

Related Topics

Working with color channels

To display color channels

To mix color channels

To edit a color channel

To split an image using color channels

To combine images using color channels


Using paths to define image areas

Paths let you create precise, curved lines or outlined shapes in an image. You can use paths to edit a mask, apply text or brush strokes, or export irregularly shaped images contained within the path.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating paths

•	managing paths

•	shaping paths

•	adding and deleting path nodes

•	joining and breaking paths

•	changing node types

•	applying brush strokes to paths

•	working with clipping paths


Creating paths

Paths are line and curve segments connected by square endpoints called nodes. You can create paths from scratch, from a mask, or by duplicating an existing path. You can create more than one path on an image, but only one path is displayed on the image at a time.

Drawing paths

You can create Bézier paths and freehand paths. When you draw a path from scratch, the first path is Path 1, and subsequent paths are incrementally numbered.

You can create a Bézier path by placing nodes on an image. Straight or curved line segments join the nodes. Control points indicate the direction of the curve segment and its angle relative to the node. After you draw the path, you can edit the shape more precisely. For more information about shaping the path, see "Shaping paths.".

You can create a freehand path in the same way you would draw a line with a pencil. When you finish drawing the path, the number and type of nodes needed are automatically inserted along the path.

Converting paths and masks

You can convert masks to paths for more flexible editing features. When you convert a mask to a path, you create a path that follows the edge between an editable area and a protected area. A path lets you modify the shape of the editable area using the path editing features. For example, if you create a mask around an intricately shaped building in an image, you can convert the mask to a path and place nodes to precisely outline the building. You can then convert the path back to a mask.

You can also convert a path to a mask so that you can select, cut, or copy a defined area. Converting paths to masks lets you modify the shape using the mask tools.

When you convert a path to a mask, the mask is created in addition to the path so that both display on the image. You can then create an object from the editable area and move the object without affecting the position of the path. For more information, see "Creating objects."

Duplicating paths

When you duplicate a path, you create a copy of the path. You can make changes to the duplicated path without affecting the original path.

Related Topics

To draw a Bézier path

To draw a freehand path

To convert a mask to a path

To convert a path to a mask

To duplicate a path


To draw a Bézier path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Bézier button on the property bar.

3	Click where you want to place the first node.

4	Point to where you want to end the line segment, and do any of the following:

•	Click to place a node for a straight line

•	Drag to set the control points for a curved line

5	Click the Bézier button to complete the path.

 Tips

•	You can draw a new path by clicking the New path button in the Path Docker window/palette. If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

•	You can create a closed path by clicking the path's starting node.

Related Topics

Creating paths

To draw a freehand path

To convert a mask to a path

To convert a path to a mask

To duplicate a path


To draw a freehand path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Freehand button on the property bar.

3	Drag in the image window to draw the path.

 Tip

•	You can draw a new path by clicking the New path button in the Path Docker window/palette. If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

Related Topics

Creating paths

To draw a Bézier path

To convert a mask to a path

To convert a path to a mask

To duplicate a path


To convert a mask to a path

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Mask [image] Create [image] Path from mask.

3	Move the Smoothness slider.

Lower values tend to create more nodes for more precise editing, while higher values tend to create fewer nodes for a smoother path.

Related Topics

Creating paths

To draw a Bézier path

To draw a freehand path

To convert a path to a mask

To duplicate a path


To convert a path to a mask

•	Click Mask [image] Create [image] Mask from path.

 Note

•	When you convert an open path to a mask, the start and end nodes are connected automatically.

 Tip

•	If you have more than one path, select the one you want to convert by clicking the path thumbnail in the Path Docker window/palette. If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

Related Topics

Creating paths

To draw a Bézier path

To draw a freehand path

To convert a mask to a path

To duplicate a path


To duplicate a path

1	Click a path in the Path Docker window/palette.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

2	Click the flyout button in the Path Docker window/palette, and click Duplicate.

 Note

•	The duplicate path is listed in the Path Docker window/palette with the word "Copy."

Related Topics

Creating paths

To draw a Bézier path

To draw a freehand path

To convert a mask to a path

To convert a path to a mask


Managing paths

Saving, exporting and deleting paths

You can save one or more paths with an image when you save the image to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format. You can also export paths for use in other applications, such as CorelDRAW (CDR) or Adobe Illustrator (AI). If you want to use a path in other Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 images, you must export the path to the Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) file format. You can delete a path at any time.

Importing paths and vector images

You can import a path into a Corel PHOTO-PAINT image. You can open more than one path and switch between them in the image window. Corel PHOTO-PAINT also lets you import vector images from other drawing applications. When vector images are converted to paths, each point on the vector is converted to a node. To import text from CorelDRAW, you must first convert the text to curves.

Viewing a path

By default, a path displays in black. You can hide a path when you are working on an image, or you can change the default color of the path to make it more visible.

Related Topics

To save a path with an image

To export a path

To delete a path

To import a path or vector image

To hide a path

To change the default path color


To save a path with an image

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a name for the image in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Choose Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

 Note

•	You must export a path if you want to use it in other Corel PHOTO-PAINT images or other applications. For information about exporting paths, see "To export a path."

Related Topics

Managing paths

To export a path

To delete a path

To import a path or vector image

To hide a path

To change the default path color


To export a path

1	Click a path in the Path Docker window/palette.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

2	Click the flyout button in the Path Docker window/palette, and click Export path.

3	Choose the folder where you want to save the path.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Choose a file type from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Managing paths

To save a path with an image

To delete a path

To import a path or vector image

To hide a path

To change the default path color


To delete a path

1	Click a path in the Path Docker window/palette.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

2	Click the Delete current path button in the Path Docker window/palette window.

Related Topics

Managing paths

To save a path with an image

To export a path

To import a path or vector image

To hide a path

To change the default path color


To import a path or vector image

1	Click the flyout button in the Path Docker window/palette, and click Import path.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

2	Choose the folder where the path or vector image is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

 Note

•	Large, complex vector images are not suitable for importing as paths, because they contain too many nodes.

Related Topics

Managing paths

To save a path with an image

To export a path

To delete a path

To hide a path

To change the default path color


To hide a path

•	Click the Show/hide path button in the Path Docker window/palette.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

Related Topics

Managing paths

To save a path with an image

To export a path

To delete a path

To import a path or vector image

To change the default path color


To change the default path color

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Open the Path color picker, and click a color.

Related Topics

Managing paths

To save a path with an image

To export a path

To delete a path

To import a path or vector image

To hide a path


Shaping paths

You can change the shape of a path by selecting and moving its nodes, segments, or control points.

Selecting nodes

You must select a node before you can move it to another location, delete it, or drag its associated control points. Selecting several nodes lets you perform the same operation simultaneously on one or more path segments.

Moving path segments

You can move path segments by dragging nodes. When you drag a single node, the segments attached to it move with the node and remain connected. When you drag two or more adjacent nodes, the path segments between the nodes retain their form and move with the nodes.

Rotating and skewing path segments

Rotating paths lets you turn them around a pivot point, called the center of rotation, whereas skewing paths lets you slant them to one side while the opposite side remains stationary.

Sizing path segments

You can change the length or width of the path segments that you select, and you can scale selected path segments. When you scale path segments, they can either keep their proportion or become distorted as you size the path.

Reshaping a curve segment using control points

When you select a single node on a curve segment, two control points extend from it in opposite directions. You can change the shape of a curve by repositioning the control points. You may need to change the node type to achieve the shape you want. For more information about node types, see "Changing node types."

Related Topics

To select a path node

To move a path segment

To rotate a path segment

To skew a path segment

To size a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To select a path node

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Click a node.

You can also
Select multiple nodes	Hold down Shift, and click the nodes you want to select.
Select all nodes	Hold down Ctrl + Shift (Windows) or Command + Shift (Mac OS), and click a node.
 Tips

•	You can also select multiple nodes by clicking the Shape button and marquee selecting a group of nodes.

•	You can deselect a node by holding down Shift and clicking a node.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To move a path segment

To rotate a path segment

To skew a path segment

To size a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To move a path segment

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select the nodes on a path segment.

4	Drag the nodes to a new location.

 Tip

•	You can move path segments in precise increments by pressing an Arrow key to move the selected nodes the nudge distance, or by holding down Shift and pressing an Arrow key to move the selected nodes the super nudge distance.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To select a path node

To rotate a path segment

To skew a path segment

To size a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To rotate a path segment

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select the nodes on a path segment.

4	Click Object [image] Edit Path [image] Rotate and skew nodes.

5	Drag a rotation handle.

 Tip

•	You can also drag the center of rotation to a new location.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To select a path node

To move a path segment

To skew a path segment

To size a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To skew a path segment

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select the nodes on a path segment.

4	Click Object [image] Edit path [image] Rotate and skew nodes.

5	Drag a skewing handle.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To select a path node

To move a path segment

To rotate a path segment

To size a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To size a path segment

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select the nodes on a path segment.

4	Click Object [image] Edit path [image] Stretch and scale nodes.

5	On the highlighting box, drag any of the following handles:

•	side selection handles [image] stretch the selected path segments

•	corner selection handles [image] scale the selected path segments

 Tip

•	You can also size path segments by clicking the Elastic mode button on the extended property bar.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To select a path node

To move a path segment

To rotate a path segment

To skew a path segment

To shape a curve using the control points


To shape a curve using the control points

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select a curve node.

4	Drag the control points.

Related Topics

Shaping paths

To select a path node

To move a path segment

To rotate a path segment

To skew a path segment

To size a path segment


Adding and deleting path nodes

Increasing or decreasing the number of nodes on a path lets you change the shape of the line and curve segments with greater control.

Adding and deleting nodes

You can add nodes to a path if the existing segments, nodes, and control points do not let you shape a path the way you want. You can add one node at a time or several at once. When you add a node, you can choose where it displays on the line segment.

When you delete nodes, the shape of the path can change, depending on the position of the nodes that are removed.

Smoothing paths

Paths you create from masks or draw freehand style can contain more nodes than required to maintain their shape. These extra nodes can give paths a rough appearance. You can smooth the path by removing the extra nodes from the entire path or from a section of the path.

Related Topics

To add a node to a path

To delete a node from a path

To smooth a path


To add a node to a path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Click where you want to add a node on the path.

4	On the extended property bar, click the Add node button.

 Tips

•	You can add a node at the midpoint of a path segment by selecting a node and clicking the Add node button on the extended property bar. The node is added between the selected node and the node that precedes it in the path.

•	You can also add a node by double-clicking where you want to add the node to a path segment.

Related Topics

Adding and deleting path nodes

To delete a node from a path

To smooth a path


To delete a node from a path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select a node.

4	On the extended property bar, click the Delete node(s) button.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a node by double-clicking it.

Related Topics

Adding and deleting path nodes

To add a node to a path

To smooth a path


To smooth a path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select an area of a path.

4	On the extended property bar, type a value in the Smooth curve box.

You can enter values from 1 to 100. Lower values remove some nodes that are not necessary to maintain the shape of the path. Higher values remove more nodes, while still preserving the path shape.

Related Topics

Adding and deleting path nodes

To add a node to a path

To delete a node from a path


Joining and breaking paths

You can join or break path segments to create open or closed paths on an image. Because nodes act as connective joints for a path, you can join or break segments only at a node. If a node does not exist at the point where you want to break segments, you must add a node at that point.

You can join two nodes in a path if they are at the end of open segments. For example, if you want to close an open path, you can join the start and end nodes. You can also join subpaths.

If you want to open a closed path or create subpaths, you can break the connection between two nodes. When you break a path, new nodes are added to the ends of the disconnected segments, creating two subpaths.

Related Topics

To join path nodes

To break a path


To join path nodes

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select two nodes positioned at the open end of path segments or subpaths.

4	On the extended property bar, click the Join selected nodes button.

 Note

•	When you join two nodes that are far apart, they join in the middle of their original positions.

Related Topics

Joining and breaking paths

To break a path


To break a path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select a node.

4	On the extended property bar, click the Break selected node button.

5	Drag the node away from the path.

Related Topics

Joining and breaking paths

To join path nodes


Changing node types

When you change a node type, you change the way segments attached to the node behave. While a new node type may not immediately affect a path's shape, it will change the shape when you move the control points to modify the path.

By changing the node type, you can change a line segment to a curve segment or change a curve segment to a line segment. When you change a line segment to a curve segment, you must select the nodes at either end of the segment to view the curve's control points.

There are three types of curve nodes: smooth, symmetrical, and sharp. Symmetrical nodes force the curve on one side of a node to mirror the curve on the other side of the node. Sharp nodes add sharp bends to a path. Smooth nodes create a smooth transition between two segments.

Related Topics

To change a path segment to a curve or a line

To change the curve type of a path node


To change a path segment to a curve or a line

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select one or more nodes on a path segment.

4	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	To line

•	To curve

 Tip

•	You can also change a path segment to a curve or a line by clicking on the segment and clicking the To line or To curve buttons on the property bar.

Related Topics

Changing node types

To change the curve type of a path node


To change the curve type of a path node

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Click the Shape button on the property bar.

3	Select a node.

4	On the extended property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Symmetrical curve

•	Sharp curve

•	Smooth curve

 Notes

•	When a curve segment is connected to a line segment with a smooth node, you can only move the control point on the curve side along an imaginary line that follows the extension of the line segment.

•	A curve node that is connected to a line segment must be Smooth or Sharp.

Related Topics

Changing node types

To change a path segment to a curve or a line


Applying brush strokes to paths

You can paint along a path to apply precise brush strokes to an image. For information about applying brush strokes, see "Painting."

You can also repeat a saved brush stroke along a path. You can edit the saved brush stroke to create new effects by adjusting the size, number, angle, and color of the brush stroke.

Related Topics

To apply a brush stroke along a path

To repeat a saved brush stroke along a path


To apply a brush stroke along a path

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Path tool.

2	Select a path.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Paint tool

•	Effect tool

•	Clone tool

•	Image sprayer tool

•	Eraser tool

•	Replace color brush tool

4	On the property bar, set any attributes for the tool.

5	Click Object [image] Edit path [image] Brushstroke from path.

If you want to reapply the brush stroke, click Edit [image] Repeat brushstroke

 Tips

•	You can reverse the direction of a stroke by clicking Object [image] Edit path [image] Reverse Brushstroke from Path.

•	You can paint along a specific part of a path by selecting the area with a mask tool. For information on masking, see "Masking."

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes to paths

To repeat a saved brush stroke along a path


To repeat a saved brush stroke along a path

1	Click one of the following:

•	Paint tool

•	Effect tool

•	Clone tool

•	Image sprayer tool

•	Eraser tool

•	Replace color brush tool

2	On the property bar, set the attributes for the tool.

3	Click Edit [image] Repeat brushstroke

4	In the Repeat stroke dialog box, choose a stroke from the Stroke list box.

5	Modify any attributes.

6	Click the Repeat stroke along path button.

 Tip

•	You can load a path for the brush stroke by clicking the flyout button above the Stroke list box, and clicking Load path as stroke. Choose the folder where the path file is stored and double-click the filename before modifying the attributes in the Repeat stroke dialog box.

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes to paths

To apply a brush stroke along a path


Working with clipping paths

Clipping paths let you create non-rectangular images by outlining the area selected by a path, and making the rest of the image transparent when the image is viewed in another application. For example, if you have a Corel PHOTO-PAINT image of a vase on a table, you can create a clipping path around the vase and export the vase image area to another application. If you do not use a clipping path, the entire image is encased in a square or rectangular frame, losing the shape of the vase area.

To send a clipping path to another application, you must export the contents of the path as an encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file. You can also print the area enclosed by a clipping path and specify a flatness value that controls the accuracy with which curved path segments are rendered on an output device, such as a printer.

Related Topics

To create a clipping path

To save a clipping path as an EPS file

To print the area enclosed by a clipping path


To create a clipping path

1	Create a path around an image area.

2	Click the flyout button in the Path Docker window/palette, and click Set as clipping path.

If the Path Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Path.

 Note

•	A clipping path icon displays beside the path filename in the Path Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Working with clipping paths

To save a clipping path as an EPS file

To print the area enclosed by a clipping path


To save a clipping path as an EPS file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the clipping path.

3	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as list box (Mac OS).

4	Choose Encapsulated PostScript from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

5	In the Image header area, enable the Include thumbnail check box.

6	In the Clipping area, enable the Clip to check box.

7	Enable the Clipping path option.

8	Type a value in the Flatness box.

9	Enable the Discard image data outside clipping region check box.

 Tip

•	You can save an entire image with a path by disabling the Discard image data outside clipping region check box. However, only the selection inside the clipping path is printed on a PostScript printer.

Related Topics

Working with clipping paths

To create a clipping path

To print the area enclosed by a clipping path


To print the area enclosed by a clipping path

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Type a value in the Set flatness to box.

Related Topics

Working with clipping paths

To create a clipping path

To save a clipping path as an EPS file


Working with color

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 lets you choose and create colors using a wide variety of industry-standard palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and edit custom color palettes to store frequently used colors for future use. To choose a single color, you can use the color control area or sample colors directly from images.

You can also customize how color palettes display on your screen by changing the size of swatches, the number of rows in palettes, and other properties.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	choosing colors

•	creating custom color palettes

•	opening and editing custom color palettes

•	setting color palette properties

•	understanding color models


Choosing colors

You can choose background, foreground, and fill colors using the color control area, color palettes, sampling, color viewers, color harmonies, or color blends.

For information about applying the colors you choose, see "Applying uniform fills," "Painting," and "Working with objects."

Choosing a color using the color control area

In the color control area, you can view the selected foreground, background, and fill colors, and you can choose new colors. The foreground color applies to all of the paint tools, and to the color of text when you first type it. The background color applies to the background of the image window, while the fill color swatch indicates the selected fill type and color.

Choosing a color using the default color palette

A color palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose foreground, background, and fill colors using the default color palette, which contains 99 colors from the RGB color model.

Choosing a color using fixed or custom color palettes

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these are HKS Colors, FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, and TRUMATCH. It may be useful to have on hand a manufacturer's swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when printed.

Some fixed color palettes [image] PANTONE, HKS Colors, TOYO, DIC, Focoltone, and SpectraMaster [image] are collections of spot colors. If you want to use these colors, but you don't want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when you print. For more information, see "Printing color separations."

Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette. You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working with custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes" and "Opening and editing custom color palettes."

Sampling colors

When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or image, you can sample the color to achieve an exact match. By default, you sample a single pixel from the image window.

When you sample a color from a photo, what looks to be a solid-colored area may actually be subtly shaded or dithered. In this case, it is useful to average the colors of pixels in a larger sample area. You can set the sample area to 3 x 3 pixels, or to 5 x 5 pixels for high-resolution images. You can also sample pixels in a selected area.

If you want to sample and use numerous colors from the image window, you can store them in a custom color palette. For more information on custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes" and "Opening and editing custom color palettes."

Choosing a color using color viewers

Color viewers give a representation of a range of colors using either one-dimensional or three-dimensional shapes. The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model, but you can use this viewer to choose CMY, or RGB colors. For information about color models, see "Understanding color models."

Choosing a color using color harmonies

Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over a color wheel. Each vertical row in the color grid begins with the color located at one of the points on the superimposed shape.

The colors at each corner of the shape are always complementary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you choose. The color harmonies allow you to choose the color model you prefer to use and are most useful when you're choosing several colors for a project.

Choosing a color using color blends

When you choose a color using color blends, you combine base colors to get the color you want. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base colors you choose.

Related Topics

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using the color control area

1	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

•	Foreground color swatch

•	Background color swatch

2	Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

3	Click in the color selection area to choose a color.

You can also
Choose a fill color	Double-click the Fill color swatch in the color control area, click the Uniform fill button in the Select fill dialog box, and click Edit.
Return color swatches to their default colors	Click the Reset color icon. The foregound and fill colors return to black, and the background color returns to white.
Switch the foreground and background colors	Click the arrow in the top, right corner of the color control area.
 Tip

•	You can also choose foreground, background, and fill colors using the Color Docker window/palette by clicking Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Color.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using the default color palette

To	Do the following
Choose a foreground color	Click a color swatch.
Choose a background color	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and click a color swatch.
Choose a fill color	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a color swatch.
Choose from different shades of a color	Click and hold a color swatch to display a pop-up color picker, and click a color.
View more colors in the default color palette	Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom of the color palette.
 Tips

•	You can display color names by pointing to a color swatch.

•	You can also choose foreground, background, and fill colors using the Color Docker window/palette by clicking Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Color.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

1	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

•	Foreground color swatch

•	Background color swatch

2	Click the Palettes tab.

3	Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box.

4	Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

5	Click a color in the color selection area.

You can also
Choose a fill color	Double-click the Fill color swatch in the color control area, click the Uniform fill button in the Select fill dialog box, and click Edit.
Swap colors	Click Options [image] Swap colors. This swaps the Old color (the current foreground or background color) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area).
 Notes

•	Each color swatch on a fixed color palette that is marked with a small white square is a spot color.

•	You should use the same color model for all colors in an image; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

 Tip

•	You can also access color palettes in the Color Docker window/palette by clicking the Color palettes button, and choosing a palette from the list box. If the Color Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Color.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To sample a color

1	Click the Eyedropper tool.

2	Click the image to choose a foreground color.

The default sample size is 1 pixel.

You can also
Increase the sample size	Click the Eyedropper 3 x 3 button on the extended property bar.
Increase the sample size for a high-resolution image	Click the Eyedropper 5 x 5 button on the extended property bar.
Sample from a selected area	Click the Eyedropper selection button on the extended property bar.
Choose a background color	Press Control (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and click the image.
Choose a fill color	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the image.
 Note

•	In the image window, a preview swatch is attached to the Eyedropper tool, along with a box listing the color model component values.

 Tips

•	You can also activate the Eyedropper tool by pressing the E key. Click the Spacebar to return to the previously selected tool.

•	You can also view the color model component values for an image pixel, such as the red, green, and blue components of a pixel in an RGB image, using the Image info Docker window/palette. If the Image info Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Info.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using a color viewer

1	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

•	Foreground color swatch

•	Background color swatch

2	Click the Models tab.

3	Choose a color model from the Model list box.

4	Click Options [image] Color viewers, and choose a color viewer.

5	Move the color slider.

6	Click a color in the color selection area.

You can also
Choose a fill color	Double-click the Fill color swatch in the color control area, click the Uniform fill button in the Select fill dialog box, and click Edit.
Swap colors	Click Options [image] Swap colors. This swaps the Old color (the current foreground or background color) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area).
 Notes

•	If you choose a color that is out of the printer's gamut, Corel PHOTO-PAINT displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

•	You should use the same color model for all colors in an image; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output.

 Tip

•	You can also access color models in the Color Docker window/palette by clicking the Color viewers button, and choosing a color model from the list box. If the Color Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers [image] Color.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using color harmonies

1	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

•	Foreground color swatch

•	Background color swatch

2	Click the Mixers tab.

3	Click Options [image] Mixers [image] Color harmonies.

4	Choose a shape from the Hues list box.

5	Choose an option from the Variation list box.

6	Drag the black dot around the color wheel to the color you want to use.

7	Click a color swatch on the color palette below the color wheel.

 Note

•	If you choose a color that is out of the printer's gamut, Corel PHOTO-PAINT displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

 Tips

•	You can use this procedure to choose a fill color by double-clicking the Fill color swatch in the color control area. Click the Uniform fill button in the Select fill dialog box, and click Edit.

•	You can swap the Old color (the current foreground or background color) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using color blends

1	In the color control area of the toolbox, double-click one of the following:

•	Foreground color swatch

•	Background color swatch

2	Click the Mixers tab.

3	Click Options [image] Mixers [image] Color blend.

4	Open each color picker, and click a color.

5	Click a color in the color selection area.

 Note

•	You can only blend colors that are in your default color palette. If you want to blend other colors, change the default color palette. For information, see "To open a custom color palette."

 Tips

•	You can use this procedure to choose a fill color by double-clicking the Fill color swatch in the color control area. Click the Uniform fill button in the Select fill dialog box, and click Edit.

•	You can swap the Old color (the current foreground or background color) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the color control area

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To sample a color

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies


Creating custom color palettes

Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. A number of preset custom color palettes are available; however, you can create color palettes from scratch. Custom color palettes are useful when you frequently choose the same colors, or when you want to work with a set of colors that look good together.

You can create a custom color palette by choosing each color manually, or by using colors in an object, an editable area, or an entire image.

Related Topics

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from an editable area

To create a color palette from an image


To create a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Palette editor.

2	Click New palette.

3	Type a filename.

4	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from an editable area

To create a color palette from an image


To create a color palette from an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Create palette from selection.

3	Type a filename

4	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an editable area

To create a color palette from an image


To create a color palette from an editable area

1	Define an editable area.

2	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Create palette from visible.

3	Click Save palette as.

4	Type a filename.

5	Click Save.

 Note

•	For information about defining editable areas, see "Defining editable areas."

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from an image


To create a color palette from an image

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Create palette from document.

2	Type a filename.

3	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from an editable area


Opening and editing custom color palettes

You can open a custom color palette, and you can set it as the default color palette. For more information about customizing color palettes, see "Setting color palette properties."

When you create a custom color palette, the color palette is empty; however, you can edit it by adding the colors you want to include, as well as changing, deleting, sorting, and renaming colors.

Related Topics

To open a custom color palette

To edit a custom color palette


To open a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Open palette.

2	Choose the folder where the custom color palette is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

If you want to set the opened custom color palette as the default palette, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) anywhere on the edge of the color palette border, and click Set as default.

 Tip

•	You can close a custom color palette by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the edge of the color palette, and clicking Palette [image] Close.

Related Topics

Opening and editing custom color palettes

To edit a custom color palette


To edit a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Palette editor.

2	Choose a palette from the list box.

3	Modify any colors.

To	Do the following
Add a color	Click Add color. Click a color in the color selection area, and click Add to palette.
Change a color	In the color selection area, click the color that you want to change, click Edit color, and click the new color in the color selection area.
Delete a color	Click a color in the color selection area, and click Delete color.
Sort colors	Click Sort colors, and click a color sorting method.
Rename a color	Click a color in the color selection area, and type a color name in the Name box.
 Tip

•	You can delete multiple colors from a custom color palette by holding down Shift or Ctrl, and clicking in the color selection area.

Related Topics

Opening and editing custom color palettes

To open a custom color palette


Setting color palette properties

Corel PHOTO-PAINT offers you the option of customizing color palettes.

If you are using Windows, color palettes can be either docked or floating. Docking a color palette attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a color palette pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around.

You can set the right mouse button action (Windows) or the Control-click action (Mac OS) for color swatches to either display a context menu or to set the fill color. You can also adjust the color swatch border and size.

Related Topics

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To	Do the following
Dock a color palette	Click the top of the color palette border, and drag the color palette to any edge of the application window until a thin black toolbar outline displays.
Undock a color palette	Click the color palette border, and drag the color palette away from the edge of the application window.
Change the number of rows on a docked color palette	Click Tools [image] Customization. In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. Type a value in the Maximum palette rows when docked box.
 Note

•	You can set a maximum of seven rows in a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Context menu

•	Set fill color

 Tip

•	If you enable Set fill color, you can still display the context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

1	Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Context menu

•	Set fill color

 Tip

•	If you enable Set fill color, you can still display the context menu by Control + clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To customize the color swatches


To customize the color swatches

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Wide borders

•	Large swatches

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)


Understanding color models

You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods to define colors, each model defining colors through the use of specific color components. There are a range of color models to choose from when creating graphics.

CMYK color model

The CMYK color model defines color using the following components:

•	cyan (C)

•	magenta (M)

•	yellow (Y)

•	black (K)

The cyan, magenta, yellow, and black components are the amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink that a CMYK color contains and are measured in percent from 0 to 100.

The CMYK color model is a subtractive color model. Subtractive color models use reflected light to display color. Printed materials are produced using the CMYK color model. When you combine cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, so that the value of each component is 100, the result is black. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure white.

RGB color model

The RGB color model defines color using the following components:

•	red (R)

•	green (G)

•	blue (B)

The red, green, and blue components are the amounts of red, green, and blue light that an RGB color contains and are measured in values ranging from 0 to 255.

The RGB color model is an additive color model. Additive color models use transmitted light to display color. Monitors use the RGB color model. When you add red light, blue light, and green light together, so that the value of each component is 255, the color white displays. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure black.

HSB color model

The HSB color model defines color using the following components:

•	hue (H)

•	saturation (S)

•	brightness (B)

Hue describes the pigment of a color and is measured in degrees from 0 to 359 (for example, 0 degrees is red, 60 degrees yellow, 120 degrees green, 180 degrees cyan, 240 degrees blue, and 300 degrees magenta). Saturation describes the vividness or dullness of a color and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the more vivid the color). Brightness describes the amount of white that the color contains and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the brighter the color).

Grayscale color model

The Grayscale color model defines color using only one component, lightness, and is measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. Each Grayscale color has equal values of the red, green, and blue components of the RGB color model.


Cropping, stitching and changing orientation

You can crop an image to remove unwanted areas, or combine multiple images to create a single, large image. You can also change the orientation of an image by flipping it or rotating it.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	cropping images

•	stitching images together

•	changing image orientation

You can also change the size of an image without removing or adding image areas by changing the image dimensions and resolution. For more information, see "Changing image dimensions, resolution, and paper size."


Cropping images

You can crop an image to remove unwanted areas and improve its composition. Cropping allows you to select a rectangular area that you want to keep and discard the rest. As a result, you reduce the file size of an image without affecting its resolution.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 also lets you crop around the editable area of a mask; however, the resulting image is always rectangular. For information about masks, see "Masking."

You can also easily crop a single-color border surrounding an image, such as a white edge surrounding an old photograph.

Related Topics

To crop an image

To crop a border color from an image

To crop to an editable area of a mask


To crop an image

1	Click the Crop tool.

2	Drag to select an area on the image.

3	Double-click inside the cropping area.

You can also
Enlarge or reduce the cropping area	Drag the cropping handles.
Move the cropping area	Click and drag inside the cropping area to reposition it.
Rotate the cropping area to straighten it	Click inside the cropping area to display the rotation handles. Drag the rotation handles to align the cropping area with the image area you want to crop.
Expand the cropping area outside the original image	Click Image [image] Crop [image] Expand, and drag a cropping handle outside the image.
 Tip

•	You can hide the crop overlay to view the image you are cropping more clearly. Click Image [image] Crop [image] Crop overlay.

•	You can also crop an image area by clicking the Crop tool and typing values in the Size and Position boxes on the property bar.

Related Topics

Cropping images

To crop a border color from an image

To crop to an editable area of a mask


To crop a border color from an image

1	Click Image [image] Crop [image] Crop border color.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Background [image] crops the color specified in the Background color swatch in the color control area of the toolbox

•	Foreground [image] crops the color specified in the Foreground color swatch in the color control area of the toolbox

•	Other [image] crops the color you choose using the color picker or the Eyedropper tool

3	In the Tolerance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Normal [image] determines the color tolerance based on the similarity of hue values between adjacent pixels

•	HSB mode [image] determines the color tolerance based on the similarity of hue, saturation, and brightness levels between adjacent pixels

4	Move the Tolerance slider to set the tolerance for the color that you want to crop.

You may need to experiment with different Tolerance slider positions to successfully remove the border color.

Related Topics

Cropping images

To crop an image

To crop to an editable area of a mask


To crop to an editable area of a mask

1	Define an editable area on an image.

2	Click Image [image] Crop [image] Crop to mask.

 Note

•	For more information about defining editable areas, see "Masking."

Related Topics

Cropping images

To crop an image

To crop a border color from an image


Stitching images together

Image stitching allows you to seamlessly join 2D images. For instance, you can scan a large image in smaller, overlapping pieces and reassemble them.

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can stitch multiple images interactively. You can select, move, and rotate the images, as well as change your view of them to allow more precise positioning. As you position the images, overlapping areas will turn black to signal that you have aligned the edges correctly. You can then save the stitched images as a single, flattened image, or as objects that you can continue to edit individually.

You can stitch images in all color modes except black-and-white, duotone, 16-bit grayscale, 48-bit RGB, and multichannel. If the selected images use the same color mode, except paletted color mode, the new file will use that color mode as well. If the selected files use a different color mode, or are all paletted color mode, the new file uses RGB color mode. For more information about color modes, see "Changing color modes."

Related Topics

To stitch images together


To stitch images together

1	Open the images you want to stitch together.

2	Click Image [image] Stitch.

3	Choose a filename from the Source files list, and click Add.

If you want to select all open images, click Add all.

4	To change the position of an image in the Selected files list, click a filename, and click one of the following buttons:

•	Up button

•	Down button

5	Click OK.

6	In the Image stitch dialog box, click the Selection tool.

7	In the image stitch window, drag an image to align it with another image.

Repeat to align all images.

8	Type a value in the Blend images list box to define the number of overlapping pixels used to blend images together.

9	Enable one of the following options:

•	Combine to background [image] creates a single, flattened image

•	Create objects from images [image] creates a stitched image in which each source image becomes a separate object. You can later adjust the brightness and contrast of each object so they match.

You can also
View image alignment	Click the Difference tool. Overlapping image areas are highlighted; correctly aligned image edges display as black.
Rotate one or more selected images	Click the Rotate tool, and drag an image. If you want to rotate an image by a precise angle, type a value in the Rotate image box.
Zoom in to inspect an area where images join	Click the Zoom in tool, and click where you want a close-up view.
Zoom out	Click the Zoom out tool, and click the image.
View areas outside the image stitch window	Click the Pan tool, and drag an image.
 Note

•	Stitched images that are flattened have a smaller file size than stitched images containing separate objects.

 Tip

•	Use the Arrow keys with the Selection tool, the Rotate tool, and the Pan tool to move, rotate and view images precisely in the image stitch window.

Related Topics

Stitching images together


Changing image orientation

You can change the orientation of an image by flipping or rotating it in the image window. You can flip an image horizontally or vertically to reposition a scanned image or to create unique effects.

When you rotate an image, you can specify the angle and direction of rotation, as well as the paper color that is visible after the image is rotated.

Related Topics

To flip an image

To rotate an image


To flip an image

•	Click Image [image] Flip, and click one of the following:

•	Flip horizontally

•	Flip vertically

Related Topics

Changing image orientation

To rotate an image


To rotate an image

1	Click Image [image] Rotate [image] Rotate custom.

2	Type a value in the Angle box.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Clockwise

•	Counterclockwise

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Maintain original image size [image] maintains the size of the original image

•	Anti-aliasing [image] smooths the edges in the image

5	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can rotate an image by clicking Image [image] Rotate, and clicking 90° Clockwise, 90° Counterclockwise, or 180°.

Related Topics

Changing image orientation

To flip an image


Creating and editing movies

With Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can make movies and QuickTime VR movies. Movies contain a series of images, called frames. As you change the position of objects in successive frames, the objects appear to move. QuickTime VR lets you add a third dimension to your movies; you can create interactive, virtual reality environments.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening and playing movies

•	creating movies

•	modifying frame sequence and frame rate in a movie

•	saving movies

•	working with QuickTime VR movies


Opening and playing movies

You can open all or part of a movie. Partial movies open and play more quickly, because your computer has less data to process at one time.

The movie controls let you play a movie, rewind to the beginning, fast forward to the end, or stop at any frame. You can also step forward or backward through a movie one frame at a time, or jump to a specific frame.

Related Topics

To open a movie

To use movie playback controls


To open a movie

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the folder where the movie is stored.

3	Click the filename.

4	From the list box beside the Files of type list box (Windows) or Image size (Mac OS), choose one of the following:

•	Full image

•	Partial load

If you choose Partial load, in the Partial load movie dialog box type values in the From and To boxes to specify the range of frames you want to open.

 Notes

•	(Windows) If you are using the Windows operating system, you cannot choose Partial load for QuickTime VR movies.

•	(Mac OS) If you are using the Mac OS, you cannot choose Partial load for animated GIFs.

Related Topics

Opening and playing movies

To use movie playback controls


To use movie playback controls

To	Do one of the following
Play a movie	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Play movie. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Play movie.
Stop a movie	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Stop movie. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Stop movie.
Rewind to the beginning of a movie	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Rewind to beginning. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Rewind to beginning.
Fast forward to the end of a movie	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Advance to end. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Advance to end.
Move to a different frame	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Go to frame and, type a frame number in the Frame box. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Go to frame and, type a frame number in the Frame box.
Move forward one frame	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Advance one frame. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Advance one frame.
Move back one frame	• (Windows) Click Movie [image] Rewind one frame. • (Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Rewind one frame.
 Tips

•	You can also use the controls in the Movie Docker window/palette to play, stop, rewind, fast forward, step forward a frame, or step back a frame in a movie. If the Movie Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

•	You can also move to a specific frame by double-clicking the thumbnail of a frame in the Movie Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Opening and playing movies

To open a movie


Creating movies

Movies contain a background and objects in the foreground.

Creating the background

When you create a movie background, you can choose the background color, size, resolution, and color mode. You can also create a movie background using an existing image. This background image automatically becomes the first and only frame of the new movie file. You can add a frame using an existing image as the background. For information about adding frames, see "To insert frames into a movie."

Creating moving objects

In movies, you can animate objects by moving them in small increments from one frame to the next. An object displays in each frame, unless you make it a permanent part of the current frame by combining it with the background. For more information about creating and combining objects, see "Working with objects."

You can view multiple frames simultaneously to help you position an object from frame to frame. Adjacent frames are superimposed on the current frame so you can position the moving object relative to its neighbors.

Related Topics

To create a movie background

To create a movie background from an existing image

To add a frame using an existing image as the background

To create a moving object

To position a moving object relative to other frames


To create a movie background

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box.

3	Open the Background color picker, and click a background color.

4	Choose a frame size from the Size list box.

If you want to use a different unit of measure, choose an option from the list box beside the Width box.

5	Choose a value from the Resolution list box.

6	Enable the Create a movie check box.

7	Type a value between 1 and 1000 in the Number of frames box to specify the number of frames in the movie.

 Notes

•	To create an animated GIF for a Web page, choose 8-bit paletted color mode from the Color mode list box. This creates a smaller file to download. For information about the paletted color mode, see "Changing the color mode of images."

•	The maximum resolution a color monitor can display is 96 dpi. Choosing a higher dpi reduces playback performance.

Related Topics

Creating movies

To create a movie background from an existing image

To add a frame using an existing image as the background

To create a moving object

To position a moving object relative to other frames


To create a movie background from an existing image

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Movie [image] Create from document.

•	(Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Create from document.

The image is the background for the first frame.

Related Topics

Creating movies

To create a movie background

To add a frame using an existing image as the background

To create a moving object

To position a moving object relative to other frames


To add a frame using an existing image as the background

1	In the Movie Docker window/palette, double-click the frame thumbnail preceding the frame to which you want to add the background.

If the Movie Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

2	Click Movie [image] Insert from file.

3	Double-click the image filename.

4	In the Insert file dialog box, enable the After option.

Related Topics

Creating movies

To create a movie background

To create a movie background from an existing image

To create a moving object

To position a moving object relative to other frames


To create a moving object

1	Select an object with the Object pick tool.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine objects with background.

4	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

5	In the Movie Docker window/palette, click the Next frame button.

If you want to add a frame, click the Insert frame button in the Movie Docker window/palette.

6	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Paste as new object.

7	Position the object in the current frame.

8	Click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine objects with background.

Related Topics

Creating movies

To create a movie background

To create a movie background from an existing image

To add a frame using an existing image as the background

To position a moving object relative to other frames


To position a moving object relative to other frames

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

2	Click the Overlay button in the Movie Docker window/palette.

3	Move the red Frame overlay slider to specify the frames that you want to view.

4	Move the Overlay slider to change the opacity of the superimposed objects.

5	Select an object in the current frame with the Object pick tool.

6	Position the object in the current frame.

7	Click Object [image] Combine [image] Combine objects with background.

 Tip

•	You can reposition the red Frame overlay slider by double-clicking the frame thumbnail to which you want it moved.

Related Topics

Creating movies

To create a movie background

To create a movie background from an existing image

To add a frame using an existing image as the background

To create a moving object


Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

You can edit movies by reorganizing and customizing the frame sequence. You can insert blank frames or movie files. You can also move frames and entire movie or image files. You can also delete frames to reduce movie playback time.

The display time determines the length of time that each frame displays on the screen. By changing the display time, you control the speed of moving objects. You can set a display time for individual or multiple frames.

Related Topics

To change the order of movie frames

To insert frames into a movie

To insert files into a movie

To delete frames from a movie

To change the display time of a frame


To change the order of movie frames

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Movie [image] Move frame.

•	(Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Move frame.

2	In the Move frame box, type a value to specify the first frame to move.

3	In the To frame box, type a value to specify the last frame to move.

If you want to move only one frame, type the same frame number in both boxes.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Before [image] positions the frames before the frame specified in the Frame box

•	After [image] positions the frames after the frame specified in the Frame box

5	Type a value in the Frame box to specify the location of the frames.

 Note

•	In the Movie Docker window/palette, a red outline around a frame thumbnail indicates the active frame. This is the frame that is displayed in the image window. Active frames can be edited. There can only be one active frame at a time.
Selected frames are indicated by blue highlighting. Selected frames can be moved, deleted, and have their display time changed. There can be more than one selected frame at a time.

 Tip

•	You can also change the order of movie frames by dragging and dropping frames in the Movie Docker window/palette. If the Movie Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

Related Topics

Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

To insert frames into a movie

To insert files into a movie

To delete frames from a movie

To change the display time of a frame


To insert frames into a movie

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Movie [image] Insert frame.

•	(Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Insert frame.

2	Type a value in the Insert box to specify the number of frames to add.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Before [image] inserts the frames before the frame specified in the Frame box

•	After [image] inserts the frames after the frame specified in the Frame box

4	Type a value in the Frame box to specify the location of the new frames.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Copy current frame [image] adds frames using a copy of the current frame

•	Use background color [image] adds blank frames using the current background color

 Notes

•	If you are inserting frames into a partially loaded movie, use the Movie Docker window/palette to determine where to locate the new frames. The Movie Docker window/palette displays the actual frame numbers from the full movie. The movie status bar, located at the bottom of the image window, displays only the total number of frames in the partially loaded movie, not the frame numbers. If the Movie Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

•	In the Movie Docker window/palette, a red outline around a frame thumbnail indicates the active frame. This is the frame that is displayed in the image window. Active frames can be edited. There can only be one active frame at a time.
Selected frames are indicated by blue highlighting. Selected frames can be moved, deleted, and have their display time changed. There can be more than one selected frame at a time.

•	You can insert up to 100 frames into a movie at a time.

 Tip

•	You can also insert frames into a movie by clicking the Insert frame button in the Movie Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

To change the order of movie frames

To insert files into a movie

To delete frames from a movie

To change the display time of a frame


To insert files into a movie

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Movie [image] Insert from file.

•	(Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Insert from file.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Click the filename.

4	Choose Full image from the list box located to the right of the Files of type list box (Windows) or to the right of Image size (Mac OS).

5	Click Open.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	Before [image] inserts the files before the frame specified in the Frame box

•	After [image] inserts the files after the frame specified in the Frame box

7	Type a value in the Frame box to specify the location of the file in the movie.

 Notes

•	If the current movie and the inserted file are different sizes, the inserted file conforms to the image dimensions of the current movie.

•	In the Movie Docker window/palette, a red outline around a frame thumbnail indicates the active frame. This is the frame that is displayed in the image window. Active frames can be edited. There can only be one active frame at a time.
Selected frames are indicated by blue highlighting. Selected frames can be moved, deleted, and have their display time changed. There can be more than one selected frame at a time.

 Tip

•	You can also insert files into a movie by clicking Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie and clicking the Insert from file button in the Movie Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

To change the order of movie frames

To insert frames into a movie

To delete frames from a movie

To change the display time of a frame


To delete frames from a movie

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Movie [image] Delete frame.

•	(Mac OS) Click Image [image] Movie [image] Delete frame.

2	Type a value in the From frame box to specify the first frame to delete.

3	Type a value in the To frame box to specify the last frame to delete.

If you want to delete only one frame, type the same frame number in each box.

 Note

•	In the Movie Docker window/palette, a red outline around a frame thumbnail indicates the active frame. This is the frame that is displayed in the image window. Active frames can be edited. There can only be one active frame at a time.
Selected frames are indicated by blue highlighting. Selected frames can be moved, deleted, and have their display time changed. There can be more than one selected frame at a time.

 Tip

•	You can also delete frames in the Movie Docker window/palette by selecting the frame you want to delete. Click the Delete frames button If the Movie Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

Related Topics

Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

To change the order of movie frames

To insert frames into a movie

To insert files into a movie

To change the display time of a frame


To change the display time of a frame

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Movie.

2	Click a frame thumbnail in the Movie Docker window/palette.

3	Type a value in the Frame delay box beside the thumbnail.

If you want to test the effect of the frame display time change on the movie, click the Play button.

 Note

•	In the Movie Docker window/palette, a red outline around a frame thumbnail indicates the active frame. This is the frame that is displayed in the image window. Active frames can be edited. There can only be one active frame at a time.
Selected frames are indicated by blue highlighting. Selected frames can be moved, deleted, and have their display time changed. There can be more than one selected frame at a time.

 Tip

•	You can change the display time of multiple frames simultaneously by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), choosing the frames, and typing a value in the Frame delay box.

Related Topics

Modifying frame sequence and frame display time in a movie

To change the order of movie frames

To insert frames into a movie

To insert files into a movie

To delete frames from a movie


Saving movies

If you use the Windows operating system, you can save a movie before or after you add the background and objects; however, when you save a movie as a QuickTime movie, an animated GIF, or to the AVI format, objects are automatically combined with the background in every frame and are no longer editable.

If you use the Mac OS, objects are automatically combined with the background in every frame when you save a movie. Once combined, you can no longer edit objects. Movies are saved to QuickTime format by default.

If you want use a movie on a Web page, save it to the animated GIF file format. When you save a movie to this format, you must convert it to an 8-bit palette, consisting of 256 colors. For information on converting a 24-bit image to 8-bit Paletted color mode, see "Changing images to the paletted color mode."

When you save a movie to animated GIF format, you can make a color transparent, which lets you see the background of a Web page through the movie. You can also specify the number of times your movie replays.

Related Topics

To save a movie

To save a movie as an animated GIF


To save a movie

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	From the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS), choose one of the following:

•	AVI - Video for Windows (Windows)

•	MOV - QuickTime Movie

•	MOV - QuickTime VR

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS), and click Save.

 Note

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to save a QuickTime movie.

Related Topics

Saving movies

To save a movie as an animated GIF


To save a movie as an animated GIF

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Choose GIF animation from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS), and click Save.

5	In the Convert to paletted dialog box, you can adjust the 8-bit color palette, and then click OK.

6	In the GIF 89 animation options dialog box, click the Frame settings tab.

7	Enable one of the following options in the Palette area:

•	Use global [image] uses the same color palette for all frames

•	Use local [image] uses a different color palette for each frame

8	Type a value in the Frame delay box to specify the length of time between frames.

9	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Apply changed only [image] applies only the frame settings that have changed

•	Apply all [image] applies all frame settings

You can also
Choose a color to appear transparent in the movie	Enable the Image color option, and click Select color. In the Select color dialog box, choose a color and click OK.
Refresh the image after each frame is loaded	Enable the Interlace rows check box.
Specify the number of pixels a frame is offset	Type values in the X and Y boxes to offset the current frame from the top left corner of the page. Type values in the dX and dY boxes to offset each successive frame from the preceding frame.
Specify how the previous frame disappears	Choose an option from the How to dispose list box. To make a transparent background, choose Replace with background.
Play the animation repeatedly	Click the File settings tab, enable the Loop frame check box, and enable an option in the Frame repetition area.
Specify the page size	Enable the Automatic check box or type values in the Width and Height boxes to set the background size manually.
Save only the pixels that differ from the first frame	Enable the Save difference check box.
 Notes

•	Changes are applied only to selected frames. Select all frames in the left window to apply changes to all frames.

•	When you save a movie as an animated GIF, objects are automatically combined with the background of each frame. This means that you can no longer edit the objects separately from the image.

Related Topics

Saving movies

To save a movie


Working with QuickTime VR movies

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you create QuickTime VR movies. QuickTime VR movies are virtual, three-dimensional environments. You can explore them by looking up and down, turning around, and zooming.

QuickTime VR movies contain viewing points, called nodes. There are two types of QuickTime VR nodes: panorama and object. Panorama nodes let you view 360 degrees of an image by spinning at a single, central viewing point. Wide images are best suited for panoramas. You can also create a panorama by joining, or stitching, a series of images together seamlessly. For more information on joining images, see "Stitching images together."

A QuickTime VR object node is the reverse of a panorama node: an object is fixed, but your view of it changes as you move around it. QuickTime VR object nodes require a number of images of the same object from different angles and positions. Object images are not stitched together.

QuickTime VR scenes are a collection of panoramas or object nodes that are linked together by hot spots.

Opening QuickTime VR movies

You can preview, open and edit QuickTime VR movies in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can open only one node at a time.

Saving and customizing QuickTime VR movies

You can save a single-frame 24-bit RGB movie as a QuickTime VR panorama node.

You can save a multiple-frame 24-bit RGB movie as a QuickTime VR object node and customize node settings. QuickTime VR objects are overlaid with an invisible grid. The number of rows, and the sequence of frames in the grid determine how a QuickTime VR object is displayed. Specifying the number of rows determines how many images are in each row. For example, if your movie contains nine frames, specifying three images per row creates three rows.

The order of the frames is also important because the rows are created chronologically. For example, a movie containing nine frames in three rows is ordered as follows: frames 1 to 3 in the top row; frames 4 to 6 in the middle row; frames 7 to 9 in the bottom row. Therefore, frames 1 to 3 show the object from an upward perspective, panning from left to right; frames 4 to 6 show it from a level perspective, panning from left to right; frames 7 to 9 show it from a downward perspective, panning from left to right. For information about how to change the order of movie frames, see "Modifying frame sequence and frame rate."

Adding a node to a QuickTime VR movie

You can add nodes to a movie or overwrite existing ones.

You can lower the resolution of panorama nodes for quicker downloading. To do so, you must first resample the image. For information about resampling images, see "Changing image dimensions."

Linking a QuickTime VR node

By saving and linking various nodes you create a virtual reality environment. An object can be turned into a hot spot that links it to another node or to an URL. To link nodes, you must save the current node to an existing QuickTime VR movie.

Related Topics

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To open a QuickTime VR movie

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose QuickTime VR from the Show list box.

3	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

If you want to open a particular node of a multiple-node movie, do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Drag the Preview scroll bar to choose the scene that you want to open.

•	(Mac OS) Choose the node you want from the Node list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to open a QuickTime VR movie.

•	All hot spots are loaded in Corel PHOTO-PAINT as objects.

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Save as type list box.

4	Type the filename in the File name box.

5	Click Save.

6	In the QuickTime VR export dialog box, type a name for the node in the Node name box.

If you are saving an object node, specify the number of images you want in a row in the Number of images per row box. The number of frames must be evenly divisible by the number of rows.

  Note

•	The width of the image in a panorama movie must be a multiple of four pixels.

Tip

•	You can customize how an object node responds to input from a mouse or keyboard when it is viewed in a QuickTime Player by enabling options in the Control settings area of the QuickTime VR export dialog box.

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose QuickTime VR the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or the Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

6	In the QuickTime VR export dialog box, click the Node tab.

7	Type a name for the node in the Node name box.

8	Click the VR World tab, and type values in the Default world width and Default world height boxes.

 Notes

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to save a QuickTime VR movie.

•	The width of the image in a panorama movie must be a multiple of four pixels. For best results use approximately 400 pixels wide by 300 pixels high.

•	You must combine all objects with background before saving a file as a QuickTime VR panorama node.

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To save a QuickTime VR object node

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose QuickTime VR from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or in the Name box (Mac OS), and click Save.

5	In the QuickTime VR export dialog box, click the Node tab.

6	Type a name for the node in the Node name box.

7	Specify the number of images you want in a row in the Number of images per row box.

8	In the Object animation area, enable the Enable view animation check box to play the movie as soon as you load it in QuickTime.

If you would like the movie to play continuously, enable the Palindrome animation check box.

9	In the Control settings area, you can customize how an object node responds to input from a mouse or keyboard when it is viewed in a QuickTime Player by enabling any of the following check boxes:

•	Wrap when panning [image] lets you rotate the object more than 360 degrees on the horizontal axis

•	Wrap when tilting [image] lets you rotate the object more than 360 degrees on the vertical axis

•	Enable zooming [image] lets you zoom in and out

•	Allow object translation [image] lets the object move when zoomed

•	Reverse effect of horizontal control [image] causes vertical movements of the mouse to act as if they were horizontal

•	Reverse effect of vertical control [image] causes horizontal movements of the mouse to act as if they were vertical

•	Swap vertical and horizontal controls [image] lets you reverse both vertical and horizontal controls at the same time

 Note

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to save a QuickTime VR movie.

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where the QuickTime VR movie is saved.

3	Do one of the following:

•	Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Save as type list box

•	Choose QuickTime VR from the Format list box.

4	Double-click the filename of the QuickTime VR movie.

5	In the Save an image to disk dialog box, click Yes.

6	In the QuickTime VR export dialog box, type a name for the new node in the Node name box, and click New node.

If you are saving a panorama node, choose one of the following:

•	Full [image] creates a node with the original resolution of the image

•	1/2 of full [image] creates a node with a resolution half that of the original image

•	1/4 of full [image] creates a node with a resolution a quarter that of the original image

•	Preview [image] creates a node with a thumbnail preview size

 Note

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to save a QuickTime VR movie.

 Tip

•	You can overwrite a specific node within a scene by choosing an existing node from the list.

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To link QuickTime VR nodes


To link QuickTime VR nodes

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the node.

3	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or the Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose MOV - QuickTime VR from the Save as type list box, and click Save.

•	(Mac OS) Choose QuickTime VR from the Format list box, and click Save.

5	In the QuickTime VR export dialog box, click the Hot spots tab.

6	Choose an object from the Hot spot list.

7	In the Hot spot type section, enable one of the following options:

•	Link [image] links the hot spot to the node specified in the Link to box

•	URL [image] links the hot spot to the URL specified in the URL box

You can also
Name the VR world created by the linked nodes	Click the VR world tab, and type a name in the VR world name box.
Set one display size for all nodes within a scene	Click the VR world tab, and type width and height values in the Default world boxes.
 Notes

•	(Windows) If you use the Windows operating system, you must have QuickTime Player 5.0 or higher installed on your computer to save a QuickTime VR movie.

•	There must be an object in the node you are saving in order to link it to another node or URL using a hot spot. For information about creating objects, see "Creating objects.".

Related Topics

Working with QuickTime VR movies

To open a QuickTime VR movie

To save a movie to the QuickTime VR format (Windows)

To save a QuickTime VR panorama node

To save a QuickTime VR object node

To add a node to a QuickTime VR movie


Modifying objects

Objects are independent image elements that can be layered on top of one another. You can transform objects, change their edges, add drop shadows, and adjust their transparency. Object can be changed without affecting the other objects in an image.

In this section you'll learn about

•	transforming objects

•	changing the edges of objects

•	adding drop shadows to objects

•	working with object transparency

•	using clip masks to change object transparency


Transforming objects

You can change the appearance of objects using the following transformations.

Transformation	Description
Sizing	Lets you change the width and height of an object
Scaling	Lets you size an object to a percentage of its original size
Rotating	Lets you turn an object around its center of rotation
Flipping	Lets you create a horizontal or vertical mirror image of an object
Skewing	Lets you slant an object to one side
Distorting	Lets you stretch an object disproportionately
Applying perspective	Lets you give an object the appearance of depth
You can apply freeform transformations in the image window, or manually adjust settings for more precise results.

You can apply transformations to a single object or multiple objects simultaneously.

Related Topics

To size an object

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To size an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Position and size mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag any of the handles on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Tips

•	You can resize the object from the center by holding down Shift as you drag any of the handles.

•	You can also change the size of a selected object by typing values in the Size boxes, and clicking the Apply button on the extended property bar.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To scale an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Scale mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a corner handle on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Tip

•	You can also scale a selected object by typing values in the Size boxes, and clicking the Apply button on the extended property bar.

 Note

•	When you scale, skew, or rotate an object, its edges can appear jagged. For this reason, these transformation modes enable anti-aliasing by default.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To rotate an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Rotate mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a rotation handle on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

You can also
Shift and rotate an object	Type values in the Position boxes and the Rotate control box on the extended property bar, and then click the Apply button.
Constrain the rotation to 15-degree increments	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag a corner handle
Change the pivot point	Drag the object's center of rotation to a new location
 Tip

•	You can also switch to rotate mode by clicking an object twice. As you cycle through the transformation modes, the handles surrounding an object will change to indicate the active mode.

 Note

•	When you scale, skew, or rotate an object, its edges can appear jagged. For this reason, these transformation modes enable anti-aliasing by default.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To scale an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To flip an object

1	Select an object.

2	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and drag a middle handle on the highlighting box across the object, past the middle handle on the opposite side.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Tip

•	You can flip a selected object disproportionately by not holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) while dragging a middle handle of the highlighting box across the middle handle on the opposite side.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To skew an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To skew an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Skew mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a skewing handle on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Note

•	When you scale, skew, or rotate an object, its edges can appear jagged. For this reason, these transformation modes enable anti-aliasing by default.

 Tip

•	You can also skew an object by typing values in the Size boxes and clicking the Apply button on the extended property bar.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To distort an object

To apply perspective to an object


To distort an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Distort mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a distortion handle on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Tip

•	You can also switch to distort mode by clicking an object three times. As you cycle through the transformation modes, the handles surrounding an object will change to indicate the active mode.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To apply perspective to an object


To apply perspective to an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click the Perspective mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a perspective handle on the highlighting box.

4	Click the Apply button on the extended property bar.

If you want to cancel the transformation, double-click outside the object.

 Tip

•	You can also switch to perspective mode by clicking an object four times. As you cycle through the transformation modes, the handles surrounding an object will change to indicate the active mode.

Related Topics

Transforming objects

To size an object

To scale an object

To rotate an object

To flip an object

To skew an object

To distort an object


Changing the edges of objects

You can adjust the appearance of an object by changing the characteristics of its edges. You can blend the edges of an object with the background by feathering, defringing, and removing black and white edges. To emphasize a certain object in an image, you can define its edges by sharpening them. You can also customize the object marquee.

Feathering

Feathering softens the edges of an object by gradually increasing the transparency of the edge pixels. You can specify the width of the feathered section of the object and the transparency gradient you want to use.

Defringing

An object created from an editable area sometimes includes stray pixels along its edges. This is apparent when the editable area is surrounded by pixels of a different brightness or color. Defringing replaces the color of the stray pixels with a color from the object so that the object blends with the background.

Removing black or white object edges

You can remove black or white edges from a feathered object by making pixels along the edges more transparent or more opaque.

Sharpening

Sharpening defines the edges of an object by making the edges crisp. You can do this by specifying the grayscale threshold for the pixels located along the object's edges. The edges become sharper as the pixels below the threshold become transparent and the pixels within the threshold become opaque.

Changing the appearance of the object marquee

You can customize the appearance of the object marquee by changing its color and threshold value. Changing the marquee threshold value modifies the location of the visual boundary of the active object. You can also change the color of the object marquee to make it more visible against the image background.

You can also hide the object marquee.

Related Topics

To feather the edges of an object

To defringe an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To change the object marquee

To hide the object marquee


To feather the edges of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Feather.

3	Type a value in the Width box.

4	From the Edges list box, choose one of the following:

•	Linear [image] changes the edge transparency in even increments from the beginning to the end of the feathered section

•	Curved [image] results in small transparency increments at the beginning of the feathered edge, larger transparency increments in the middle, and small transparency increments at the end.

If you want to view the effect in the image window, click Preview.

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To defringe an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To change the object marquee

To hide the object marquee


To defringe an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Matting [image] Defringe.

3	Type a value in the Width box.

Higher values create a more gradual transition between the edges of the object and the background.

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To feather the edges of an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To change the object marquee

To hide the object marquee


To remove black or white edges from an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Matting, and click one of the following:

•	Remove black matte [image] makes edge pixels more transparent

•	Remove white matte [image] makes edge pixels more opaque

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To feather the edges of an object

To defringe an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To change the object marquee

To hide the object marquee


To sharpen the edges of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Matting [image] Threshold.

3	Type a value from 1 to 255 in the Level box.

Higher values include fewer semitransparent pixels.

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To feather the edges of an object

To defringe an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To change the object marquee

To hide the object marquee


To change the object marquee

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Type a value from 1 to 255 in the Object threshold box.

Lower values enclose more of the object's pixels.

4	Open the Object marquee color picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	When you change the threshold value of the object marquee, the area enclosed by the marquee changes, but the object itself does not change. Pixels that are not completely opaque can lie outside the marquee even though they are still part of the object.

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To feather the edges of an object

To defringe an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To hide the object marquee


To hide the object marquee

•	Click Object [image] Marquee visible.

 Tip

•	You can also hide or display the object marquee by clicking the Show object marquee button on the standard toolbar. If the standard toolbar is not displayed, click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Standard.

Related Topics

Changing the edges of objects

To feather the edges of an object

To defringe an object

To remove black or white edges from an object

To sharpen the edges of an object

To change the object marquee


Adding drop shadows to objects

There are three types of drop shadows: glow, flat, and perspective. Glow drop shadows silhouette objects and are centered horizontally and vertically; they simulate a light source shining straight onto an object. Flat drop shadows simulate the effect of directional light, so shadows are offset. Perspective drop shadows create three-dimensional depth. You can add a drop shadow to any object, including text.

You can create and adjust drop shadows interactively in the image window. You can also change the color, position, direction, and transparency of a drop shadow directly in the image window.

You can also apply preset drop shadows. When you apply a preset, you can modify it to create a custom drop shadow. For example, you can change its direction and distance from an object, its color, and its opacity. By default, the edges of drop shadows feature squared feathering. You can choose another feathering type, such as a Gaussian blur which creates a realistic-looking drop shadow. You can also copy a custom drop shadow or save it as a preset.

When you change the shape or transparency of an object that has a drop shadow, the drop shadow automatically also changes.

You can remove a drop shadow at any time.

Related Topics

To add an interactive drop shadow

To add a preset or custom drop shadow

To copy a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To add an interactive drop shadow

1	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Interactive dropshadow tool.

2	Select an object.

If you want to create a flat drop shadow, drag from the center of the object

If you want to create a perspective drop shadow, drag from the edge of an object.

You can also
Change the color of the drop shadow	Drag a color swatch from the color palette to the end node on the drop shadow arrow.
Move the drop shadow	Drag the start node on the drop shadow arrow.
Change the direction of the drop shadow	Drag the drop shadow arrow head.
Adjust the drop shadow's opacity	Drag the triangular Transparency handle on the drop shadow arrow.
Adjust the edge feathering	Drag the triangular Feather handle on the drop shadow arrow. By default, squared feathering is used, but you can choose another type from the Shadow feather edge picker on the extended property bar. For example, the Gaussian blur creates a realistic drop shadow.
Related Topics

Adding drop shadows to objects

To add a preset or custom drop shadow

To copy a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To add a preset or custom drop shadow

1	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Interactive dropshadow tool.

2	Select an object.

3	Choose a preset from the Preset list box on the property bar.

4	Open the Shadow color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

5	On the extended property bar, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Shadow direction [image] lets you specify the angle of the shadow in relation to the object

•	Shadow offset [image] lets you specify the distance of the shadow from the object's point of origin

•	Shadow fade [image] lets you specify the percentage by which a perspective drop shadow fades as it moves away from the object

•	Shadow stretch [image] lets you specify the length of a perspective shadow

•	Shadow transparency [image] lets you specify the transparency of the shadow

•	Shadow feather [image] lets you specify the number of pixels on the edge of the shadow that are feathered to create a soft edge. By default, squared feathering is used, but you can choose another type from the Shadow feather edge picker on the extended property bar. For example, if you want to create a realistic drop shadow, choose the Gaussian blur. You can also specify a direction for the feathered pixels from the Shadow feather direction picker.

You can also
Save a custom drop shadow as a preset	Click the Shadow add preset button on the property bar, and type a name for the drop shadow in the Save preset as box.
Specify the offset and the feather width of the offset as a percentage of the size of the drop shadow	Enable the Shadow relative check box.
 Tip

•	After you choose a preset, you can modify many drop shadow attributes interactively by adjusting the nodes and triangle handles on the drop shadow arrow.

Related Topics

Adding drop shadows to objects

To add an interactive drop shadow

To copy a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To copy a drop shadow

1	Select the object to which you want to apply a drop shadow.

2	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Interactive dropshadow tool.

3	Click the Copy shadow properties button on the extended property bar.

4	Click the object that has the drop shadow properties you want to copy.

Related Topics

Adding drop shadows to objects

To add an interactive drop shadow

To add a preset or custom drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To remove a drop shadow

1	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Interactive dropshadow tool.

2	Select an object with a drop shadow.

3	Press Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a drop shadow by choosing None from the Shadow preset list box on the property bar.

Related Topics

Adding drop shadows to objects

To add an interactive drop shadow

To add a preset or custom drop shadow

To copy a drop shadow


Working with object transparency

You can change the transparency of an object to reveal image elements that lie beneath it. When you change the transparency of an object, you change the grayscale value of its individual pixels.

Changes to the transparency of an object are permanent. If you want to apply transparency changes separately, so the object is not affected, you can use a clip mask. For more information, see "Using clip masks to change object transparency."

Changing object transparency

You can change the transparency of an entire object, or the transparency of an editable area. Changing the transparency alters the transparency values of all pixels in the object or editable area by an equal amount.

Applying transparency gradients to objects

You can apply a transparency gradient to an object so that the object fades from one transparency value to another. There are several gradient types that determine the pattern of the transparency: flat, linear, elliptical, radial, rectangular, square, conical, bitmap, or textured.

You can customize the gradient by adding and removing nodes, and specifying a transparency value for each node.

Making selected colors in objects transparent

You can make all pixels of a certain color or color range transparent in the active object. Removing one or all of the color selection nodes makes the pixels of a certain color opaque again.

Blending objects

You can create interesting effects by blending objects with other objects that are below them in the stacking order, or by blending objects with the background. As you experiment with settings, the transparency effect previews in the image window.

Related Topics

To change the transparency of an object

To change the transparency of part of an object

To apply a transparency gradient to an object

To make selected colors in an object transparent

To blend an object


To change the transparency of an object

1	Select an object.

2	In the Objects Docker window/palette, type a value in the Opacity box.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

 Notes

•	Transparent objects have a grayscale value of 0, and opaque objects have a grayscale value of 255.

•	The Opacity box is not available for black-and-white (1-bit) images.

Related Topics

Working with object transparency

To change the transparency of part of an object

To apply a transparency gradient to an object

To make selected colors in an object transparent

To blend an object


To change the transparency of part of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Object transparency brush tool.

3	On the property bar, open the Shape picker, and click a shape.

4	Type a value in the Size box.

5	Type a value in the Brush transparency box to set the transparency level for the brush stroke.

6	Drag across the object.

Related Topics

Working with object transparency

To change the transparency of an object

To apply a transparency gradient to an object

To make selected colors in an object transparent

To blend an object


To apply a transparency gradient to an object

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Interactive object transparency tool.

3	On the property bar, choose a gradient type from the Fill type list box.

4	In the image window, drag the nodes to set the gradient arrow.

5	Click a node, and type a value in the Node transparency box on the extended property bar.

6	Click the Apply button.

You can also
Modify the fill	Click the Edit button on the property bar, and modify the fill settings.
Add a node	Drag a color swatch from the color palette to the gradient arrow in the image window. Then type a grayscale value (0 to 255) in the Node transparency box to specify the transparency for the node.
Delete a node	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a node, and click Delete.
 Notes

•	For information about editing fills, see "Filling images."

•	Because the bitmap, texture, and flat gradient types affect an entire object, you cannot add nodes to customize their transparency values.

Related Topics

Working with object transparency

To change the transparency of an object

To change the transparency of part of an object

To make selected colors in an object transparent

To blend an object


To make selected colors in an object transparent

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive/Transparency flyout, and click the Color transparency tool.

3	Type a value in the Tolerance control box on the property bar to specify the range of colors that will become transparent.

If you want to blend the surrounding colors with the transparent pixels, type a value in the Smoothing box. Higher values create a smoother transition.

5	Click a color in the image window.

Related Topics

Working with object transparency

To change the transparency of an object

To change the transparency of part of an object

To apply a transparency gradient to an object

To blend an object


To blend an object

1	Select an object.

2	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the flyout arrow and click Object properties.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

3	In the Object properties dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Choose the channel you want to blend from the Blend list box.

5	On the Active object graph and the Composite underlying graph, drag any of the following nodes:

•	Increasing maximum (top left node) [image] specifies the upper maximum grayscale value of the pixels in the object

•	Increasing minimum (bottom left node) [image] specifies the upper minimum grayscale value of the pixels in the object

•	Decreasing maximum (top right node) [image] specifies the lower maximum grayscale value of the pixels in the object

•	Decreasing minimum (bottom right node) [image] specifies the lower minimum grayscale value of the pixels in the object

You can also
Choose a blending method	Click a merge mode in the Merge box.
Adjust the opacity	Drag the Opacity slider.
 Notes

•	The boxes to the right of the Blend list box display the grayscale and transparency values of the selected object's pixels.

•	You can specify the grayscale values of pixels on a scale of 0 (black) to 255 (white), and the opacity of pixels on a scale of 0 (transparent) to 100 (opaque). Pixels in the active object that fall outside the specified range are hidden, so the pixels of the underlying object are visible.

Related Topics

Working with object transparency

To change the transparency of an object

To change the transparency of part of an object

To apply a transparency gradient to an object

To make selected colors in an object transparent


Using clip masks to change object transparency

A clip mask is a mask that is attached to an object. A clip mask lets you change the transparency of an object without permanently affecting it.

Once you create a clip mask, any changes apply only to the clip mask, not to the object itself. You can edit the clip mask in the same way you edit the transparency of an object. The transparency becomes permanent only when you combine the mask and the object.

Clip mask transparency can be temporarily disabled or permanently removed.

You can also use clip masks on editable areas. For more information about editable areas, see "Masking."

Related Topics

To create a clip mask from an object

To create a clip mask from the editable area of an object

To change the transparency of an object using a clip mask

To disable or remove transparency changes


To create a clip mask from an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Clip mask [image] Create, and click one of the following:

•	To show all [image] creates a clip mask that reveals the entire object

•	To hide all [image] creates a clip mask that hides the entire object

Related Topics

Using clip masks to change object transparency

To create a clip mask from the editable area of an object

To change the transparency of an object using a clip mask

To disable or remove transparency changes


To create a clip mask from the editable area of an object

1	Define an editable area on an object.

2	Click Object [image] Clip mask [image] Create [image] From mask.

Related Topics

Using clip masks to change object transparency

To create a clip mask from an object

To change the transparency of an object using a clip mask

To disable or remove transparency changes


To change the transparency of an object using a clip mask

1	In the Objects Docker window/palette, click the clip mask thumbnail for the object you want to change.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

2	Edit the clip mask.

3	Click Object [image] Clip mask [image] Combine.

 Note

•	You can change only the active clip mask. The active clip mask has a red border around its thumbnail in the Objects Docker window/palette.

•	You can edit the clip mask transparency using transparency tools and menu commands. For more information about changing transparency, see "Working with object transparency."

 Tip

•	You can link the clip mask to an object by clicking the space between the object thumbnail and the clip mask thumbnail in the Objects Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Using clip masks to change object transparency

To create a clip mask from an object

To create a clip mask from the editable area of an object

To disable or remove transparency changes


To disable or remove transparency changes

1	Select an object.

2	Click Object [image] Clip mask [image] Create [image] From object transparency.

3	Click Object [image] Clip mask, and click one of the following:

•	Disable [image] removes transparency changes temporarily

•	Remove [image] removes transparency changes permanently

Related Topics

Using clip masks to change object transparency

To create a clip mask from an object

To create a clip mask from the editable area of an object

To change the transparency of an object using a clip mask


Undoing, redoing, repeating, and fading

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 lets you undo, redo, repeat, and fade actions. You can also restore an image or part of an image to a previously saved version.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	undoing and redoing actions

•	reverting to an earlier image state

•	repeating and fading actions


Undoing and redoing actions

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you undo actions you apply to an image, starting with the most recent action. If you don't like the result of undoing actions, you can redo them. You can undo or redo actions applied to an image, such as a brush stroke, an effect, or a transformation; however, you cannot undo or redo actions applied to the workspace, such as changing preferences.

The undo settings can be customized, allowing you to increase or decrease the number of actions you can undo and redo.

Keep in mind that the higher the number of actions in the undo list, the more memory is required to maintain the undo list. You can free memory by permanently clearing all actions from the undo list.

You can also restore parts of an image by erasing the last action. For more information, see "Erasing image areas."

Related Topics

To undo or redo actions

To customize undo settings


To undo or redo actions

To	Do the following
Undo the last action	Click Edit [image] Undo [last action].
Redo the last action	Click Edit [image] Redo [last action].
Undo or redo a series of actions	In the Undo Docker window/palette, choose an action from the list. All actions listed below the action you choose will be undone. If the Undo Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Undo.
Remove all actions in the Undo Docker window/palette to free memory	Click Edit [image] Purge [image] Undo list.
 Notes

•	When you undo a series of actions, the action you choose and all actions listed below it are undone.

•	When you redo a series of actions, the action you choose and all actions listed between it and the last undone action are redone.

Related Topics

Undoing and redoing actions

To customize undo settings


To customize undo settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Memory.

3	Type a value in the Undo levels box.

4	Restart Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Notes

•	You can specify up to 99 undo levels; however, the number of undo levels affects the size of the swap disk (Windows) or scratch disk (Mac OS). Reduce the number of undo levels if you find that your computer is not operating at the speed you want.

•	If you disable the Enable undo list check box, you will be able to undo only the number of levels specified in the Undo levels box. With the check box enabled, you can undo all changes you made to the image from the Undo Docker window/palette, regardless of how many undo levels you've specified. Note that the number of undo levels will still be limited if you are using menu commands, and not the Undo Docker window/palette, to undo your actions.

Related Topics

Undoing and redoing actions

To undo or redo actions


Reverting to an earlier image state

As you create or edit an image, you can revert to its last-saved version to remove all the changes you made since you saved the image. If you want to remove only some changes, you can restore specific image areas to the way they look in the last-saved version of the image.

You can also create a checkpoint to save the current image temporarily, so that later you can return the image to that state if necessary.

You can also create a workspace that lets you save automatically using a checkpoint. For more information, see "To specify auto-save settings."

Related Topics

To revert to the last saved version of an image

To restore image areas

To create or return to a checkpoint


To revert to the last saved version of an image

•	Click File [image] Revert to saved.

 Tip

•	You can also revert to the last saved image by clicking the Revert to last saved button  in the Undo Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Reverting to an earlier image state

To restore image areas

To create or return to a checkpoint


To restore image areas

1	Open the Touch-up flyout, and click the Clone tool.

2	On the property bar, open the Clone tool picker, and click the Clone from saved tool.

3	Choose a brush from the Type list box.

4	Drag in the image window.

 Note

•	If you are creating an image from scratch, you must save it before using the Clone from saved tool. For more information about saving images, see "Saving and closing."

Related Topics

Reverting to an earlier image state

To revert to the last saved version of an image

To create or return to a checkpoint


To create or return to a checkpoint

To	Do the following
Create a checkpoint	Click Edit [image] Checkpoint.
Return to a checkpoint	Click Edit [image] Restore to checkpoint.
Related Topics

Reverting to an earlier image state

To revert to the last saved version of an image

To restore image areas


Repeating and fading actions

You can repeat or fade actions. When you repeat an action, it is reapplied to the image, producing a stronger visual effect. When you fade an action, it is gradually removed. You can also use a merge mode to modify the fade effects. For more information about merge modes, see "Understanding merge modes."

Related Topics

To repeat or fade actions


To repeat or fade actions

To	Do the following
Repeat the last action	Click Edit [image] Repeat [last action].
Fade the last action	Click Edit [image] Fade last command. Move the Percent slider to set the fade level. If you want to modify the fade effect, choose a merge mode from the Merge list box.
 Note

•	To repeat or fade an action, you must first apply an action, such as an effect, a brush stroke, or a transformation, to an image. Actions performed on the work area, such as changing preferences, cannot be repeated or faded.

 Tip

•	When you have maximized the settings for a special effect, you can repeat the effect to exaggerate it. For more information about special effects, see "Applying special effects."

Related Topics

Repeating and fading actions


Viewing images and obtaining image information

You can change the appearance of windows and the magnification level of an image. Changing the magnification level allows you to view specific image areas and makes image editing easier. You can also obtain relevant image information, such as color model information, as you edit an image.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	viewing images

•	zooming

•	obtaining image information


Viewing images

Images can be viewed in a number of different ways. You can hide windows, the toolbox and the toolbars, leaving only the menu bar and the image windows visible. You can view a large representation of an image in a full-screen preview. The image is editable when the windows are hidden, but you cannot change the image while using the full-screen preview. In Windows, you can also maximize or restore the work area.

You can view image areas that fall outside the image window. For example, when you are working at a high magnification level or with large images, you can pan or jump to a different image area without having to adjust the magnification level.

Related Topics

To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

To maximize or restore the work area (Windows)

To view a full-screen preview of an image

To view an image area that falls outside the image window


To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

•	Click Window [image] Hide windows.

•	(Windows) If you want to return to normal view, right-click in the workspace, and click Show windows.

•	(Mac OS) If you want to return to normal view, click Window [image] Show windows.

 Tip

•	(Mac OS) You can also switch between hiding and showing windows by holding down Shift, and pressing Delete.

Related Topics

Viewing images

To maximize or restore the work area (Windows)

To view a full-screen preview of an image

To view an image area that falls outside the image window


To maximize or restore the work area (Windows)

•	Click Window [image] Maximize work area.

 Tip

•	To restore the work area, click Window [image] Maximize work area again.

Related Topics

Viewing images

To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

To view a full-screen preview of an image

To view an image area that falls outside the image window


To view a full-screen preview of an image

•	Click View [image] Full-screen preview.

If you want to return to normal view, press any key or click the screen.

Related Topics

Viewing images

To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

To maximize or restore the work area (Windows)

To view an image area that falls outside the image window


To view an image area that falls outside the image window

To	Do the following
Pan to another area of the image	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Pan tool. Drag the image until the area you want to view displays in the image window.
Jump to another area of the image	Click the Navigator pop-up at the lower-right (Windows) or lower-left (Mac OS) corner of the image window. Drag the rectangle to the area of the image you want to view.
 Tip

•	You can pan around an image by clicking the Pan tool and pressing the Arrow keys.

•	You can also pan around an image using the scroll bars in the image window.

Related Topics

Viewing images

To hide windows, the toolbox, and toolbars

To maximize or restore the work area (Windows)

To view a full-screen preview of an image


Zooming

By default, images are displayed at 100% magnification; however, you can zoom in to get a closer look at image detail or zoom out to view a larger portion of the image. You can also specify the magnification level at which images open.

Related Topics

To zoom

To set the magnification level at which images are opened


To zoom

•	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Zoom tool.

To	Do the following
Zoom in	Click the image where you want to magnify it.
Zoom in to a specific area	Drag across the area you want to magnify.
Zoom out	Right-click (Windows) or Option + click (Mac OS) in the image window.
Switch between the current and previous zoom levels	Click the Zoom to previous button on the extended property bar.
Zoom in or out by a preset level	Choose a magnification level from the Zoom level list box on the property bar.
Related Topics

Zooming

To set the magnification level at which images are opened


To set the magnification level at which images are opened

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	Choose a magnification level from the Opening zoom list box.

 Note

•	The magnification level that you choose is used the next time you open an image.

Related Topics

Zooming

To zoom


Obtaining image information

You can view image properties, such as name, file format, and file size. If an image is loaded from a digital camera, you can also view EXIF information about the image, such as the date and time the photo was taken, the exposure, and flash settings. For more information about viewing digital camera image information, see "To view EXIF information for digital camera photos."

You can view information about image areas, such as pointer coordinates, as you work. You can view the changes in the x-coordinate (X) or the y-coordinate (Y) as you move the pointer in the image window. You can also make note of the angle (A) and distance (D) that the pointer moves in the image window as you draw a shape or define an editable area. In addition, you can obtain statistics related to the x- and y-coordinates of the center position (C) and the radius (R) when you create or select a circular editable area or shape.

You can also view color information for an image area that corresponds to the pointer position. By default, the RGB, Hex, and CMYK values are displayed. You can choose to display color information in two color models at once. For example, you can view both the grayscale and RGB values of a particular image area. For information about color modes and color models, see "Changing color modes" and "Working with color."

Related Topics

To view image information

To view information about image areas


To view image information

•	Click File [image] Document properties.

Related Topics

Obtaining image information

To view information about image areas


To view information about image areas

•	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Info.

You can also
Choose a new color model	Click the top flyout arrow, choose a color level, and click a color model.
Change the units of measure used to display image information	Click the bottom flyout arrow, and click a unit of measure.
 Note

•	By default, the Image info Docker window/palette lists the RGB, Hex, and CMYK values from top to bottom.

 Tip

•	You can also view color mode information by clicking the Eyedropper tool, and pointing to an image area.

Related Topics

Obtaining image information

To view image information


Creating images for the Web

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 gives you the tools you need to create images for the World Wide Web.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	exporting and optimizing images for the Web

•	creating images with transparent backgrounds

•	creating image maps

•	slicing images

•	creating and editing rollovers

•	e-mailing images (Windows)

•	choosing a Web-compatible file format


Exporting and optimizing images for the Web

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can export and optimize images for the Web.

Exporting images

Before you use an image on the Web, you must export it to a Web-compatible file format, such as the GIF or JPEG format. The GIF file format is best for line drawings, text, and images with sharp edges or few colors, while the JPEG file format is suitable for photos. For information about these file formats and alternatives, see "Choosing a Web-compatible file format."

Optimizing images

You can also optimize an image for the Web before you export it to adjust its display quality and file size. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can preview an image with up to four different configurations of settings. You can compare file formats, preset settings, download speeds, compression, file size, image quality, and color range. You can also examine previews by zooming and panning within the preview windows.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides preset settings, but you can edit these presets, and add and delete custom presets. Once you specify the settings you want for all of the preview areas, you can save the settings for the entire optimization dialog box.

Related Topics

To export an image for the Web

To optimize and export an image for the Web


To export an image for the Web

1	Click File [image] Export for Web.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Disable the Slices check box.

5	Choose a file format from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format box (Mac OS).

6	Enable the Images only option.

7	Click Save.

8	In the export dialog box for the chosen file format, specify the settings you want.

 Tip

•	You can preview an image in a browser by enabling the Display in browser check box. On export, your default Web browser will launch and display the image.

Related Topics

Exporting and optimizing images for the Web

To optimize and export an image for the Web


To optimize and export an image for the Web

1	Click File [image] Web image optimizer.

2	Below the image preview windows, choose from the following list boxes:

•	File type

•	Web preset

If you want the image previews, download speeds, compression percentages, file sizes, and color palettes to update automatically, ensure that Preview is enabled.

3	Click below an image preview window to select the file format to which you want to save.

A red border indicates the selected format.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Save Web image to disk dialog box, type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the image.

7	Click Save.

You can also
Increase the number of preview areas	In the top right corner, click one of the preview area display buttons.
Pan to another section of the image	Drag in the first preview window.
Zoom in	Choose a magnification level from the Zoom level list box.
Edit preset settings for a single preview area	Click Advanced in one of the preview areas. In the Export dialog box, customize the preset options. If you select GIF or PNG8 file formats, you can modify the color palette and settings in the Convert to paletted dialog box.
Save the current configuration of settings for a preview area	Click the Save settings button for each area where you want to save the settings.
Save a custom preset	Click Add.
Delete a custom preset	Click Delete.
Preview the file download time for a particular connection speed	Choose a speed from the Connection speed list box.
 Note

•	You can compare file types with the original image by selecting Original file type in one of the preview panes.

Related Topics

Exporting and optimizing images for the Web

To export an image for the Web


Creating images with transparent backgrounds

GIF images with transparent backgrounds, such as buttons and logos, are commonly used on Web pages with colored or patterned backgrounds.

If you place an image with an opaque background onto a Web page, the image background color appears as a rectangle on the page. By making an image background transparent, the image background blends in with the page. Transparent image backgrounds also let you change the color or pattern of a Web page background without having to change the backgrounds of the images to match.

The background color must be a single, solid color that is not used elsewhere in the image. You can also make an editable area or a protected area transparent. For information about defining these areas, see "Masking."

For information about the GIF file format, see "Choosing a Web-compatible file format."

You can also create transparent backgrounds on images in other file formats. For information, see "Cutting out image areas."

Related Topics

To save an GIF image with a transparent background


To save an GIF image with a transparent background

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

3	Choose where you want to save the image.

4	Choose the GIF file format from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

6	In the Convert to paletted dialog box, customize the color palette and settings.

For best results, choose None from the Dithering list box and Websafe from the Palette list box.

7	Click OK.

8	In the GIF export dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Image color [image] makes the color you click on the color palette transparent

•	Masked area [image] makes the protected area of your image transparent

If you want to make the editable area of an image transparent, click the Invert mask check box.

You can also
Sample a color from the image to make transparent	In the GIF export dialog box, click the Eyedropper tool, and in the first preview window, click the background color.
Load the image into a Web browser as an interlaced GIF	Click the Interlace image check box.
Preview the transparent area of the image	Click Preview. The transparent background displays as a checkered area. Masked areas that are transparent display as a solid color.
 Note

•	If you are saving an image that contains more than 256 colors, you must convert it to Paletted color mode to decrease the number of colors in the image. For more information see "Changing the color mode of images."

Related Topics

Creating images with transparent backgrounds


Creating image maps

An image map is a single graphic with clickable areas, or hotspots, that link to Web pages. A hotspot is defined using co-ordinates on an image, and an URL is assigned to each defined area.

If you want to add rollovers to an image, or to assign different file formats or compression rates to parts of an image, you can slice it instead of creating an image map. For information about creating sliced images, see "Slicing images."

Creating clickable areas

Hotspots are created from objects. You can assign an URL and alternative text to an object. You must also specify the shape for a hotspot; it can be a polygon that closely follows an object's shape, a rectangle that matches an object's  highlighting box, or a circle that encloses an object.

If you want to create an image map using a photo, you can define an editable area where you want a hotspot to be, and then convert the editable area into an object.

Exporting image maps

When you export an image map, you must choose one of three different map types: client-side, server-side, or client/server-side. The client-side image map type is most common and is the default setting. The following files are generated automatically, depending on the image map type you choose:

•	an HTML page for client/server-side, client/server-side, and client-side image map types.

•	a separate map file containing the hotspot coordinates for client/server-side and server-side image map types. Client-side image maps do not require a separate map file because they contain the HTML map tags in the HTML page.

Related Topics

To create a clickable area for an image map

To export an image map


To create a clickable area for an image map

1	In the Objects Docker window/palette, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) an object's thumbnail, and select Properties.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

2	In the Object properties dialog box, click the WWW URL tab.

3	Set the following properties for the object:

•	URL [image] specifies an address, or URL, for a Web page that opens when you click a hotspot. You must type http:// before the domain name in the Web address.

•	Comment [image] specifies the alternate text that displays in a browser when you point to an object

•	Define area as [image] specifies the shape for the object's hotspot area

4	Click OK.

Related Topics

Creating image maps

To export an image map


To export an image map

1	Click File [image] Export for Web.

2	Disable the Slices check box.

3	Choose a file format from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Name box (Mac OS).

5	Enable the Image map option.

6	Click Save.

7	In the next dialog box, specify the options associated with the selected file format, and click OK.

8	In the Save map file dialog box, choose one of the following map types from the Save as type list box (Windows ) or Format list box (Mac OS):

•	Client-side (*.htm) [image] specifies that your image map does not depend on a server to process map information. This is the default and is the most common setting.

•	Client/Server-side NCSA [image] creates the files required for both client and NCSA server sides

•	Client/Server-side CERN [image] creates the files required for both client and CERN server sides

•	Server-side NCSA (*.map) [image] specifies that your server supports NCSA codes

•	Server-side CERN (*.map) [image] specifies that your server supports CERN codes

If you are saving a client-server or server-side image map, type a name for the map file in the Map name box.

You can also
Link any part of the image that does not have an assigned URL to a specific Web page	In the Save map file dialog box, enable the Default URL check box, and type a URL address in the Default URL box.
Include information about a file	Enable the Include file header information check box.
 Notes

•	You must save your image to a Web-compatible file format, such as GIF or JPEG. For information about choosing a file format, see "Choosing a Web-compatible file format."

•	Objects will merge with the background when you export the image map.

 Tip

•	You can also define hotspot areas for an image map using the Internet toolbar. Click Web [image] Internet tool objects to open the Internet toolbar.

Related Topics

Creating image maps

To create a clickable area for an image map


Slicing images

Image slicing lets you load a large image on a Web page one piece at a time by cutting it into several smaller files. The resulting files, or slices, can be for viewing only or can be clickable.

Slices can only be rectangular. If you want to create clickable areas in other shapes, you can use an image map instead. For more information about image maps, see "Creating image maps."

As you slice an image, you can preview and test it in a browser at any time.

Creating slice grids

To slice an image, you must first create a slice grid by placing horizontal and vertical slice lines on the image. You can create the slice grid automatically based on the placement of objects in an image, or create equal slices based on the number of columns and rows you specify. You can also import or export slice grids.

The slice grid creates an overlay in the image window. You can still access other features while you work on a sliced image. You also can hide the slice grid and overlay.

Assigning properties to slices

Once you have sliced an image, you can assign properties to any slices you want. You can specify a filename, URL, target, and alternative text for a slice. Individual slices can also be exported to different file formats and optimized separately. The default settings are applied to any slices that are not given specific properties. Slices that are not named are automatically given names based on their row and column location in the slice grid. For example, in a sliced image named "banner", the slice in the first row and the first column is called "banner_r1c1".

An image slice can also be a rollover. For more information about creating and editing rollovers, see "Creating and editing rollovers."

You can also preview a sliced image in a Web browser as you work on it.

Erasing slices

Once slice lines have been added, they can be moved or erased. To remove part of a slice line, you can select and merge adjacent slices. You can also remove the entire slice grid all at once. When you erase a slice line, you create one slice out of multiple slices. As a result, you lose the settings applied to the separate slices; the new, larger slice assumes the default settings.

Exporting sliced images

When you finish slicing an image, you must export it. During export, Corel PHOTO-PAINT creates the following:

•	a file containing the HTML and JavaScript code

•	a folder containing the image slices

If you already exported a sliced image, and opened it again to modify it, you can choose to export only the image slices.

Optimizing sliced images

You can also optimize a sliced image before you export it. Optimization settings apply only to the slices that were not assigned file formats and optimization settings already; these slices are saved with the default JPEG file format settings. You cannot specify settings for individual slices at this stage. You can also choose to optimize the whole image and drop all slices and their settings. For more information about optimizing images for the Web, see "Exporting and optimizing images for the Web."

Related Topics

To slice an image

To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

To erase an image slice line

To export a sliced image

To optimize and export a sliced image


To slice an image

1	Click the Image slicing tool.

2	On the property bar, click any of the following buttons to create a slice grid:

•	Vertical slice button [image] lets you add a single vertical slice line by clicking the image

•	Horizontal slice button [image] lets you add a single horizontal slice line by clicking the image

•	Auto-slice button [image] lets you slice an entire image based on the placement of objects

•	Equal slice button [image] lets you cut the image into equal-size slices by specifying the number of rows and columns

3	Click the Slice selector button on the property bar.

If you want to move a slice line, drag it to a new position on the image.

4	Click an image slice.

5	In the Image slicing Docker window/palette, enter the following information for the selected slice or slices:

•	Name [image] specifies a filename for the slice. If you do not type a filename, a default name will be inserted based on the original image filename, and the column and row placement of a slice.

•	URL [image] specifies an address, or URL, for a Web page that opens when you click a slice

•	ALT [image] specifies the alternate text that displays in a browser when you point to a slice

•	Target [image] specifies how a Web page opens: _self opens the URL in the current frame, _blank opens the URL in a new browser window, _top opens the URL in the root frame of the browser, _parent opens the URL in the highest level frame.

6	In the Format area, choose a file format for the slice from the list box.

If you do not choose a file format, the image slice is automatically saved to the default file format.

You can also
Optimize a slice	Select a slice, and in the Image slicing Docker window/palette, click Advanced, and adjust the file format settings.
Preview the sliced image in browser with the current settings	Click the Preview button.
Import a slice grid	Click the flyout arrow, and click Import slice grid.
Export a slice grid to use on another image	Click the flyout arrow, and click Export slice grid.
Save the file format settings you specify as a preset	Click the flyout arrow, and click Save preset.
 Tips

•	If you want to select multiple slices, hold down Shift, and click the slices.

•	To switch between the Horizontal slice and Vertical slice buttons, press Shift.

Related Topics

Slicing images

To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

To erase an image slice line

To export a sliced image

To optimize and export a sliced image


To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

1	Click View [image] Slice grid.

 Note

•	You cannot choose to display or hide the slice grid when the  Image slicing tool is selected. When the slice tool is selected, the slice grid is always displayed.

Related Topics

Slicing images

To slice an image

To erase an image slice line

To export a sliced image

To optimize and export a sliced image


To erase an image slice line

1	Click the Image slicing tool.

2	Click the Erase slice button on the property bar.

3	Click a line to erase it.

If you want to erase all slices, click the Erase all slices button on the property bar.

 Note

•	When a slice line is erased, the new combined slice reverts to the default settings. Any settings that were applied to the individual slices are lost.

Related Topics

Slicing images

To slice an image

To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

To export a sliced image

To optimize and export a sliced image


To export a sliced image

1	Click File [image] Export for Web.

2	Choose a folder where you want to save the HTML/JavaScript file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Ensure that the Slices checkbox is enabled.

5	Ensure that the HTML and images option is enabled.

6	In the Image destination area, enable the Use HTML name for image sub-folder option.

The image slices are saved in the same location as the HTML file, and the folder name is based on the HTML filename.

7	Click Save.

You can also
Specify a different image folder name and location	In the Image destination area, type a path in the Image folder box.
Replace existing image slices	In the Image destination area, enable the Replace existing files option.
Preview the sliced image in a browser	Enable the Display in browser checkbox to start the default browser and to preview the file with the current settings.
 Notes

•	If the Slices option is not enabled, the slices and all settings assigned in the Image slicing Docker window/palette will not be applied to the exported image. If you choose not to apply the slices and settings, you can choose a file format to apply to the whole image from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

•	If you have not used a Web-compatible filename, it is automatically corrected during export. If you have inadvertently duplicated a filename, this is also automatically corrected.

 Tip

•	If you want to export only the image slices, enable the Images only option. The Filename box is grayed out because image slice filenames are already specified in the Image slicing Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Slicing images

To slice an image

To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

To erase an image slice line

To optimize and export a sliced image


To optimize and export a sliced image

1	Click File [image] Web image optimizer.

2	Enable the Keep slices option.

3	Below the image preview window, choose from the following list boxes:

•	File type

•	Web preset

The file format and optimization settings are applied only to slices not given settings in the Image slicing Docker window/palette.

5	Click below an image preview window to select the file format you want to save.

A red border indicates the selected format.

6	Click OK.

7	In the Export for Web dialog box, type a filename in the Filename box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Choose the folder where you want to save the image.

9	Click Save.

You can also
Preview the image with the current settings for each slice	Click Preview.
Drop all slices and optimize the whole image	Enable the Create single image option.
 Note

•	Although slices are displayed in the Web image optimizer dialog box, only slices defined with the default file type are optimized. If you want to optimize slices individually, you must return to the Image slicing Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Slicing images

To slice an image

To display or hide the slice overlay and grid

To erase an image slice line

To export a sliced image


Creating and editing rollovers

A rollover is an interactive image that changes in appearance when you click or point to it. For example, you can make a button change color when it is clicked, or display text when you point to it. Rollovers are frequently used on Web pages as navigation buttons.

Creating rollovers

Rollover are made using objects, such as shapes, brush strokes and text. You can use a single object or a group of objects, such as an ellipse with text on it. Rollovers consist of the following states:

•	Normal [image] displays the default state

•	Over [image] is triggered when you point to it

•	Down [image] is triggered when you click it

Each state consists of an object or multiple objects.

You can assign properties to a rollover, such as a Web address that opens when you click a rollover, and alternate text that displays when you point to it. You can specify a target for the down state which determines how a Web page opens in a browser window. You can also add sound to the over and down rollover states, which will play when these rollover states are activated.

Editing rollover objects

You can edit rollover states by adding, modifying and removing objects in each state. When you create a rollover, the original objects are copied to the normal, over, and down states. Adding an object to a rollover state adds the object to all states. However, any changes you make to an object are applied only to the current state. For example, you can use different text for the over state by replacing the original text in that state. You can also remove objects from the current state.

If you want to create a rollover using an editable area or the background, they must first be converted to objects. For more information about defining editable areas, see "Masking."

When you create a rollover, the image is sliced, and the rollover becomes a slice. For more information on working with image slices, and exporting and optimizing sliced images, see "Slicing images."

Related Topics

To create a rollover

To edit a rollover

To add an object to a rollover

To modify an object in the current rollover state

To remove an object from the current rollover state


To create a rollover

1	Select one or more objects.

When you create a rollover, the original objects are destroyed. If you want to retain the original objects, save them before you create a rollover.

2	Click Web [image] Create rollover from object.

3	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, set any of the following properties for the rollover:

•	URL [image] specifies an address, or URL, for a Web page.

•	ALT [image] specifies the alternate text that displays when you point to a rollover.

4	Choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

•	Normal

•	Over

•	Down

5	Edit the selected rollover state by adding, removing, and modifying objects.

6	Click the Finish editing button.

Each state retains its component objects, so you can continue to edit the rollover.

You can also
Add sound to a rollover state	In the Sound box, type a filename of the sound you want to play when the selected state is triggered. You can also click the Browse button to locate and choose the sound file.
Specify the target frame or browser window for the URL	Click a target type in the Target list box: _self opens the URL in the current frame, _blank opens the URL in a new browser window, _top opens the URL in the root frame of the browser, _parent opens the URL in the highest level frame.
Preview a rollover in a browser	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, click the Preview in browser button.
Create a new rollover	Click the Create rollover from object button.
 Notes

•	In the Objects Docker window/palette, rollover objects are highlighted, grouped, and have a Rollover object icon to the right of the object name. The Text rollover object icon indicates that the rollover object is text.

•	In the Objects Docker window/palette, the Rollover object icon turns red when a rollover overlaps another rollover. Overlapping rollovers cannot be exported. You must move the rollover so it no longer overlaps with another rollover object.

 Tip

•	You can select a single object to start, and then add other objects to it to change the appearance of the rollover.

Related Topics

Creating and editing rollovers

To edit a rollover

To add an object to a rollover

To modify an object in the current rollover state

To remove an object from the current rollover state


To edit a rollover

1	In the Objects Docker window/palette, select a rollover.

Rollovers have Rollover object icons to the right of their object names.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

2	Click Web [image] Edit rollover.

3	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

•	Normal

•	Over

•	Down

4	Edit the rollover state by adding, removing, and modifying objects.

5	Click the Finish editing button.

You can also
Return a state to the current Normal state, so you can start over again	Click Reset.
Return all states in a rollover to simple objects	Click Web [image] Extract rollover.
 Notes

•	When you extract a rollover to simple objects, the component objects are named automatically.

•	It is not possible to edit two rollovers at the same time.

 Tips

•	You can edit a rollover by double-clicking it in the image window.

•	You can also edit a rollover by clicking the Edit rollover button in the Rollover Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Creating and editing rollovers

To create a rollover

To add an object to a rollover

To modify an object in the current rollover state

To remove an object from the current rollover state


To add an object to a rollover

1	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

•	Normal

•	Over

•	Down

2	Open the Shape flyout, and click a shape tool.

3	Drag in the image window to create a shape.

The object is added to all rollover states.

You can also
Add brush strokes	Open the Brush flyout, click the Paint tool, and drag in the image window to create a brush stroke.
Add text	Click the Text tool,  click in the image window, and type the text.
 Notes

•	For more information about adding shapes and brush strokes, see "Working with objects." For more information about adding text, see "Working with text."

•	You can also create objects from the image background and editable areas. For information, see "Working with objects."

 Tip

•	All brush strokes are added to the active object by default. You can also create an object by clicking the New object button in the Objects Docker window/palette. If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

Related Topics

Creating and editing rollovers

To create a rollover

To edit a rollover

To modify an object in the current rollover state

To remove an object from the current rollover state


To modify an object in the current rollover state

1	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

•	Normal

•	Over

•	Down

2	In the Objects Docker window/palette, select the object you want to modify.

If the Objects Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Objects.

3	Modify the object.

The changes apply only to the object in the current state.

 Tip

•	A rollover can display different text in each of the normal, over and down states. To edit text in a rollover, click the Text tool, point to the text until the pointer becomes a cursor, and select the text. Type new text to replace the current text.

 Notes

•	For more information about changing objects, see "Working with objects" and "Modifying objects."

•	You can also paint text or change the color, fill, and formatting. For more information about modifying text, see "Working with text."

Related Topics

Creating and editing rollovers

To create a rollover

To edit a rollover

To add an object to a rollover

To remove an object from the current rollover state


To remove an object from the current rollover state

1	In the Rollover Docker window/palette, choose one of the following rollover states from the States list box:

•	Normal

•	Over

•	Down

2	In the Objects Docker window/palette, select the object you want to remove.

3	Double-click the Eraser tool.

The object is removed only from the current state.

 Note

•	If you delete an object using the Delete key, the object is deleted from all rollover states.

Related Topics

Creating and editing rollovers

To create a rollover

To edit a rollover

To add an object to a rollover

To modify an object in the current rollover state


E-mailing images (Windows)

After you create or open an image in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can e-mail it as an attachment using your e-mail program.

Related Topics

To e-mail an image (Windows)


To e-mail an image (Windows)

•	Click File [image] Send.

Related Topics

E-mailing images (Windows)


Choosing a Web-compatible file format

The image file formats used for the World Wide Web are GIF, JPEG, JPEG 2000, and PNG.

The GIF format is commonly used for line drawings, text, images with few colors, or images with sharp edges, such as scanned black-and-white images. Use the JPEG format for images with broad tonal ranges, such as photographs or scanned color images.

The JPEG 2000 and PNG file formats are newer formats, and are not fully supported by Web browsers; you may need plug-ins to view images in these formats. The PNG format combines features of the GIF and JPEG formats. The JPEG 2000 format features improved compression and allows you to assign a different compression rate to an image area.

GIF file format

The GIF file format is supported by all Web browsers. It is ideal for images with text, line drawings, and few colors. GIF supports up to 8-bit color (256 colors) and lets you create custom palettes for the image. GIF offers several advanced graphic options, including transparent backgrounds, interlaced images, and animation.

The GIF file format uses lossless compression, which means that when you convert an image to the GIF file format, all the file information is stored within the image.

JPEG file format

The JPEG file format supports up to 32-bit color (4.2 billion colors) and is ideal for photographs, and scanned color images.

JPEG files use lossy compression, which means that the image loses information while continuing to provide a high level of compression. You can choose the image quality when you save an image [image] the higher the image quality, the larger the file size. Some Web browsers support progressive JPEG images. Progressive images appear on screen gradually so that you can see portions of an image before it finishes loading.

JPEG 2000

The JPEG 2000 file format offers two alternative types [image] JPEG 2000 codestream (JPC) and JPEG 2000 standard (JP2). Both types let you use lossless or lossy compression. The JPEG 2000 file format is not supported by all Web browsers, so you may need a plug-in to view images in this format.

The JPEG 2000 codestream type is the streamlined version, suitable for low bandwidth connections. You can take full advantage of this file format's improved compression.

The JPEG 2000 standard type lets you save extra information with images. You can also have a region of interest [image] an area that is exported with a different compression setting. A region of interest is useful when you want a detailed portion of an image, such as a face in a portrait, to have a lower compression rate; you can use a higher compression rate on the rest of the image. By combining two different compression rates in the same image, you create a smaller file size than using the lower compression rate for the entire image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, an editable area is used to create a region of interest. Only rectangular editable areas can be used.

PNG file format

The PNG file format was developed as an alternative to the GIF and JPEG file formats. The PNG file format, unlike the GIF file format, supports true color as well as palette-based images. The PNG file format can also be used to save transparent images (unlike the JPEG file format). PNG files use an advanced lossless compression system and the format supports interlacing.

To display a Web site that contains PNG images, visitors with older browsers might need to install a plug-in filter that supports the PNG format. Plug-ins are readily available for downloading from the World Wide Web.


Managing color for display, input, and output

You may find that the colors displayed on your monitor don't match the colors of a scanned image or of a printer's output. Color management lets you reproduce colors accurately by using color profiles and by correcting colors for display.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	understanding the Color management dialog box

•	working with color profiles

•	choosing advanced color management settings

•	correcting colors for display


Understanding the Color management dialog box

Color management is the process of matching colors between devices, such as scanners, digital cameras, printers, and monitors. Your application features color management controls designed to help you achieve the best possible color matches.

The Color management dialog box, with its default settings, looks like this

You can activate the following visual elements :

•	Scanner/digital camera icon

•	Separations printer icon

•	Monitor icon

•	Composite printer icon

•	Import/export icon

•	Internal RGB icon

•	Arrows

You can click the Monitor icon, the Import/export icon, the Internal RGB icon, and the Arrows to choose color management options and advanced settings.

You can click the caption text under the icons to choose color profiles for each device. You can also get other color profiles from the application CD or online. For more information, see "Working with color profiles." To help you choose the appropriate profile, check the manufacturer's documentation for a device.

In addition, you can click the arrows between device icons to turn the color profiles on or off. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off. You can use the arrows to correct colors between devices, and control how colors are displayed.

The following table contains descriptions of what happens when an arrow is on or off.

When a device is corrected for color, at least two profiles are used [image] one for each device. For instance, if the printer colors are being corrected using Internal RGB, both the Internal RGB and printer profiles are used. If you use simulation to display colors on your monitor as they are printed, three profiles are used: the Internal RGB, printer, and monitor profiles.

Arrow	On	Off
From the Scanner/digital camera to Internal RGB	The scanner/digital camera profile and the Internal RGB profiles are used for color correction.	The profiles are not used.
From Internal RGB to the Monitor	Colors are calibrated for display using the Internal RGB and monitor color profiles.	The profile is not used.
From Internal RGB to the Composite printer	The printer and Internal RGB profile are used for color correction.	The profile is not used.
From the Composite printer to the Monitor	The monitor simulates a composite printer output.	The monitor does not simulate a composite printer output.
From Internal RGB to the Separations printer	The separations printer and RGB profiles are used for color correction.	The profile is not used. You can override this setting in the Print dialog box.
From the Separations printer to the Monitor	The monitor simulates color separations printer output.	The monitor does not simulate color separations printer output.
From the Separations printer to the Composite printer	The composite printer simulates separations printer display.	The composite printer does not simulate separations printer display.
From Internal RGB to Import/Export	Internal RGB profiles are embedded.	ICC profiles are not embedded.
From Import/Export to Internal RGB	Embedded ICC profiles are used.	ICC profiles are ignored.


Working with color profiles

A color management system helps you achieve accurate colors across a variety of devices consistently. The first stage in setting up your color management system is to choose color profiles for your monitor and each of the devices you use, such as scanners, digital cameras, and printers.

Understanding color management

Each device has a range of colors, or color space, that it uses. For example, a monitor displays a different set of colors than a printer reproduces. So, you may see some colors on the screen that cannot be printed.

You can use a color management system to translate colors from one device to another. Color profiles define the color space for your monitor and for the input and output devices you use.

For more information about using color management in your application, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box."

Choosing color profiles

Different brands and models of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers have different color spaces, and thus require different color profiles. Some widely used profiles are installed with your application.

Standard ICC (International Color Consortium) color profiles are used in your application. You can choose color profiles for a:

•	monitor

•	scanner/digital camera

•	composite printer

•	separations printer

•	internal RGB color space

Obtaining additional color profiles

If you need additional profiles or updates, you can get them from the application CD, or you can download them.

Related Topics

To choose a color profile

To copy a color profile from the CD

To download a color profile


To choose a color profile

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click a profile name under one of the following icons:

•	Scanner/digital camera

•	Separations printer

•	Monitor

•	Composite printer

•	Internal RGB

3	Choose a profile from the list box.

 Note

•	By default, color profiles are stored in the application's Color folder.

 Tip

•	You can access other color profiles. For more information, see "To copy a color profile from the CD" and "To download a color profile."

Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To copy a color profile from the CD

To download a color profile


To copy a color profile from the CD

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Get profile from disk.

3	Insert the application CD.

4	In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose the folder where the profiles are located.

If you want to load color profiles that you have stored in a different location, such as on a network or on your hard disk, you can choose the folder where the profiles are located.

5	In the Install from disk dialog box, choose the color profile you want to copy.

6	Click Choose.

Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To choose a color profile

To download a color profile


To download a color profile

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Download profiles.

3	In the dialog box, enable the check box for each profile you want to download.

4	Click Download.

5	In the Save as dialog box, choose a destination for the color profile.

If you want to store the new color profile with the existing profiles, download it to the application's Color folder.

You can also
Choose a different profile type	Click the Profile type list box, and choose a type.
Specify your connection speed	Click the Connection speed list box, and choose a speed. The faster your connection speed, the shorter the download time.
Update the profiles list	Click Refresh.
Return to the main Color management dialog box	Click Cancel.
Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To choose a color profile

To copy a color profile from the CD


Choosing advanced color management settings

Once you choose color profiles, the color management system uses a Color Matching Module (CMM) to match colors between devices as closely as possible. Your application uses the Kodak Color Management System by default. You can also choose different rendering intents, which control how the color management system converts colors between different color spaces.

When you import or export graphics, you can embed, or attach, color profiles. By embedding a color profile, you can ensure color integrity; anyone viewing or printing your work will use the same colors that you used.

By enabling the gamut alarm, you can preview which on-screen colors cannot be printed. The colors that cannot be reproduced are highlighted.

In Windows, there are advanced settings for separations and composite printers; you can link a color profile to a specific printer.

Using color styles, you can choose to turn color management off or to optimize the color display.

Related Topics

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To choose a color engine and rendering intent

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click on the Internal RGB icon.

3	In the Advanced settings dialog box, from the Rendering intent list box, choose one of the following:

•	Absolute colorimetric [image] preserves the white point throughout conversion

•	Automatic [image] default setting, which uses saturation for vector graphics and perceptual for bitmaps

•	Perceptual [image] good for a variety of images, especially bitmaps and photographic images

•	Relative colorimetric [image] good for producing proofs on inkjet printers

•	Saturation [image] good for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects)

4	Choose an option from the Color engine list box.

 Note

•	(Windows) The Microsoft ICM 2.0 Color Matching Module (CMM) is not available for Windows NT 4.0.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To embed color profiles

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click the Import/export icon.

3	In the Import area, enable one of the following options :

•	Use embedded ICC profile

•	Always convert using

•	Ignore embedded ICC profile

4	In the Export area, enable one of the following options:

•	Embed internal RGB profile

•	Always embed using

•	Do not embed ICC profiles

 Notes

•	When you enable the Always convert using import options, as well as the Always embed using export option, you can choose a profile from the list box.

•	When you enable the Embed internal RGB profile or the Always embed using export options, certain file formats are exported with an embedded ICC profile. These file formats are: TIFF, encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), CorelDRAW (CDR), JPEG, Portable Document Format (PDF), and Adobe Photoshop (PSD).

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To enable the gamut alarm

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click the Monitor icon.

3	Enable the Highlight display colors out of printer gamut check box.

If you want to show CMYK in percentages, enable the Show CMYK in percentages check box.

 Tips

•	 You can map spot colors into CMYK gamut by enabling the Map spot colors into CMYK gamut check box.

•	You can change the warning color of the gamut alarm by opening the Warning color picker and choosing a color.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Color management.

2	Click one of the following icons:

•	Composite printer

•	Separations printer

3	Choose a setting from the list box.

 Note

•	If you choose an advanced setting, that setting overrides the profile that displays under the printer icon in the Color management dialog box.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To use color management styles


To use color management styles

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Choose one of the following from the Style list box:

•	Color management off

•	Default settings

•	Optimized for desktop printing

•	Optimized for professional output

•	Optimized for the Web

•	ColorSync workflow (Mac OS)

 Notes

•	Some color management settings, such as Default, Optimized for desktop printing, and Optimized for professional output, can result in on-screen colors appearing dull. This is due to an on-screen printer simulation of the output. For more information, see "Correcting colors for display."

•	(Mac OS) The ColorSync workflow style affects color management at the system level, and uses the settings from the system preferences' ColorSync dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can add or delete a color management style by clicking the Add preset or Remove preset buttons.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)


Correcting colors for display

You can correct colors so that they display as accurately as possible on screen. If you correct only the display colors, the colors are shown according to the internal RGB, and monitor color profiles.

If you display colors as they will print, on-screen colors simulate output using the Internal RGB, monitor, and printer color profiles. Simulating printer output may cause on-screen colors to appear dull.

Related Topics

To correct colors for display


To correct colors for display

•	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

To	Do the following
Correct display colors	Click the arrow from the Internal RGB icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a composite printer output	Click the arrow from the Composite printer icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a color separations printer output	Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer	Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Composite printer icon.
 Note

•	Arrows appear orange when they are turned on, and grayed and broken when they are turned off. For more information about using the arrows for color correction, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box."

•	The display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer does not affect output.

Related Topics

Correcting colors for display


Bringing images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT

You can bring images into Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 in a variety of ways.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening images

•	finding and inserting image content

•	importing files

•	scanning images

•	loading photos from a digital camera

•	starting new images

•	working with vector graphics


Opening images

You can open most bitmaps in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Each image you open displays in its own image window.

You can also import images. Importing allows you to add a new image to the active image window. For more information, see "Importing files."

Related Topics

To open an image


To open an image

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

You can also
(Windows) View image previews	Enable the Preview checkbox.
Decrease the dimensions of an image as you open it	Choose Resample from the list box beside the Files of type list box.
 Tip

•	You can also open an image by clicking the Open button on the standard toolbar. If the standard toolbar is not displayed, click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Standard.

Related Topics

Opening images


Finding and inserting image content

You can use clipart, photos, and sounds stored on the Corel content CDs or that are available online. The digital content manual contains pictures of the graphics available on the CD and their folder locations.

In Windows, you can also access online images directly from Corel on the Web through the Scrapbook Docker window.

Mac OS X has a content find and search tool, Sherlock. You can use Sherlock to browse for images using the thumbnail views or use keywords to search for content on the CDs.

Related Topics

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert a file into an active image


To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

1	Click Window [image] Dockers [image] Scrapbook [image] Browse.

2	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

3	Double-click an icon in the CD list, and navigate to a folder.

You can also
Browse for files on your computer or network	Double-click the Desktop icon on the Windows task bar, and navigate to a folder.
Browse for images online	Click the Content on the Web button.
Display the folder tree	Click the flyout arrow at the top of the Scrapbook Docker window, and click Show tree.
 Note

•	To browse for images online, you must be connected to the Internet.

 Tip

•	To change your browsing view in the Scrapbook Docker window, click the flyout arrow, click View, and choose a view type.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting image content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert a file into an active image


To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

1	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

2	Double-click the Sherlock icon in the Dock.

3	Double-click the CD icon in the list of disks.

4	Choose the folder you want to browse.

 Tips

•	When you insert a CD into the CD drive, its icon displays on the desktop. Double-click the icon to browse for content in the folders on the CD.

•	To get Help using Sherlock, click Help [image] Sherlock Help.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting image content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert a file into an active image


To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

1	Click Window [image] Dockers [image] Scrapbook [image] Search.

2	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

3	Type a word in the Search for box.

You can also
Search different categories	In the Search in area, enable the check box for each category you want to search.
Display the next page of search results	Click the Forward button.
Search using a different word	Click the New search button, and type a new word.
 Tip

•	You can specify how you want the search results displayed by clicking one of the following buttons: Large icons, Small icons, List icons, Detail view.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting image content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert a file into an active image


To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

1	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

2	Double-click the Sherlock icon in the Dock.

3	Enable the CD icon check box in the list of disks.

4	Enable the Filenames option.

5	Type a word in the text box.

6	Click the magnifying glass button.

 Tips

•	To get Help using Sherlock, click Help [image] Sherlock Help.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting image content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To insert a file into an active image


To insert a file into an active image

•	Drag the image or sound file to the image window.

 Tips

•	You can also open a file in a new image window by dragging the file to the application window.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting image content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)


Importing files

Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides filters that convert files from one format to another when you import them. You can import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. The imported file becomes part of the active image. You can also bring in a file by opening it in a new application window.

You can use the import filter's default settings or choose the settings you want when you import the file. You can also save a file's embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to a local color folder.

While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to change the number of pixels, eliminate unusable detail, and reduce the file size. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact area and size of the image you want to import.

Related Topics

To import a file into an active image

To resample an image while importing

To crop an image while importing


To import a file into an active image

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening the dialog box

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

6	Click Import.

7	Click the image window.

Tip

•	You can also import a file by opening it in a new application window. For more information about opening a file in a new application window, see "To open an image".

Related Topics

Importing files

To resample an image while importing

To crop an image while importing


To resample an image while importing

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening the dialog box

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

6	Choose Resample from the list box, and click Import.

7	In the Resample image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Width [image] specifies the width of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original width

•	Height [image] specifies the height of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original height

8	In the Resolution section, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi)

•	Vertical [image] lets you specify the vertical resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi)

9	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image	Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box.
Change the units of measurement	Choose a unit type from the Units list box.
Maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values automatically	Enable the Identical values check box.
 Notes

•	If a dialog box for the import format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats".

•	You cannot increase the resolution of a file when importing.

Tip

•	You can also import a file by opening it in a new application window. For more information about opening a file in a new application window, see "To open an image".

Related Topics

Importing files

To import a file into an active image

To crop an image while importing


To crop an image while importing

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS) list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening the dialog box

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

6	Choose Crop from the list box, and click Import.

7	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Top [image] specifies the area to remove from the top of the graphic

•	Left [image] specifies the area to remove from the left edge of the graphic

•	Width [image] specifies the width of the graphic you want to keep

•	Height [image] specifies the height of the graphic you want to keep

8	Click the image window.

 Note

•	When you import 16-color bitmaps, they are automatically converted to 256-color.

 Tips

•	You can also resize an image by dragging the selection box in the preview window.

•	You can change the units of measurement by choosing a unit type from the Units list box, in the Crop image dialog box.

Related Topics

Importing files

To import a file into an active image

To resample an image while importing


Scanning images

You can scan photos into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

In Windows, Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports scanners that use Microsoft Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), which provides a standard interface for loading images. You can also use WIA to set Corel PHOTO-PAINT as the default application for opening images; you can then load images directly from a scanner into Corel PHOTO-PAINT without having to start the application first.

If your scanner does not support WIA, or if you are using the Mac OS, you can use the scanner's software and TWAIN driver for loading images. The software interfaces and options vary. For information about using your scanner's software, see the manufacturer's documentation.

Related Topics

To scan images (Windows)

To scan images (Mac OS)


To scan images (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Select source.

2	Choose your scanner from the Sources list.

3	Click Select.

4	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

5	In the Get pictures dialog box, choose the images you want to copy.

If your scanner does not support WIA, you are presented with the scanner's interface for loading images. Options will vary.

6	Click Get pictures.

 Note

•	The WIA interface is available only for the Windows Me and Windows XP operating systems.

 Tip

•	To scan additional images during the same session, click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

Related Topics

Scanning images

To scan images (Mac OS)


To scan images (Mac OS)

1	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Select source.

2	Choose your scanner from the Sources list.

3	Click Select.

4	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

5	Follow the instructions provided by the scanner's manufacturer to choose the images.

 Tip

•	To scan additional images during the same session, click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

Related Topics

Scanning images

To scan images (Windows)


Loading photos from a digital camera

You can load photos from a digital camera into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

In Windows, Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports digital cameras that use Microsoft Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), which provides a standard interface for loading photos.

You can also use WIA to set Corel PHOTO-PAINT as the default application for opening photos; you can then load photos directly from a camera into Corel PHOTO-PAINT without having to start the application first.

If your digital camera does not support WIA, or if you are using the Mac OS, you can use the digital camera's software and TWAIN driver for loading photos. The software interfaces and options for loading photos vary. For information about using your digital camera's software, see the manufacturer's documentation.

In the Mac OS, you can also bring images from iPhoto into Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Once you set Corel PHOTO-PAINT as the default image editing application, you can open photos stored in iPhoto simply by double-clicking them. Corel PHOTO-PAINT will start automatically.

Viewing digital camera photo information

In both Windows and the Mac OS, you can view EXIF data about digital camera images. When you take a photo with a digital camera, the camera attaches information to the image, such as the date and time the image was captured, the exposure, and flash settings. When you load a digital camera image into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can view this extra information.

Related Topics

To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)

To view EXIF information for digital camera photos


To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

1	Connect a digital camera to your computer.

2	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Select source.

3	Choose a digital camera from the Sources box.

4	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

5	In the Get pictures dialog box, choose the images you want to copy.

If your digital camera does not support WIA, you are presented with the digital camera's interface for loading photos. Options will vary.

6	Click Get pictures.

 Note

•	The WIA interface is available only for the Windows Me and Windows XP operating systems.

 Tip

•	To load additional photos during the same session, click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

Related Topics

Loading photos from a digital camera

To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)

To view EXIF information for digital camera photos


To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

1	Connect a digital camera to your computer.

2	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Select source.

3	Choose a digital camera from the Sources box.

4	Click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

5	Follow the instructions provided by the digital camera's manufacturer to choose the images.

 Tip

•	To load additional photos during the same session, click File [image] Acquire image [image] Acquire.

Related Topics

Loading photos from a digital camera

To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)

To view EXIF information for digital camera photos


To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

1	Connect a digital camera to your computer.

2	In the dialog box, choose Corel PHOTO-PAINT in the Select the program to launch for this action area.

3	Enable the Always use this program for this action checkbox.

Double-clicking a thumbnail in the digital camera directory will bring the image into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Note

•	If your camera does not support WIA, you cannot associate Corel PHOTO-PAINT with the digital camera.

Related Topics

Loading photos from a digital camera

To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)

To view EXIF information for digital camera photos


To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)

1	Start iPhoto.

2	Click iPhoto [image] Preferences.

3	In the Double-clicking photos opens them in area, enable the Other option.

4	Click Set.

5	In the Open dialog box, choose the Corel PHOTO-PAINT application icon.

6	Click Open.

7	In iPhoto, double-click the thumbnail for the photo you want to open.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT starts automatically and opens the selected photo.

Related Topics

Loading photos from a digital camera

To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To view EXIF information for digital camera photos


To view EXIF information for digital camera photos

1	Click File [image] Document Properties.

2	Click the EXIF tab.

When an image does not have EXIF data attached, the EXIF tab will not display.

Related Topics

Loading photos from a digital camera

To load photos from a digital camera (Windows)

To load photos from a digital camera (Mac OS)

To open digital camera photos automatically in Corel PHOTO-PAINT (Windows)

To load photos from iPhoto (Mac OS)


Starting new images

You can produce original artwork by starting an image from scratch, or by duplicating an existing image. You can also use data copied to the Clipboard from another image window or another application.

When you start an image from scratch, you can specify the size of the image, its background color, and the color mode you want to use. You can also choose the image resolution, or the number of pixels per unit of measure.

Related Topics

To start an image from scratch

To start an image from a duplicate

To create an image using the Clipboard contents


To start an image from scratch

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box.

3	Open the Background color picker, and click a color for the background.

4	Choose a size from the Size list box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait

•	Landscape

6	Choose a value from the Resolution list box.

 Note

•	Higher image resolution results in a larger file size.

 Tips

•	You can specify a custom page size by choosing Custom from the Size list box and typing values in the Width and Height boxes.

•	You can also create an image by clicking the New button on the standard toolbar. If the standard toolbar is not displayed, click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Standard.

Related Topics

Starting new images

To start an image from a duplicate

To create an image using the Clipboard contents


To start an image from a duplicate

1	Click Image [image] Duplicate.

2	Type a filename in the As box.

If you want to combine the objects and background in the new image, enable the Merge objects with background check box.

Related Topics

Starting new images

To start an image from scratch

To create an image using the Clipboard contents


To create an image using the Clipboard contents

•	Click File [image] New from Clipboard.

Related Topics

Starting new images

To start an image from scratch

To start an image from a duplicate


Working with vector graphics

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you work with bitmaps, also called raster images. Bitmaps are composed of tiny squares called pixels; each pixel is mapped to a location in an image, and has numerical color values. The location and color value data is stored as bits [image] hence the name bitmaps.

Vector graphics are made up of lines, curves, objects, and fills that are all calculated mathematically. Although you cannot work with vector graphics in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can convert vector graphics to bitmaps as you open or import them. This conversion process is called rasterization. You can also copy vector graphics from CorelDRAW and paste them into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Vector graphics usually have a smaller file size than bitmaps, so expect file size to increase when you convert vector graphics to bitmaps.

Related Topics

To open a vector graphic

To import a vector graphic


To open a vector graphic

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	From the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS), choose the vector file format of the file you want to import.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, specify the settings you want.

 Tip

•	You can copy a vector graphic in CorelDRAW and paste it into Corel PHOTO-PAINT by clicking File [image] New from clipboard.

Related Topics

Working with vector graphics

To import a vector graphic


To import a vector graphic

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	From the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS), choose the vector file format of the file you want to import.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open.

6	Click in the image window.

7	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, specify the settings you want.

 Tip

•	You can copy a vector graphic in CorelDRAW and paste it into Corel PHOTO-PAINT by clicking File [image] New from clipboard.

Related Topics

Working with vector graphics

To open a vector graphic


Masking

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, you can isolate areas in an image that you want to edit, while protecting the remaining areas from change using masks. Masks, with their combination of editable and protected areas, let you modify images with precision.

In this section you'll learn about

•	distinguishing protected and editable areas

•	defining editable areas

•	defining editable areas using color information

•	expanding and contracting editable areas

•	inverting and removing masks

•	moving and aligning editable areas

•	transforming editable areas

•	adjusting the edges of editable areas

•	adjusting the transparency of masks

•	cutting out image areas

For information about clip masks, see "Using clip masks to change object transparency."


Distinguishing protected and editable areas

You can use masks for advanced image editing. Masks function like a stencil placed over an image: protected areas prevent paint and effects from affecting the underlying image, whereas editable areas let paint and effects reach the image. When you define an editable area for an image, you also define a corresponding mask, or protected area, for the same image.

Mask overlay

By default, a mask overlay displays only over protected areas to make it easy to differentiate between protected and editable areas. The mask overlay is a red-tinted, transparent sheet. If you adjust the transparency of a mask in certain areas, the degree of red displayed by the mask overlay in those areas will vary accordingly.

You can hide the mask overlay. You can also change the color of the mask overlay so that it can be seen clearly against the colors of the image in the editable areas.

Mask marquee

The border separating an editable area and its corresponding protected area is indicated by a dashed outline, called the mask marquee. You can display the mask marquee only after hiding the mask overlay. You can change the color of the mask marquee so that it can be seen clearly against an image's colors.

Positioning the mask marquees on the edge of an editable area

If your editable area has a feathered edge, the mask marquee is placed by default along the outermost edge of the feathered section. However, you can specify a threshold value to position the mask marquee anywhere within the feathered edge of the section. For example, you may want the mask marquee to enclose only the pixels that are 100-percent editable and exclude those that begin to blend with the protected area.

Adjusting the position of the mask marquee does not modify the size of the editable area; the mask marquee merely starts when a certain level of transparency is reached.

Related Topics

To display or hide the mask overlay

To change the color of the mask overlay

To display or hide the mask marquee

To change the color of the mask marquee

To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area


To display or hide the mask overlay

•	Click Mask [image] Mask overlay.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the mask overlay is visible.

Related Topics

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

To change the color of the mask overlay

To display or hide the mask marquee

To change the color of the mask marquee

To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area


To change the color of the mask overlay

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Open the Mask tint color picker, and click a color.

Related Topics

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

To display or hide the mask overlay

To display or hide the mask marquee

To change the color of the mask marquee

To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area


To display or hide the mask marquee

•	Click Mask [image] Marquee visible.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the marquee is visible.

 Note

•	The mask marquee does not display when you use a mask overlay or when you are adjusting the transparency of a mask.

Related Topics

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

To display or hide the mask overlay

To change the color of the mask overlay

To change the color of the mask marquee

To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area


To change the color of the mask marquee

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Open the Mask marquee color picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	The mask marquee does not display when you use a mask overlay or when you are adjusting the transparency of a mask.

Related Topics

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

To display or hide the mask overlay

To change the color of the mask overlay

To display or hide the mask marquee

To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area


To position a mask marquee along the edge of an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Type a grayscale value in the Mask threshold box.

 Note

•	The threshold value you specify is used for all other masks you create until you change the value.

Related Topics

Distinguishing protected and editable areas

To display or hide the mask overlay

To change the color of the mask overlay

To display or hide the mask marquee

To change the color of the mask marquee


Defining editable areas

There are a number of ways to define an editable area in an image without using color information from the image.

Defining a rectangular or elliptical editable area

You can define rectangular or elliptical editable areas in an image.

Defining an editable area using an object, text, or the Clipboard contents

You can define an editable area using objects. When you create an editable area that has the shape of one or more objects, you have to move the objects away from the editable area before editing it.

You can define an editable area using text. The editable area created when you type has the font and style characteristics you specify. You can also create an editable area from existing text.

You can define an editable area using the Clipboard contents by pasting the information from the Clipboard into the image window as an editable area. The area you create is a floating editable area, which you can edit and move without changing the underlying image pixels.

Defining an editable area by freehand

You can define an editable area by outlining the image area as you would using a pencil and paper, or by clicking at different points on the image to anchor straight line segments.

You can also define an editable area by painting over it with a brush.

Defining a border-shaped editable area

You can define a border-shaped editable area from the edges of an existing editable area to frame parts of an image with a color, a texture, or a special effect. A new mask marquee is placed a specified number of pixels on either side of an existing mask marquee to define a border-shaped editable area.

Defining the entire image as an editable area

You can also define the entire image as an editable area. This feature is very useful when you want to apply a special effect requiring a mask to the entire image . For information about special effects, see "Applying special effects."

Related Topics

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by freehand

To paint an editable area

To define a border-shaped editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click one of the following:

•	Rectangle mask tool

•	Ellipse mask tool

2	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3	On the extended property bar, choose one of the following from the Mask style list box:

•	Normal [image] lets you manually define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

•	Fixed size [image] lets you specify the width and height of a rectangular or elliptical editable area

•	Row(s) [image] lets you define a rectangular editable area across the width of the image. You can specify the height of the row and the roundness of the rectangle.

•	Column(s) [image] lets you define a rectangular editable area along the height of the image. You can specify the width of the column and the roundness of the rectangle.

4	Drag in the image window to define the editable area manually, or click to position an editable area of a specified size or orientation.

 Tips

•	Using the Normal mask style, you can define a square or circular editable area by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) after you begin to drag in the image window.

•	Using the Normal mask style, you can define an editable area from its center by holding down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) after you begin to drag in the image window.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by freehand

To paint an editable area

To define a border-shaped editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an area using	Do the following
Text	Click the Text tool, and specify the text attributes on the property bar. Click the Create text mask button on the extended property bar, type the text, and click anywhere in the toolbox to apply the changes.
One or more objects	Select one or more objects, and click Mask [image] Create [image] Mask from object(s).
The Clipboard contents	Click Edit [image] Paste [image] Paste as new selection.
 Tip

•	You can also define an editable area using one or more selected objects by clicking the Create mask button on the Mask/object toolbar. If the Mask/object toolbar is not displayed, click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Mask/object.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area by freehand

To paint an editable area

To define a border-shaped editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To define an editable area by freehand

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click the Freehand mask tool.

2	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3	Click where you want to start and end each line segment in the image window.

4	Double-click to finish.

 Tip

•	You can also define an editable area by dragging the Freehand mask tool in the image window, and double-clicking to complete the outline.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To paint an editable area

To define a border-shaped editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To paint an editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click the Brush mask tool.

2	Specify the tool's attributes on the property bar.

3	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

4	Drag in the image window.

 Tips

•	You can change the size of the brush nib of the Brush mask tool, by holding down Alt (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and dragging in the image window. Release the key when the nib is the size you want.

•	(Windows) You can apply a straight brush stroke using the Brush mask tool, by holding down Ctrl after you begin to drag in the image window. While still holding down Ctrl, you can press and release Shift to switch between horizontal and vertical brush strokes.

•	(Mac OS) You can apply a straight brush stroke using the Mask brush tool, by holding down Shift after you begin to drag in the image window. While still holding down Shift, you can press Command to switch between horizontal and vertical brush strokes.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by freehand

To define a border-shaped editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To define a border-shaped editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click a mask tool.

2	Define an editable area.

3	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Border.

4	Type a value in the Width box.

5	Choose an edge type from the Edges list box.

 Note

•	A soft edge produces a more gradual blend with the background image than a hard edge does.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by freehand

To paint an editable area

To define the entire image as an editable area


To define the entire image as an editable area

•	Click Mask [image] Select all.

 Note

•	If the mask overlay is enabled, you cannot see the mask marquee.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas

To define a rectangular or elliptical editable area

To define an editable area using text, objects, or the Clipboard contents

To define an editable area by freehand

To paint an editable area

To define a border-shaped editable area


Defining editable areas using color information

You can define the editable and protected areas of a mask using the color information in an image. When you use color information, you must specify seed colors and a color tolerance value. A seed color is the base color you use to define either protected or editable area. The color tolerance value defines the percentage of color variation from the seed color that is allowed in the mask; a greater tolerance value adds more colors to the protected or editable areas. Color tolerance is based on color similarity.

Defining editable areas using uniform colors

You can define an editable area of uniform color or an editable area surrounded by uniform colors. When the area is surrounded by uniform colors you can either make a rough outline that contracts to fit the area you want to edit, or define an editable area based on the boundary between uniform colors.

Defining editable areas throughout an image

You can define editable areas throughout an image using a color mask. A color mask lets you select seed colors throughout the image instead of in a specific area.

The color threshold lets you further refine the range of colors that are included in the editable area. The threshold value evaluates the brightness of each seed color and determines which pixels are included in the editable area. Adjusting the color threshold lets you soften or sharpen the pixels at the edge of the editable area. To adjust the threshold levels of a color mask, you can use a grayscale preview of your image to display masked areas in black, and editable areas in white.

Defining editable areas in a specific color channel

You can define an editable area in specific color channels. Every color image has a number of color channels, each representing one component of the image's color model. For example, an RGB image is composed of a red channel, a green channel, and a blue channel. When an image is displayed in its individual color channels, only part of its color information is displayed. Displaying only certain color channels lets you define an editable area with greater precision.

Related Topics

To define an editable area of uniform color

To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

To define editable areas throughout an image

To define editable areas in specific color channels


To define an editable area of uniform color

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click the Magic wand mask tool.

2	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3	Type a tolerance value in the Tolerance box.

4	Click a color in the image.

 Note

•	To edit an intricate image shape set against a plain background, you can define the background as an editable area of uniform color, and then invert the mask to make the shape editable. For more information about inverting masks, see "Inverting and removing masks."

•	The color of the first pixel that you click establishes the seed color; all adjacent pixels with colors within the specified color tolerance range are included in the editable area. The editable area expands until it reaches pixels with colors that exceed the specified color tolerance.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas using color information

To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

To define editable areas throughout an image

To define editable areas in specific color channels


To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

1	Open the Mask flyout, and choose one of the following:

•	Lasso mask tool [image] lets you roughly outline an image area and then contract the mask marquee around a specified range of colors within that area; uses an initial seed color

•	Magnetic mask tool [image] lets you establish a mask marquee along a boundary between colors in an image; uses multiple seed colors

2	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3	Type a tolerance value in the Tolerance box.

4	In the image window, click a color you want to protect from changes, and click at different points to outline the editable area.

5	Double-click to complete the outline.

 Note

•	You can choose whether only the color of the first pixel or the color of every pixel you click establishes a seed color. The color tolerance range indicates the range of colors protected from changes. When the first pixel that you click establishes the seed color, the protected area expands until the specified color tolerance is reached. When using the Lasso mask tool, the completed outline of the editable area contracts from your original outline to fit the irregular shape produced by excluding all the pixels from the original outline which fall within the specified color tolerance range. When using the Magnetic mask tool, every pixel that you click establishes a seed color, so that each time you click, the protected area expands until the specified color tolerance is reached. The color tolerance is measured in relation to the current seed color and within a specific area around the pointer.

 Tip

•	You can also drag in the image window to outline by freehand. It is recommended, however, when using the Magnetic mask tool, that you click frequently to set multiple seed colors and to establish multiple anchor points.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas using color information

To define an editable area of uniform color

To define editable areas throughout an image

To define editable areas in specific color channels


To define editable areas throughout an image

1	Click Mask [image] Color mask.

2	Click the Normal mode button.

3	Choose Sampled colors from the top pop-up menu.

4	Click the Eyedropper tool, and click each seed color in the image window.

5	Click the Preview button.

6	From the list box beside the Preview button, choose one of the following:

•	Overlay [image] displays protected areas covered by a red-tinted transparent sheet

•	Grayscale [image] displays protected areas in black and the editable areas in white

•	Black matte [image] displays protected areas covered by a black-tinted transparent sheet

•	White matte [image] displays protected areas covered by a white-tinted transparent sheet

•	Marquee [image] displays a dotted line around the editable area

7	Click More, and enable one of the following options:

•	Normal [image] determines the color tolerance based on color similarity between pixels

•	HSB mode [image] determines the color tolerance based on similarity between hue, saturation, and brightness levels of pixels

8	In the box beside each seed color, specify the percentage of color variation permitted between pixels of that color and the remaining pixels.

9	In the Threshold area, move the Threshold slider and enable one of the following options:

•	To black [image] all pixels with a brightness value above the threshold value are added to the protected area

•	To white [image] all pixels with a brightness value above the threshold value are added to the editable area

 Notes

•	If colors from a previous session display in the Color mask dialog box, click Reset before you create a new color mask.

•	The Marquee display style is unavailable if you disable the Marquee visible command on the Mask menu.

 Tips

•	You can set a default color tolerance for a color mask by clicking the flyout button, and clicking Set tolerance default.

•	You can also specify predetermined seed colors by choosing a color preset, such as Greens, from the list box beside the Eyedropper tool.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas using color information

To define an editable area of uniform color

To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

To define editable areas in specific color channels


To define editable areas in specific color channels

1	In the Channels Docker window/palette, click the Eye icon beside a color channel.

If the Channels Docker window/palette is not open, click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Channels.

2	Open the Mask flyout, and click one of the following:

•	Lasso mask tool

•	Magic wand mask tool

3	Define an area in the image.

Related Topics

Defining editable areas using color information

To define an editable area of uniform color

To define an editable area surrounded by uniform color

To define editable areas throughout an image


Expanding and contracting editable areas

You can modify an editable area by adding and removing areas.

Adding areas to and subtracting areas from an editable area

By default, each editable area that you define replaces the last one defined. However, you can use the following mask modes if you want to retain the current editable area but modify its shape:

Mode	Description
Additive	Lets you add areas to an editable area. Areas you add to the editable area are removed from the protected areas.
Subtractive	Lets you subtract areas from an editable area. Areas you subtract from the editable area are added to the protected area.
Overlap	Lets you add areas to an already existing editable area, as long as the new areas don't overlap with the old ones. Any overlapping regions are excluded from the editable area and added to the protected area. In addition to expanding or reducing an existing editable area, this mask mode lets you define an editable area when there is no active mask.
A mask mode remains active until you change modes.

The examples below illustrate the use of the different mask modes.

Removing protected areas from within an editable area

You can remove protected areas from within an editable area. This feature is useful for modifying color masks that have large editable areas.

Expanding and contracting an editable area

You can expand and contract an editable area by a specific number of pixels. The pixels are added to or removed from the edge of the editable area.

Adding pixels of similar color to an editable area

You can add adjacent pixels of a similar color to an editable area. The editable area expands until it reaches pixels whose colors are too dissimilar from the colors in the original editable area. The color tolerance value you specify sets the percentage of color variation allowed between the pixels in the original editable area and the adjacent protected areas.

You can also add all pixels of similar color to an editable area regardless of whether they are adjacent to those in the current editable area. The color tolerance value you specify sets the percentage of color variation allowed between the pixels in the original editable areas and the protected areas.

Related Topics

To add to or subtract from an editable area

To remove protected areas from within an editable area

To expand or contract an editable area

To add adjacent pixels of similar color to an editable area


To add to or subtract from an editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click a mask tool.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Additive

•	Subtractive

•	Overlap

3	Drag in the image to define the area that you want to add to or subtract from an editable area.

 Tip

•	After you begin to drag, you can use Ctrl and Shift (Windows) or Shift and Option (Mac OS) to constrain the shape of the area you add or subtract. For example, if you're using the Ellipse mask tool, holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) constrains the shape to a circle, and holding down Ctrl + Shift (Windows) or Shift + Option (Mac OS) makes the circle expand from the center.

Related Topics

Expanding and contracting editable areas

To remove protected areas from within an editable area

To expand or contract an editable area

To add adjacent pixels of similar color to an editable area


To remove protected areas from within an editable area

•	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Remove holes.

Related Topics

Expanding and contracting editable areas

To add to or subtract from an editable area

To expand or contract an editable area

To add adjacent pixels of similar color to an editable area


To expand or contract an editable area

To	Do the following
Expand an editable area by a specific number of pixels	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Expand, and type a value in the Width box.
Contract an editable area by a specific number of pixels	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Reduce, and type a value in the Width box.
Related Topics

Expanding and contracting editable areas

To add to or subtract from an editable area

To remove protected areas from within an editable area

To add adjacent pixels of similar color to an editable area


To add adjacent pixels of similar color to an editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click the Magic wand mask tool.

2	Type a value in the Tolerance box on the property bar.

3	Click Mask [image] Mask outline, and click one of the following menu commands:

•	Grow [image] expands an editable area to include all similarly-colored adjacent pixels

•	Similar [image] expands an editable area to include all similarly-colored pixels in the entire image

Related Topics

Expanding and contracting editable areas

To add to or subtract from an editable area

To remove protected areas from within an editable area

To expand or contract an editable area


Inverting and removing masks

You can invert a mask so that the protected area becomes editable and the editable area becomes protected. Inverting a mask is useful when defining the image area that you want to protect is easier than defining the area that you want to edit. For example, if you want to edit an intricate shape in an image that is set against a plain background, it is easier to select the background, and then invert the mask.

You can remove a mask from an image when you no longer need it.

Related Topics

To invert a mask

To remove a mask


To invert a mask

•	Click Mask [image] Invert.

Related Topics

Inverting and removing masks

To remove a mask


To remove a mask

•	Click Mask [image] Remove.

 Note

•	If the editable area on your image was floating before you removed the mask, it is automatically merged with the background.

Related Topics

Inverting and removing masks

To invert a mask


Moving and aligning editable areas

You can move an editable area anywhere in an image with or without the image pixels it encloses. When an editable area and the image pixels it encloses are moved together, the pixels can be cut from the image and the hole filled with background color, or the pixels can be copied by floating the editable area.

You can align an editable area to one or more selected objects. You can also align an editable area to the center or the edges of an image. Depending on where you want an editable area to display, you can experiment with horizontal and vertical alignment options.

An editable area can also be aligned to guidelines and to the grid. For more information, see "Using the guidelines, grid, and rulers."

Related Topics

To move an editable area

To move an editable area and the image pixels it encloses

To align an editable area to an object

To align an editable area to the edges or center of an image


To move an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Drag the editable area to a new location in the image window.

 Tip

•	You can also move an editable area by nudging it.

Related Topics

Moving and aligning editable areas

To move an editable area and the image pixels it encloses

To align an editable area to an object

To align an editable area to the edges or center of an image


To move an editable area and the image pixels it encloses

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click one of the following tools:

•	Rectangle mask tool

•	Ellipse mask tool

•	Freehand mask tool

•	Lasso mask tool

•	Magnetic mask tool

•	Magic wand mask tool

2	Click the Normal button on the property bar.

3	Drag the editable area to a new location.

 Note

•	When an editable area is moved once, the underlying image is replaced with the background color. If the same editable area is moved again, the underlying image is no longer replaced with the background color.

 Tips

•	You can leave a copy of an editable area you move by holding down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag.

•	You can also move an editable area by nudging it.

Related Topics

Moving and aligning editable areas

To move an editable area

To align an editable area to an object

To align an editable area to the edges or center of an image


To align an editable area to an object

1	Select the objects to which you want to align the editable area.

2	Click Mask [image] Align.

3	In the Mask align dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Active object

•	Selected object(s)

4	Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes:

•	Top

•	Center

•	Bottom

5	Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

If you want to align the editable area to the grid lines nearest to the specified objects, enable the Align to grid check box.

Related Topics

Moving and aligning editable areas

To move an editable area

To move an editable area and the image pixels it encloses

To align an editable area to the edges or center of an image


To align an editable area to the edges or center of an image

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click a mask tool.

2	Click Mask [image] Align.

3	Enable the Document option.

4	Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes:

•	Top

•	Center

•	Bottom

5	Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

 Note

•	When you align an editable area to the edges or center of an image with the Align to grid check box enabled, the editable area is aligned to the grid lines nearest to the specified edges or center of the image.

Related Topics

Moving and aligning editable areas

To move an editable area

To move an editable area and the image pixels it encloses

To align an editable area to an object


Transforming editable areas

You can change the form of an editable area of a mask by rotating, scaling, sizing, flipping, skewing, distorting, or applying perspective to it. If an editable area is floating above the image, it is automatically merged with the underlying image when it is transformed.

Transformation	Description
Rotating	Lets you rotate an editable area
Scaling	Lets you size an editable area to a percentage of its original size
Sizing	Lets you change the width and height of an editable area
Flipping	Lets you create a mirror image of an editable area by flipping the object vertically or horizontally
Skewing	Lets you slant an editable area in one direction. One side remains stationary, while the other sides move in the specified direction. All opposite sides maintain a parallel relation to each other
Distorting	Lets you stretch or shrink an editable area disproportionately
Applying perspective	Lets you give a three-dimensional appearance to an editable area
Related Topics

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To rotate an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Rotate mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a corner handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

 Tips

•	You can rotate an editable area by a specific angle by typing a value in the Rotation angle box on the extended property bar and clicking the Apply transformation button.

•	You can move the center of rotation relative to its current location by clicking the Relative center button on the extended property bar, typing new values in the Position boxes, and clicking the Apply transformation button.

Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To scale an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Scale mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a corner handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

You can also	Do the following
Scale an editable area with precision	On the extended property bar, type values in the Size boxes. The values are in percent.
Scale an editable area non-proportionately	Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag a corner handle.
Scale an editable area from the center	Hold down Shift as you drag a corner handle.
Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To size an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Position and size mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a middle handle of the mask marquee.

If you want to size the editable area proportionally, drag a corner handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

You can also	Do the following
Size an editable area with precision	On the extended property bar, type values in the Size boxes.
Size an editable area from the center	Hold down Shift as you drag a center transformation handle. The change in size occurs in two opposite directions.
Size an editable area in 100-percent increments	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) as you drag a transformation handle.
Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To flip an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Scale mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a center handle of the mask marquee across the editable area past the opposite center handle.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

 Tips

•	You can flip an editable area symmetrically by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and dragging a middle handle across the editable area past the opposite middle handle.

Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To skew an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Skew mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a middle handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

 Tips

•	Before applying the transformation, you can return an editable area to its original size by pressing Esc.

Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To distort an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To distort an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Distort mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a transformation handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

 Tips

•	You can also set the Mask transform tool to the Distort mode by clicking in the editable area until the handles you can use to distort the editable area display.

•	Before applying the transformation, you can return the editable area to its original size by pressing Esc.

Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To apply perspective to an editable area


To apply perspective to an editable area

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Open the Pick flyout, and click the Mask transform tool.

•	(Mac OS) Click the Mask transform tool.

2	Click the Perspective mode button on the property bar.

3	Drag a transformation handle of the mask marquee.

4	Double-click in the editable area.

 Tips

•	You can also set the Mask transform tool to the Perspective mode by clicking in the editable area until the handles you can use to apply perspective display.

•	Before applying the transformation, you can return an editable area to its original size by pressing Esc.

Related Topics

Transforming editable areas

To rotate an editable area

To scale an editable area

To size an editable area

To flip an editable area

To skew an editable area

To distort an editable area


Adjusting the edges of editable areas

You can adjust the edges of an editable area to customize the transition between a protected area and an editable area.

Preventing jagged edges in an editable area

You can avoid the appearance of jagged edges from editable areas with curved and diagonal lines by applying anti-aliasing. Anti-aliasing makes some of the pixels located on the inside edge of an editable area semitransparent, creating a smoother outline.

Feathering the edges of an editable area

Feathering gradually increases the transparency of the pixels along the edge of an editable area to soften the edge between the protected and editable areas. You can specify the width of the feathered area and the feathering direction, which determines where the feathering is located relative to the mask marquee. From the mask marquee, the feathering direction can go into the protected areas, into the editable areas, or an equal distance into both areas.

Applying a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

You can remove the feathering from the edges of an editable area and create a new, sharper edge by setting a threshold value. All the pixels in the feathered editable area have a grayscale value from 0 (black and fully protected) to 255 (white and fully editable). The threshold value you specify determines where along the feathered edge you want the new, unfeathered edge to be created. For example, if you set a threshold value of 110, all pixels within the editable area with a grayscale value of less than 110 are protected, and all pixels with a value of more than 110 are editable.

Smoothing the edges of an editable area

You can smooth the edges of an editable area to remove sharp angles. Smoothing averages the grayscale values of a specified number of pixels at the edge of an editable area. For example, if you specify a radius value of 10, 10 pixels to the left and the right of the editable area's edge are checked. If there are more editable pixels than protected pixels, the editable area is expanded; if the protected pixels outnumber the editable pixels, the protected area is expanded.

Smoothing is useful when you work with complex color masks. For example, when you smooth the edges of an editable area, protected areas that are isolated within the editable areas are often removed.

Applying color or a paint effect along the edges of an editable area

You can apply color or a paint effect along the edges of an editable area to emphasize or blend the boundary between the editable and protected areas. You can also reapply color or a paint effect along the edges of an editable area. Repeating a brush stroke lets you enhance the effect.

Related Topics

To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

To feather the edges of an editable area

To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

To smooth the edges of an editable area

To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area


To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

1	Open the Mask flyout, and click a mask tool.

2	Click the Anti-aliasing button on the extended property bar.

 Notes

•	Anti-aliasing is enabled by default when you use the Ellipse, Freehand, Lasso, and Magic wand tools to define an editable area.

•	Anti-aliasing is not available for the Rectangle mask tool.

Related Topics

Adjusting the edges of editable areas

To feather the edges of an editable area

To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

To smooth the edges of an editable area

To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area


To feather the edges of an editable area

1	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Feather.

2	Type a value in the Width box.

3	From the Direction list box, choose one of the following:

•	Inside [image] feathers in from the editable area's edge and appears to blend the protected area into the editable area

•	Outside [image] feathers out from the editable area's edge and blends the editable area so that it appears to overlap the protected area

•	Middle [image] places an equal number of feathered pixels on the inside and outside of the editable area's edge

•	Average [image] samples all the pixels in the area you specified in the Width box and assigns an average color value to each

4	Choose an edge type from the Edges list box.

If you want to preview the results, click Preview.

Related Topics

Adjusting the edges of editable areas

To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

To smooth the edges of an editable area

To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area


To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

1	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Threshold.

2	Type a value in the Level box.

Related Topics

Adjusting the edges of editable areas

To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

To feather the edges of an editable area

To smooth the edges of an editable area

To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area


To smooth the edges of an editable area

1	Click Mask [image] Mask outline [image] Smooth.

2	Type a value in the Radius box.

Related Topics

Adjusting the edges of editable areas

To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

To feather the edges of an editable area

To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area


To apply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area

1	Click one of the following:

•	Paint tool

•	Effect tool

•	Image Sprayer tool

•	Eraser tool

•	Replace color brush tool

2	Set the tool's attributes on the property bar.

3	Click Mask [image] Create [image] Brush stroke from mask.

4	Choose one of the following positions:

•	Middle of mask border [image] centers the stroke on the edge of the editable area

•	Inside of mask [image] places the stroke inside the edge of the editable area

•	Outside of mask [image] places the stroke outside the edge of the editable area.

 Tip

•	You can reapply color or an effect along the edges of an editable area by clicking Edit [image] Repeat brush stroke, and clicking the Repeat stroke on mask button in the Repeat stroke dialog box.

Related Topics

Adjusting the edges of editable areas

To prevent jagged edges in an editable area

To feather the edges of an editable area

To apply a sharp edge to a feathered editable area

To smooth the edges of an editable area


Adjusting the transparency of masks

You can adjust the transparency of a mask to control the extent to which pixels in the image are protected from changes. When you adjust the transparency of a mask, you use a grayscale representation of the mask. Any color that you apply to the image displays in its corresponding shade of gray; therefore, the darker the shade that is applied to the mask, the less the color and effects can change the image. For example, if you use a brush to apply a color with a grayscale value of 127 (the midpoint of the 256 shades of gray) to an image area, this area receives only 50 percent of any effect that is later applied to it.

Since you are editing a grayscale representation of the mask, you can use a color, object, effect, or another mask to modify the transparency of the mask. You can also change the transparency of the mask by pasting images from the Clipboard; the grayscale values of the pasted images are applied to the mask.

Related Topics

To adjust the transparency of a mask


To adjust the transparency of a mask

1	Click Mask [image] Paint on mask.

2	Apply a color, mask, object, or effect to the areas in which you want to change the transparency of the mask.

3	Click Mask [image] Paint on mask.

 Note

•	The darker the shade of gray applied, the less editable the underlying pixels become.

Related Topics

Adjusting the transparency of masks


Cutting out image areas

You can cut out image areas by removing the surrounding background. This feature lets you isolate even the most detailed image areas while preserving edge detail, such as hair or blurred edges. The cut-out image area becomes an object that you can place against any background image.

To cut out an image area, you begin by drawing a highlight over its edges. Then, you apply a fill to define the inside of the area. You can preview the cut-out image with the background removed, and you can switch between the cut-out and original views of the image to evaluate the results. If necessary, you can erase and redo sections of the highlighted area.

You can customize the thickness of the highlighted and erased lines for best results. For example, if an image area has hard edges, you can use a thinner line to define its edges more precisely. Conversely, if an image area has blurred or wispy edges that are hard to define, you can use a thicker line.

To make it easier to work, you can change the highlight and fill color. You can also zoom in to get a closer look at image detail or zoom out to view a larger area of the image. You can pan to view image areas that fall outside the preview window.

Related Topics

To cut out an image area


To cut out an image area

1	Click Image [image] Cutout.

2	In the Cutout dialog box, click the Highlighter tool.

3	In the preview window, draw a line along the edges of the image area you want to cut out.

The line should slightly overlap the surrounding background.

4	Click the Inside fill tool, and click inside the image area.

5	Click Preview.

If you want to switch between the original and cut-out view of an image, choose a view from the View list box.

You can also	Do the following
Erase highlighted sections	Click the Eraser tool, and draw over highlighted sections you want to remove.
Set the nib size of the Highlighter and Eraser tools	Choose a nib size from the Nib size list box.
Change the highlight color	Choose a highlight color from the Highlight color list box.
Change the fill color	Choose a fill color from the Fill color list box.
Zoom in and out	Using the Zoom in or Zoom out tool, click in the preview window.
Pan to another area of an image	Using the Pan tool, drag the image until the area you want to see is visible.
 Note

•	The Cutout command supports RGB, CMYK, grayscale, paletted, and Lab images. When brought into the Cutout dialog box, grayscale, paletted, and Lab images are automatically converted to RGB or CMYK images, which may result in a slight color shift. The original image colors are restored after applying or canceling the Cutout command.

 Tips

•	(Windows) You can switch from the Highlighter to the Eraser tool, and from the Eraser to the Highlighter tool by right-clicking in the preview window.

•	(Mac OS) You can switch from the Highlighter to the Eraser tool, and from the Eraser to the Highlighter tool by releasing the mouse button, and clicking in the preview window while holding down Control.

Related Topics

Cutting out image areas


File formats

A file format defines how an application stores information in a file. If you want to use a file created in a different application than the one you are currently using, you must import that file. Conversely, if you create a file in one application and want to use it in another application, you must export the file to a different file format.

(Windows) When you name a file, an application automatically appends a filename extension, usually three characters in length; for example, .cdr, .bmp, .tif, and .eps. This filename extension helps you and the computer differentiate between files of different formats.

The following file formats are used in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, and most of them are supported across both Windows and Macintosh platforms:

CorelDRAW (CDR)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

GIF

GIMP (XCF)

JPEG (JPG)

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

Kodak Photo CD Image

PaintBrush (PCX)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

PICT (PCT)

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

Painter (RIF)

QuickTime Movie (MOV)

Targa Bitmap (TGA)

TIFF Bitmap (TIF)

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

Other file formats

Recommended formats for importing graphics from other applications

Recommended formats for exporting graphics


Adobe Illustrator (AI)

The Adobe Illustrator file format (AI) was developed by Adobe Systems, Incorporated for the Macintosh and Windows platforms. It is primarily vector-based although later versions support bitmap information.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an Adobe Illustrator file


To import an Adobe Illustrator file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Illustrator from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

7	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Adobe Illustrator (AI)


Windows bitmap (BMP)

The Windows bitmap (BMP) file format was developed as a standard for representing graphic images as bitmaps on Windows operating system.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a bitmap file

To save to a bitmap file


To import a bitmap file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Windows bitmap from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Windows bitmap (BMP)

To save to a bitmap file


To save to a bitmap file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Windows bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

Related Topics

Windows bitmap (BMP)

To import a bitmap file


CorelDRAW (CDR)

CorelDRAW (CDR) files are primarily vector graphic drawings. Vectors define a picture as a list of graphic primitives (rectangles, lines, text, arcs, and ellipses). Vectors are mapped point by point to the page, so if you reduce or increase the size of a vector graphic, the original image will not be distorted.

Vector graphics are created in graphics design applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap-tracing applications, such as CorelTRACE, but you can also edit them in image-editing applications like Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can use vector images of various formats in desktop publishing programs.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a CorelDRAW file


To import a CorelDRAW file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose CDR - CorelDRAW from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose CorelDRAW from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

7	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

CorelDRAW (CDR)


Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) is a metafile format that supports bitmap and vector information and the full range of PANTONE, RGB, and CMYK colors. It was developed to save files created in CorelDRAW with the data necessary to open and edit them in other Corel applications.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Corel Presentation Exchange file


To import a Corel Presentation Exchange file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Corel Presentation Exchange from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

7	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)

Files saved to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format are bitmaps that represent shapes as pixels arranged to form an image. When you save a graphic to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, masks, floating objects, and lenses are saved with the image.

To import a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To save to a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file


To save to a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose CPT - Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

Related Topics

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)


AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) files are vector files used as a native format for AutoCAD drawings.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file


To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DWG-AutoCAD from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DWG from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

7	From the 3D projection list box in the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point.

If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes.

8	In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file

•	English (1 unit - 1 inch) [image] lets you scale the drawing in inches

•	Metric (1 unit - 1 mm) [image] lets you scale the drawing in millimeters

 Note

•	If you are importing a file that does not have the font installed on your system, a PANOSE font matching dialog box will display and let you substitute the font.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)


AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

The Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) contains tagged drawing information in an AutoCAD file. It is a standard format used for exporting and importing AutoCAD files between CAD applications. The Drawing Interchange format is vector-based and supports up to 256 colors.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file


To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DXF - AutoCAD from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DXF from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

7	In the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point from the 3D projection list box.

If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes.

8	In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file

•	English (1 unit - 1 inch) [image] lets you scale the drawing in inches

•	Metric (1 unit - 1 mm) [image] lets you scale the drawing in millimeters

 Note

•	If you are importing a file that does not have the font installed on your system, a PANOSE font matching dialog box will display and let you substitute the font.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)


Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file is a metafile supported by most illustration and page layout programs. To view or print an encapsulated Postscript file, you must have a PostScript printer installed.

To set exporting options

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an encapsulated PostScript file

To save to an encapsulated PostScript file


To import an encapsulated PostScript file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose EPS - Encapsulated PostScript from the Files of type list box

•	(Mac OS) Choose Encapsulated PostScript from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

7	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

To save to an encapsulated PostScript file


To save to an encapsulated PostScript file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose EPS - Encapsulated PostScript from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Encapsulated PostScript from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	In the EPS Export dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

To import an encapsulated PostScript file


GIF

GIF is a bitmap-based format designed for use on the Web. It is highly compressed to minimize file transfer time and supports images with up to 256 colors. The GIF format provides the ability to store multiple bitmaps in a file. When the multiple images are displayed in rapid succession, the file is called an animated GIF file.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the JPEG and Portable Network Graphics (PNG) formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see To optimize an image for the Web.

To save a movie as an animated GIF

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a GIF file

To save to a GIF file

To open an animated GIF file


To import a GIF file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose CompuServe bitmap from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag in the image window to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

GIF

To save to a GIF file

To open an animated GIF file


To save to a GIF file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose CompuServe bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

If your image contains more than 256 colors, you can decrease the number of colors in your image by adjusting any settings in the Convert to paletted dialog box.

6	In the GIF export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area:

•	None [image] lets you specify that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser

•	Image color [image] lets you make the color you click on the color palette transparent

•	Masked area [image] lets you make the masked area of the image transparent

If you want to display the image in the Web browser gradually so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box.

 Notes

•	For more information about the controls in the Convert to paletted dialog box, see "Changing images to the Paletted color mode.".

•	All objects in the image will be merged with the background.

 Tips

•	You can make the selected area transparent instead of the masked area by enabling the Invert mask check box.

•	You can specify the transparent color by moving the Index slider or using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original image window.

Related Topics

GIF

To import a GIF file

To open an animated GIF file


To open an animated GIF file

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose GIF - GIF animation from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose GIF animation from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Choose Full image from the list box below the list window.

6	Click Open.

 Note

•	For more information about opening and playing movies, see "Opening and playing movies."

 Tip

•	You can also open part of a movie by choosing Partial load, and, in the Partial load movie dialog box, typing values in the From and To boxes to specify the range of frames.

Related Topics

GIF

To import a GIF file

To save to a GIF file


HTML

HTML files are plain-text (also known as ASCII) files that can be created using any text editor, including SimpleText and TextEdit. HTML files are intended for display on a Web browser.

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you publish images to the Internet. For more information about preparing files for Web publishing and uploading to the Web, see Creating images for the Web.

To optimize an image for the Web

Technical notes


JPEG

JPEG is a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques. JPEG supports 8-bit grayscale and color depths up to 32-bit CMYK.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the GIF and Portable Network Graphics (PNG) formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see Exporting and optimizing images for the Web.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a JPEG file

To save to a JPEG file


To import a JPEG file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG bitmaps from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag in the image window to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

JPEG

To save to a JPEG file


To save to a JPEG file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG bitmaps from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the Save as box.

5	Click Save.

6	In the Encoding method area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Progressive [image] loads the image gradually in certain browsers so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading

•	Optimize [image] uses the optimal encoding method to produce the smallest file size

7	From the Sub format list box, choose one of the following encoding methods:

•	Standard (4:2:2) [image] creates a smaller file with some image quality loss

•	Optional (4:4:4) [image] creates a larger file, but preserves image quality

You can also	Do the following
Set the quality of the image resolution	Move the Compression slider.
Smooth the transitions between adjacent pixels of different colors	Move the Smoothing slider.
Related Topics

JPEG

To import a JPEG file


JPEG 2000 (JP2)

The JPEG 2000 (JP2) file format is a JPEG image with advanced compression and file data capabilities. JP2 files can store more descriptive file data (or metadata) than JPEG 2000 codestream files, which are optimized for network transmission. You can mask an area of a JP2 image to define a region of interest (ROI) to which you can apply a lower compression setting and, therefore, improve the image quality of that area.

You can import either JP2 or JPC files but save to the JP2 format.

When you save the image to a JP2 file, you can choose to view download progression by resolution, quality, and position.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a JPEG 2000 file

To save to a JPEG 2000 file


To import a JPEG 2000 file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JP2 - JPG 2000 bitmaps from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG 2000 bitmaps from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

Related Topics

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

To save to a JPEG 2000 file


To save to a JPEG 2000 file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 Codestream or JP2 - JPEG 2000 Standard from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG 2000 Codestream or JPEG 2000 Standard from the Format list box.

4	In the JPEG2000 Export dialog box, specify the compression ratio in the Compression box.

5	From the Progression list box, choose one of the following:

•	Quality [image] lets you set the image download by the amount of detail in the image

•	Resolution\Quality [image] lets you set the image download from low to high resolution, where the size of the entire image increases

•	Position\Quality [image] lets you set the image download from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right

•	Channels

6	Click OK.

7	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Save.

 Note

•	Setting a progression by image quality lets the user with a "slow" network connection to stop downloading a file when the desired quality is reached.

Related Topics

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

To import a JPEG 2000 file


Kodak Photo CD image

Kodak Photo CD image file is a raster format developed by Eastman Kodak for scanning photographic images onto compact discs. Photo CD allows high-quality digital storage and manipulation of photographic images. It is typically used by photofinishers and service bureaus who provide the service of placing photographs on CDs.

This file format is not supported on the Mac platform.

To import a Kodak Photo CD image file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Kodak Photo CD Image file (Windows)


To import a Kodak Photo CD Image file (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Import [image] Import.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD from the Files of type list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open.

6	Click in the image window.

7	In the PCD import dialog box, move any of the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] lets you set the amount of light

•	Contrast [image] lets you specify the contrast between the pixels in the image

•	Saturation [image] lets you specify the purity of a color

•	Red [image] lets you specify the amount of red in the image

•	Green [image] lets you specify the amount of green in the image

•	Blue [image] lets you specify the amount of blue in the image

8	Choose an image size the Resolutions list box.

9	Choose a color mode from the Image Type list box.

You can also

Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop an image while importing."
 Tips

•	You can remove the adjustments made by the photofinisher at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk by enabling the Subtract scene balance check box.

•	You can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image by enabling the Show colors out of gamut check box which renders the out-of-gamut pixels in pure red or pure blue.

Related Topics

Kodak Photo CD image


QuickTime Movie (MOV)

The QuickTime (MOV) file format is a video and animation system developed by Apple Computer. QuickTime files run on all Macintosh computers and on Windows computers that have a QuickTime driver installed.

For more information about working with QuickTime movies, see "Working with QuickTime VR movies."

To open a QuickTime VR movie


PICT

The Macintosh PICT file format was developed for the Macintosh platform by Apple Computer Inc. It is a native file format of QuickDraw and can contain both vectors and bitmaps. The Macintosh PICT file format is widely used in Macintosh applications where graphics are used.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a PICT file


To import a PICT file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Macintosh PICT from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

7	In the Import into bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

PICT


PaintBrush (PCX)

The PaintBrush (PCX) file format is a bitmap format originally developed by the ZSoft Corporation for the PC Paintbrush program.

To import a PaintBrush file

To save an image to a different format

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a PaintBrush file


To import a PaintBrush file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose PCX PaintBrush from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

Related Topics

PaintBrush (PCX)


Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) file format is an excellent file format for lossless, portable, and well-compressed storage of bitmaps. It takes up a minimum amount of disk space and can be easily read and exchanged between computers. The Portable Network Graphics format provides a replacement for the GIF format and can also replace many common uses of the TIFF format.

The Portable Network Graphics format is designed to work well in online viewing, such as on the Web, and it's fully streamable with a progressive display option. You can export images to the Portable Network Graphics file format if you want to use transparent backgrounds, image interlacing, image maps, or animation in your Web pages.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the GIF and JPEG formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see "To optimize and export an image for the Web."

To import a Portable Network Graphics file

To save to a Portable Network Graphics file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Portable Network Graphics file

To save to a Portable Network Graphics file


To import a Portable Network Graphics file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Portable Network Graphics from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag in the image window to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

To save to a Portable Network Graphics file


To save to a Portable Network Graphics file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Portable Network Graphics from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

6	In the PNG export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area:

•	None [image] lets you specify that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser

•	Image color [image] lets you make the color you click on the color palette transparent

•	Masked area [image] lets you make the masked area of an image transparent

•	Invert mask [image] lets you invert the mask area

If you want to display the image in the Web browser gradually so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box.

 Notes

•	If an image contains more than 256 colors, you must use the Convert to paletted dialog box to decrease the number of colors in your image. For more information about the controls in the Convert to paletted dialog box, see "Changing images to the paletted color mode."

•	If an image contains objects, an alert warns you that objects will be merged with the background.

 Tips

•	If you enable the Masked area option, you can enable the Invert mask check box to make the selected area transparent instead of the masked area.

•	You can specify the transparent color by typing values in the Index boxes or by using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original image window.

Related Topics

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

To import a Portable Network Graphics file


Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

The Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format is the native bitmap file format for Adobe Photoshop.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an Adobe Photoshop file

To save to an Adobe Photoshop file


To import an Adobe Photoshop file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Photoshop from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

To save to an Adobe Photoshop file


To save to an Adobe Photoshop file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Photoshop from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

 Notes

•	You can preserve Corel PHOTO-PAINT objects as layers in the PSD file format.

•	You can export to an image without a background.

Related Topics

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

To import an Adobe Photoshop file


Painter (RIF)

Importing a Painter (RIF) file retains all the information of a project, such as floating objects, making Painter files much larger than GIF or JPEG files. Painter files can be opened for editing, resizing, and adjusting floaters and shapes and can be compressed using a lossless compression method.

Related Topics

To import a Painter file


To import a Painter file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose RIFF - Painter 5/6 from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Painter 5/6 from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample an image while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Painter (RIF)


Targa (TGA)

The Targa (TGA) graphics format is a format for describing bitmaps. It supports various compression systems and is capable of representing bitmaps ranging from black and white to RGB color.

To import a Targa file

To crop an image while importing

To resample an image while importing

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a Targa file


To export a Targa file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose TGA - Targa bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Targa bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

6	In the TGA export dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Normal

•	Enhanced

 Notes

•	You can't save black-and-white images as Targa files.

 Tip

•	To compress an image while exporting, choose a compression type from the Type list box.

Related Topics

Targa (TGA)


TIFF

The Tagged Image File format (TIFF) is a raster format designed as a standard. Almost every graphics application can read and write TIFF files. There are many variations of TIFF, considering that TIFF supports six different encoding routines and three different image modes: black and white, grayscale, and color. Uncompressed TIFF images may be 1, 4, 8, 24 bits per pixel. TIFF images compressed using the LZW algorithm may be 4, 8, or 24 bits per pixel. TIFF files can save RGB, CMYK, and Lab color mode information, but not duotones.

To import a TIFF file

To crop an image while importing

To resample an image while importing

To export a TIFF file

Technical notes


WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

The Corel WordPerfect Graphic file format (WPG) is primarily a vector graphic format, but it can store both bitmap and vector data (which may contain up to 256 colors chosen from a palette of more than one million colors.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a WordPerfect Graphic file


To import a WordPerfect Graphic file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose WPG - Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Open (Windows) or Import (Mac OS).

6	Click the image window.

Related Topics

WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)


GIMP

XCF is the native GIMP format. It supports layers and other GIMP-specific information.

To import a GIMP file

Related Topics

To set exporting options


To set exporting options

To	Do the following
Specify an image header	In the Image header area of the EPS export dialog box, enable the Include thumbnail option. Choose a preview format from the Format list box. Choose a color depth for the preview from the Type list box. Type a value in the Resolution box.
Specify a clipping option	In the Clipping area of the EPS export dialog box, enable the Clip to check box. Enable any of the following options: • Mask [image] lets you save the contents of the mask area to an EPS file • Clipping path [image] lets you save the contents of either the active path or one of the paths listed in the MRU list box In the Flatness box, type a value to set the accuracy with which curved path segments are rendered on an output device, such as a printer. If you want to permanently remove the sections of the image that are outside the mask or path, enable the Discard image data outside clipping region check box.
Related Topics

GIMP


Other file formats

Corel PHOTO-PAINT also supports the following file formats:

Audio Video Interleaved (AVI)	CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)	Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)
Corel ArtShow 5 (CPX)	Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)	CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX)
GEM File (GEM)	GEM Paint (IMG)	Frame Vector Metafile (FMV)
Lotus PIC (PIC)	MacPaint Bitmap (MAC)	HPGL Plotter File (PLT)
Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)	NAP Metafile (NAP)	MET Metafile (MET)
Picture Publisher 4 (PP4)	Micrografx PHOTO-PAINT 5 (PP5)	OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)
PostScript Interpreted (PS)	SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT)	PostScript Interpreted (PRN)
Windows Metafile Format (WMF)


Recommended formats for importing graphics from other applications

Application	Recommended import format
Adobe Illustrator	AI
AutoCAD	DXF, HPGL (PLT files)
Text	Clipboard and Paragraph text import
CorelDRAW	CDR, Clipboard
Deneba Canvas, Macromedia FreeHand and other vector packages	PCT, .AI
Micrografx Designer	DRW, AI


Recommended formats for exporting graphics

The following recommendations are based on the type of printer you are using and a page layout or desktop publishing program that doesn't support graphics editing capabilities. If you have a PostScript printer and the desktop publishing program supports PostScript, use the Encapsulated PostScript file format. Otherwise, use the format shown in the table.

Application	Recommended format for PostScript printers	Recommended format for Non-PostScript printers
Adobe PageMaker	EPS	WMF
The following table contains recommended file formats for exporting to page layout and desktop publishing packages that have graphics editing capabilities:

Application	Recommended format
Adobe Illustrator	AI
AutoCAD	DXF
Macromedia FreeHand and other vector programs	PCT, AI
Micrografx Designer	CGM
The following table contains recommended file formats for exporting to graphics devices:

Device	Recommended format
Machines, plotters, and computer-driven cutters	HPGL or DXF outlines


Setting options

You can change a variety of settings in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 according to your preferences.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing workspace options

•	disabling warning messages

•	increasing memory

•	increasing the speed of image display

•	improving the display quality of images

•	using the Corel Applications Recovery Manager (Windows)


Changing workspace options

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can change the default workspace settings according to your preferences.

There are two types of display options [image] general and display. General options let you specify settings, such as unit of measure, cursor type and dialog box position.

You can also set the nudge and super nudge values. The nudge value defines the distance (in pixels) that you can move an object, editable area or guideline using arrow keys. The super nudge value is a multiple of the value.

Display options let you specify settings such as the color of paths, the mask tint color, the color of guidelines, transparency grid patterns, as well as the threshold settings for the mask and object marquees.

Related Topics

To set general options

To set display options


To set general options

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows)  Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS)  Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	Specify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Changing workspace options

To set display options


To set display options

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows)  Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS)  Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Specify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Changing workspace options

To set general options


Disabling warning messages

You may encounter warning messages while working in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Warning messages explain the consequences of an action you are about to perform, and inform you of permanent changes that might result from that action. Although the warnings are helpful, you can disable them so you don't have to view them after you become familiar with the software. Avoid disabling warning messages until you are comfortable with the application and familiar with the results of the commands you use.

Related Topics

To disable warning messages


To disable warning messages

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows)  Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS)  Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Warnings.

3	Disable one or more of the check boxes.

Related Topics

Disabling warning messages


Increasing memory

You can increase the amount of system memory available by using swap disks (Windows) or scratch disks (Mac OS). When you perform an action that requires more RAM than is available on your computer, unused image information can be temporarily stored on the hard disk. If you have two hard disks, or two partitions, you can set up both a primary and a secondary swap disk (Windows) or scratch disk (Mac OS).

Although swap disks (Windows) or scratch disks (Mac OS) let you artificially increase the amount of memory available on your computer, swapping image information to hard disks requires more processing time than when it is sent to your computer's RAM.

Related Topics

To increase the amount of available memory


To increase the amount of available memory

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows)  Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS)  Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Memory.

3	Choose the primary hard disk to use as swap disk space (Windows) or scratch disk space (Mac OS) from the Primary list box.

4	Choose the secondary hard disk to use as swap disk space (Windows) or scratch disk space (Mac OS) from the Secondary list box.

5	Click OK.

6	Restart Corel PHOTO-PAINT to apply the changes.

 Note

•	(Windows) Primary and secondary swap disk space is allocated to the user's temp folder by default. You can change the swap disk space folder only if you have system privileges.

•	You should set the total amount of swap disk space (Windows) or scratch disk space (Mac OS) to three to five times larger than the size of your uncompressed images. For information on finding the size of the active image, see "Viewing images and obtaining image information."

 Tip

•	You can display the amount of swap disk space (Windows) or scratch disk space (Mac OS) on the status bar by clicking the arrow on the status bar and clicking Memory.

Related Topics

Increasing memory


Increasing the speed of image display

You can increase the speed at which images display by increasing the cache level. Increasing the cache level creates multiple resolution versions of an image which enables Corel PHOTO-PAINT to display an image with a large file size more quickly when you change zoom levels.

Related Topics

To increase the speed of image display


To increase the speed of image display

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows)  Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS)  Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Memory.

3	In the Cache settings area, type a value in the Cache levels box.

Related Topics

Increasing the speed of image display


Improving the display quality of images

You can use screen dithering to improve the display quality of images if you are using a monitor that displays fewer than 16-million colors (24-bit color). Screen dithering places pixels with specific color values relative to other pixels. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette.

Related Topics

To improve the display quality of an image


To improve the display quality of an image

•	Click View [image] Screen dithering, and click one of the following options:

•	None [image] disables dithering when your computer is in 16-bit color mode

•	Error diffusion [image] spreads the dithering across a wider area and tailors the dithering pattern to the transition being simulated

•	Ordered [image] approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns. This dithering type applies more quickly than Error diffusion but is less accurate.

Related Topics

Improving the display quality of images


Using the Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)

Corel Application Recovery Manager (C.A.R.M.) is a wizard that allows you to save your work and exit in case the application becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it.

The C.A.R.M. wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action:

•	saving the image and exiting the application

•	exiting the application without saving the image

•	continue working

With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in an image after the last time you saved or kept the application open.

After you have made your selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be vital part of Corel's product improvement efforts.

You can disable C.A.R.M., but doing so can result in your losing any work since the last time you saved.

Related Topics

To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)


To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, click Global.

3	Disable the Enable CARM check box.

 Note

•	C.A.R.M. is shared with CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, and Corel R.A.V.E. If you disable C.A.R.M., it affects all three applications.

Related Topics

Using the Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)


Object linking and embedding (Windows)

Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a method of exchanging information between applications. Using OLE, you can take selected objects or entire files from one application, called the source application, and place them into another application, called the destination application. Objects that are placed into an application using OLE are called OLE objects. You can freely move objects and files between applications as long as all the applications involved support OLE.

Linking is useful when you want to use an object several times in the same file or in multiple files. A linked object remains connected to its source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated into the new file. Embedding results in a larger file size but is useful when you want to include all objects in one file.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting linked or embedded objects into another application

•	editing linked or embedded objects


Inserting linked or embedded objects into another application (Windows)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT lets you create OLE objects that you can insert into other applications. You can link an object by copying it from Corel PHOTO-PAINT and pasting into another application. You can also embed an object from Corel PHOTO-PAINT into another application as an OLE object.

Related Topics

To insert a linked object (Windows)

To insert an embedded object (Windows)


To insert a linked object (Windows)

1	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, select an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste special in the destination application.

4	Enable the Paste link option.

 Note

•	The file from which you copy the object in Corel PHOTO-PAINT must be saved before you insert the object in the destination application.

Related Topics

Inserting linked or embedded objects into another application (Windows)

To insert an embedded object (Windows)


To insert an embedded object (Windows)

1	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, select an object.

2	Drag the selected object to the destination application window.

 Note

•	When you insert an embedded object by dragging, the application windows of both Corel PHOTO-PAINT and the destination application must be visible.

 Tip

•	Dragging an object from one application to another deletes the object from the source application and places it in the destination application. If you want to leave a copy of the object in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, hold down Ctrl + Shift while you're dragging.

Related Topics

Inserting linked or embedded objects into another application (Windows)

To insert a linked object (Windows)


Editing linked or embedded objects (Windows)

You can edit a linked or embedded object created in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and inserted into another application as an OLE object. You can edit a linked object by editing its source file in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Any changes you make to the source file are automatically applied to the linked object.

Related Topics

To edit a linked or embedded object (Windows)


To edit a linked or embedded object (Windows)

1	Double-click the linked or embedded object to start Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

2	Edit the object.

3	Save the changes.

4	Close Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

5	Return to the active application window to review the edits.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a linked or embedded object by starting Corel PHOTO-PAINT and opening the file directly.

Related Topics

Editing linked or embedded objects (Windows)


Using watermarks to identify bitmaps

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11 includes the ImageBridge plugin from Digimarc, which allows you to embed and detect digital watermarks in images. These watermarks contain copyright and authorship information, but they do not interfere significantly with the visual quality of images.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps


Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

A Digimarc watermark embeds copyright details, contact information, and image attributes in an image. A watermark makes subtle changes to the brightness of pixels in an image. These changes cannot be readily seen; however following image processing, you might notice changes in the brightness of some pixels. Digimarc watermarks aren't affected by normal editing, printing, and scanning.

Detecting watermarks

In Windows, when you open an image in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can check for a watermark. If a watermark is present, a copyright symbol displays on the title bar. You can find information about the watermarked image by reading the embedded message and by linking to the contact profile in the Digimarc database.

Embedding watermarks

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can also embed Digimarc watermarks in images. First, you must obtain a unique Creator ID by subscribing to Digimarc's online service. The Creator ID includes contact details, such as name, phone number, address, e-mail and World Wide Web addresses.

Once you have a Creator ID, you can embed a watermark in an image. You can specify the copyright year, image attributes, and the durability of a watermark. You can also specify the target output method for an image, such as print or Web.

Digimarc watermarks do not prevent unauthorized image use or copyright infringement. But the watermarks do communicate copyright claims. They also provide contact information for those who want to use or license an image.

For more information about Digimarc, see www.digimarc.com.

Related Topics

To detect a watermark

To get a Creator ID

To embed a watermark


To detect a watermark

1	Click Effects [image] Digimarc [image] Read watermark.

2	Click Web lookup to view the Web page with contact details, or call the Digimarc fax-back service at the listed fax number.

 Tip

•	(Windows) You can also detect a watermark by enabling the Check for watermark option when you open or import an image.

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To get a Creator ID

To embed a watermark


To get a Creator ID

1	Click Effects [image] Digimarc [image] Embed watermark.

2	Click Personalize.

3	In the Personalize creator ID dialog box, click Register, and follow the instructions on the Digimarc Web site.

4	In the Personalize creator ID dialog box, type your Creator ID in the Creator ID box.

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To detect a watermark

To embed a watermark


To embed a watermark

1	Click Effects [image] Digimarc [image] Embed watermark.

2	In the Copyright year(s) box, type a year or years.

You cannot type a year before 1922 or after the current year. Separate the years with commas.

3	In the Image attributes area, enable the check boxes for the applicable attributes.

4	Choose an option from the Target output list box.

Monitor and Web require a DPI setting of less than 200, while Printer requires a dpi setting of 300 or higher.

5	Type a value in the Watermark durability box.

Higher values increase the persistence of the watermark.

If you want to confirm the information available to viewers when they detect the watermark, enable the Verify check box.

 Tip

•	Combine all objects with the background before adding a watermark. For more information about combining objects with the background, see "Grouping and combining objects".

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To detect a watermark

To get a Creator ID


Changing color modes

Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK or grayscale, changes the image's color structure and size and can affect how the image displays and prints.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing the color mode of images

•	changing images to the black-and-white color mode

•	changing images to the paletted color mode

•	changing images to the duotone color mode


Changing the color mode of images

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11, the colors of images are defined by color modes. Computer monitors display images in the RGB color mode; by default, images in Corel PHOTO-PAINT are created in the RGB color mode. You can convert images to different color modes, depending on their intended use. For example, it is recommended that images sent for high-end printing be in the CMYK color mode. For the World Wide Web, photos should be in the RGB color mode and GIF images should be in the paletted color mode.

Color modes are described by their component colors and bit depth. For example, the RGB (24-bit) color mode is composed of red, green, and blue values and has a bit depth of 24 bits. Similarly, the CMYK (32-bit) color mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values and has a bit depth of 32 bits.

Although on the screen you may not be able to see the difference between an image in the CMYK color mode and an image in the RGB color mode, the images are quite different. Colors from the RGB color space can cover a greater range of the visual spectrum (they have a larger gamut) than those from the CMYK color space. For the same image dimensions, a CMYK image has a larger file size than an RGB image.

Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you should finish editing and then save an image before you convert it to a new color mode.

Color modes are based on standard color models used to describe, classify, and reproduce color digitally. For more information about the CMYK, RGB, HSB, and grayscale color models, see "Understanding color models."

Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color modes:

Black-and-white (1-bit)	Grayscale (8-bit)
Duotone (8-bit)	Paletted (8-bit)
RGB color (24-bit)	Lab color (24-bit)
CMYK color (32-bit)	Multichannel
Grayscale (16-bit)	RGB color (48-bit)
NTSC RGB (video)	PAL RGB (video)
The black-and-white, paletted, and duotone color modes provide conversion options. For more information, see

•	"Changing images to the black-and-white color mode"

•	"Changing images to the paletted color mode"

•	"Changing images to the duotone color mode"

Related Topics

To change the color mode of an image


To change the color mode of an image

•	Click Image [image] Color mode, and click one of the following:

•	Grayscale (8-bit)

•	RGB color (24-bit)

•	Lab color (24-bit)

•	CMYK color (32-bit)

•	Multichannel

•	Grayscale (16-bit)

•	RGB color (48-bit)

•	NTSC RGB

•	PAL RGB

 Note

•	The current mode of the image determines the modes to which the image can be converted. Modes which are not available are grayed.

Related Topics

Changing the color mode of images


Changing images to the black-and-white color mode

You can convert images to the 1-bit black-and-white color mode to reduce file size, or to create artistic looks. The black-and-white color mode is not the same as the grayscale color mode. In black-and-white images, each pixel must be either black or white; grayscale images can include black, white, and 254 shades of gray.

When you convert images to the black-and-white color mode, you can adjust settings [image] such as threshold, screen type, and intensity [image] and choose from seven black-and-white conversion types:

•	Halftone [image] creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black and white pixels in an image. You can choose the screen type, angle for the halftone, lines per unit, and the unit of measure.

•	Line art [image] produces a high-contrast black-and-white image. Colors with a grayscale value lower than the threshold value that you set change to black, while colors with a grayscale value higher than the threshold value change to white.

•	Ordered [image] organizes the gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. This option is best suited for uniform colors, such as those used in charts and graphs.

•	Jarvis [image] applies the Jarvis algorithm to individual pixels. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.

•	Stucki [image] applies the Stucki algorithm to individual pixels. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.

•	Floyd-Steinberg [image] applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to individual pixels. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.

•	Cardinality-Distribution [image] creates a textured look by applying a calculation and distributing the result to each pixel.

Related Topics

To change an image to the black-and-white color mode


To change an image to the black-and-white color mode

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Black-and-white (1-bit).

2	Choose a conversion option from the Conversion list box.

3	Specify the conversion settings you want.

If you want to view other parts of the image, drag the hand in the Preview window.

Related Topics

Changing images to the black-and-white color mode


Changing images to the paletted color mode

The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is frequently used for GIF images on the World Wide Web. When you convert a complex image to the paletted color mode, a fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color table, or palette. As a result, the paletted image contains less data than the original, and it has a smaller file size. Paletted color mode is an 8-bit mode that stores and displays images using up to 256 colors.

Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette

When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you use a predefined or a custom color palette and then edit the palette by replacing individual colors. If you choose the Optimized color palette, you can also edit the palette by specifying a range sensitivity color. The color palette you use to convert the image is called the processed color palette, and it can be saved for use with other images.

For more information about creating custom color palettes, see "Working with color."

Dithering

Paletted images can only contain up to 256 different colors. If the original image contains many colors, you can use dithering to create the illusion of seeing more than 256 colors. Dithering creates additional colors and shades from an existing palette by interspersing pixels of different colors. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates an optical mix, so you perceive additional colors.

Dithering can be done by distributing colors either regularly or randomly. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using regular dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels randomly, making edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki and Floyd-Steinberg are methods of error diffusion.

If your image contains only a few colors and simple shapes, you do not need to use dithering.

Setting the color range for a custom color palette

When you change an image to the paletted color mode using the Optimized palette, you can choose a seed color, or base color, and a range sensitivity for the seed color. The seed color, and similar colors that fall within the range settings, are included in the processed color palette. You can also specify how much emphasis to place on the range sensitivity. Because the palette has a maximum of 256 colors, emphasizing a seed color reduces the number of colors that fall outside the range sensitivity.

Saving conversion options

After you choose a color palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for the changing of an image to the paletted color mode, you can save the selected options as a conversion preset that you can use with other images. You can add and remove as many conversion presets as you want. You can also remove the presets you have added.

Changing multiple images to the paletted color mode

You can change multiple images to the paletted color mode simultaneously. Before you perform a batch conversion, you must open the images in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. All images that you include in the batch are changed using the color palette and conversion options you specify.

Related Topics

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To set the color range for a custom color palette

To change multiple files to the paletted color mode


To change an image to the paletted color mode

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Paletted (8-bit).

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Choose one of the following color palette types from the Palette list box:

•	Uniform [image] provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue

•	Standard VGA [image] provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette

•	Adaptive [image] provides colors original to the image, and preserves the individual colors (the entire color spectrum) in the image

•	Optimized [image] creates a color palette based on the highest percentage of colors in the image. You can also select a range sensitivity color for the color palette.

•	Black Body [image] contains colors that are based on temperature. For example, black may represent cold temperatures, while red, orange, yellow, and white may represent hot temperatures.

•	Grayscale [image] provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black (0) to white (255)

•	System [image] provides a palette of Websafe and grayscale colors

•	Websafe [image] provides a palette of 216 colors that are common to Web browsers in both Windows and the Mac OS

4	Choose a dithering option from the Dithering list box.

5	Move the Dither intensity slider to adjust the amount of dithering.

You can also
Save the conversion options as a preset	Click Add preset, and type a name in the Save preset box.
Edit the processed color palette	Click the Processed palette tab, and click Edit. In the Color table dialog box, edit the color palette.
Save the processed color palette	Click the Processed palette tab, and click Save. Choose the folder where you want to save the processed color palette, and type a filename.
 Note

•	The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than do the error diffusion options Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg; however, it is less accurate.

 Tips

•	You can choose a custom color palette by clicking the Options tab, clicking Open, locating the color palette file you want, and double-clicking the filename.

•	You can load preset conversion options by choosing a preset from the Presets list box on the Options tab.

Related Topics

Changing images to the paletted color mode

To set the color range for a custom color palette

To change multiple files to the paletted color mode


To set the color range for a custom color palette

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Paletted (8-bit).

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Choose Optimized from the Palette list box.

4	Enable the Color range sensitivity to check box.

5	Click the Eyedropper tool, and click a color in the image.

6	Click the Range sensitivity tab, and specify the settings you want.

7	Move the range sensitivity sliders.

If you want to view the color palette, click the Processed palette tab.

Related Topics

Changing images to the paletted color mode

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To change multiple files to the paletted color mode


To change multiple files to the paletted color mode

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Paletted (8-bit).

2	Click the Batch tab.

3	From the left column, choose each file you want to change.

4	Click Add.

 Tip

•	You can preview an image by choosing it from the Preview image list box and clicking Preview.

Related Topics

Changing images to the paletted color mode

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To set the color range for a custom color palette


Changing images to the duotone color mode

Duotone color mode is used for specialized color printing. A duotone image is a grayscale image that has been enhanced with the addition of one to four colored inks. The following list describes the duotone types:

•	monotone [image] a grayscale image colored with a single ink

•	duotone [image] a grayscale image colored with two inks. In most cases, the first ink is black and the other ink is colored.

•	tritone [image] a grayscale image colored with three inks. In most cases, the first ink is black and the second and third inks are colored.

•	quadtone [image] a grayscale image colored with four inks. In most cases, the first ink is black and the second, third, and fourth inks are colored.

Adjusting tone curves

When you convert an image to the duotone color mode, a tone curve grid that represents the dynamic ink curves that are used throughout the conversion is displayed. The horizontal plane (x-axis) displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane (y-axis) indicates the intensity of an ink (from 0 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.

Saving and loading inks for duotone conversion

After you choose a duotone type and adjust the tone curves for the inks used to change images to the duotone color mode, you can save the ink settings and load them for use with other images.

Specifying how overprint colors display

When you change an image to the duotone color mode, you can specify which colors will overprint when you print an image. Overprint colors are the colors that have too much ink when two or more colors overlap. When you display the image, each color is applied on the screen in sequence, creating a layered effect.

You can view all instances in which the ink colors you choose overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You can also choose new overprint colors to see how they overlap.

Related Topics

To change an image to the duotone color mode

To specify how overprint colors display


To change an image to the duotone color mode

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Duotone (8-bit).

2	Click the Curves tab.

3	Click a duotone type from the Type list box.

4	Double-click an ink color in the Type window.

5	In the Select color dialog box, click a color, and click OK.

If you want to adjust the color's tone curve, click the ink tone curve on the grid to create a node, and drag the node to adjust the amount of color at that point on the grid.

You can also
Display all the ink tone curves on the grid	Enable the Show all check box.
Save the ink settings	Click Save. Choose the folder where you want to save the file with the new settings, and type a filename.
Specify how overprint colors display	Click the Overprint tab, and enable the Use overprint check box. Double-click the color you want to edit, and choose a new color.
 Tip

•	You can load ink settings by clicking the Curves tab, clicking Load, locating the file where the ink settings are stored, and double-clicking the filename.

Related Topics

Changing images to the duotone color mode

To specify how overprint colors display


To specify how overprint colors display

1	Click Image [image] Color mode [image] Duotone (8-bit).

2	Click the Overprint tab.

3	Enable the Use overprint check box.

4	Double-click the color that you want to edit.

5	In the Select color dialog box, choose a color model from the Model list box, click a color, and click OK.

If you want to preview the new overprint color, click Preview.

Related Topics

Changing images to the duotone color mode

To change an image to the duotone color mode